Home

N6 Series Standalone DVR User's Manual

1. Motion Detection and Various sensitivity levels Alarm can activate record or external alarm or screen message prompt Video Loss Alarm can activate external alarm or screen message prompt External Support record activation function or activate external alarm or screen Alarm message in specified period Alarm Manual Enable or disable alarm input channel Control 4 ch alarm input You 8 ch alarm input You 16 ch alarm input can set normal open or can set normal open or You can set normal close type to normal close type to normal open or select the alarm type select the alarm type normal close type to select the alarm type Alarm 3 channel relay output Output Alarm Relay 30V DC 2A 125V AC 1A activation alarm gt USB 2 USB 2 0 ports Interface Interface Alarm Input Network 1 RJ45 10M 100M 1000M self adaptable Ethernet port connection PTZ control port PERCE Support various PTZ control protocols RS232 Ordinary COM Debug keyboard connection and transparent serial port COM input and output via network System Information Hard Disk Display HDD current status Information Stream Statistics statistics Support various search engines such as time and type Display version information channel amount alarm input and output amount system version and release date On line user Display current on line user User Multi lever user management various management modes Ma
2. Enable tour Highlight box here to enable this function Interval System supports 1 4 8 9 16 window tour Input proper interval value here The value ranges from 5 120 seconds It is for schedule tour alarm motion detect tour Split You can select window split mode from the dropdown list Channel group It is for you to view channel names under current window split mode You can add delete channel here Double click one item you can change channel group setup to edit it Now system max supports 32 channels Please note channel group setup is for window amount equal to or smaller than 16 window System does not support channel group add edit delete function for 25 32 window mode Add Under specified window split mode click it to add channel group Delete Click it to remove selected channel group Move up Click it to move current selected channel up Move down Click it to move current selected channel down Default Click it to restore default setup Please highlight icon O to select the corresponding function After completing all the setups please click save button system goes back to the previous menu e DISPLAY Transparency 200 Channel Name Modify Time Display a Channel Display Resolution 1280x1024 Image Enhance Tour Setup Setup Motion Tour Type View 1 v Alarm Tour Type View 1 Default Cancel Figure 5 40 In Figure 5 40 click modify button after channel You can see an interface is shown as
3. Cancel Figure 4 4 There are several options for you See Figure 4 5 Restart application Figure 4 5 151 The other ways is to press power button on the front panel for at least 3 seconds system will stop all operations Then you can click the power button in the rear panel to turn off the DVR 4 1 4 Auto Resume after Power Failure The system can automatically backup video and resume previous working status after power failure 4 1 5 Replace Button Battery Please make sure to use the same battery model if possible We recommend replace battery regularly such as one year to guarantee system time accuracy Note Before replacement please save the system setup otherwise you may lose the data completely 4 2 Live Viewing After you logged in the system is in live viewing mode You can see system date time and channel name If you want to change system date and time you can refer to general settings Main Menu gt Setting gt General If you want to modify the channel name please refer to the display settings Main Menu gt Setting gt Display ET TI Camera lock Preview drag If you want to change position of channel 1 and channel 16 when you are previewing you can left click mouse in the channel 1 and then drag to channel 16 release mouse you can switch channel 1 and channel 16 positions e Use mouse middle button to control window split You can use mouse middle button to switch window split
4. Figure 4 36 176 Cancel Figure 4 37 4 8 Backup DVR support USB device backup and network download Here we introduce USB backup You can refer to Chapter 7 Web Client Operation for network download backup operation 4 7 1 Detect Device Click backup button you can see an interface is shown as in Figure 4 38 Here is for you to view devices information You can view backup device name and its total space and free space The device includes USB burner flash disk SD card and portable HDD PI BACKUP Y pp Name Type LeftSpace Total Space Device Status 1 v sdb1 USB DISK Ready 1 44 GB 1 96 GB Page Up Page Down Fr Select Cancel backup device or file Detect Backup Format Stop Figure 4 38 4 8 1 Backup Select backup device and then set channel file start time and end time Click add button system begins search All matched files are listed below System automatically calculates the capacity needed and remained See Figure 4 39 system only backup files with a v before channel name You can use Fn or cancel button to delete y after file serial number Click backup button you can backup selected files There is a process bar for you reference When the system completes backup you can see a dialogue box prompting successful backup 177 Selected Device sdb1 USB DISK Type All v Channel 1 v File Format DAV v Start Time 2011 04 27 00 00 00 Remove Add End Time 2
5. OK Cancel Figure 4 9 e All channel manual record Please highlight ALL after Manual See Figure 4 10 When system is in manual recording all scheduled set up you have set in will be null Main menu gt Setting gt Schedule You can see indication light in front panel turns on system begins manual record now we RECORD Record Mode All 1234 8 6 7 amp 3 10 44 12 18 14 15 16 Schedule Manual B eee G eeeeeeeec eo e828 Stop R Schedule Manual Stop EEEE SEES SE EE OK Cancel Figure 4 10 4 3 5 Stop all channel recording Please highlight ALL after Stop See Figure 4 11 System stops all channel recording no matter what mode you have set in the menu Main menu gt Setting gt Schedule 155 je RECORD Record Mode AIl 1234578101117 1814 5 15 Schedule Manual Stop eee G Geeseeeeeseeess r Schedule Manual Stop EESEL S SEES EEEE OK Cancel Figure 4 11 4 4 Search amp Playback Click search button in the main menu search interface is shown as below See Figure 4 12 Usually there are three file types e R Regular recording file eo A External alarm recording file e M Motion detection recording file From ReadWrite Hdd REC PIC lt Jan 2013 gt Su Mo Tu We Th Sa 1213 5 8 9 10 11 12 16 117 18 19 24 25 26 31 eho 00 Seen RSE DO 00 00 00 00 00 me 14 5 16 17 18 19 7 1 d 4 AA AAA AAA A AAA A eli A A DH O O 0
6. Oa Or DHCP 0 0 AN Cancel Connection Figure 5 27 After successfully connection you can see the following interface You can see it is connected now See Figure 5 27 Connection Status Verification Type Encrypt Type Connection Password IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway WIFI Connection kqy Connected WEP AUTO 21000600000 192 168 1 FE RPGR oe 192 OS aed Cancel DisConnect Figure 5 28 e WIFI working status Here you can view current connection status Please note After successful connection you can see WIFI connection icon at the top right corner of the preview interface e When the hotspot verification type is WEP system displays as AUTO since the device can not detect its encryption type System does not support verification type WPA and WPA2 The display may become abnormal for the verification type and encryption type After device successfully connected to the WIFI you can view the hotspot name IP address subnet mask default gateway and etc See Figure 5 29 203 WIFI SETTING Auto Connect WIFI MM Fi SSID Signal Intensity 1 TP LINK_52019C 2 xingjiaibn Current Hotspot kqy 3 14029 il 4 TP LINK_076ACA IP Address 192 168 1 100 5 kay 6 10388 subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 7 10333 Gateway 192 168 1 1 Refresh Connection Disconnect Cancel Apply Figure 5 29 5 3 5 9 Email The email interface is shown as below See Figure 5 30 SMTP server Plea
7. D1 704x576 704x480 Playback All channel D1 704x576 704x480 HD1 352x576 352x480 2CIF 704x288 704x240 CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Support dual streams Extra stream resolution CIF 352 x 288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Image Quality 6 level image quality Adjustable Privacy mask Support one privacy mask of user defined size in full screen Support max 4 zones Image ee ge Channel information time information and privacy mask zone Information TV Adjust Adjust TV output zone suitable to anamorphic video Resolution PAL NTSC 80 Channel and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of display screen Color Hue brightness contrast saturation and gain setup for each channel Configuration Audio Audio Input 4 ch 200 2000mv 10KQ BNC 1 ch audio output 200 3000mv 5KQ BNC Audio Output Channel Lock Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized user seeing secret video Channel name recording status screen lock status video loss status Bidirectional 1 ch audio talk input 200 3000mv 10KQ BNC Audio Hard Disk 8 built in SATA port Support 8 HDDs Hard Disk Audio PCM 28 8MByte h mallee Occupation Video 56 900MByte h Manual recording motion detection recording schedule recording and alarm recording Recording Mode Priority Manual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection
8. Fn Button in the front panel or click Fn key in the remote control The interface is shown as in Figure 4 42 179 View 1 View 4 View 9 View 16 Color Setting search Record Alarm Output Alarm Input Main Menu Figure 4 42 Click Pan Tilt Zoom the interface is shown as below See Figure 4 43 Here you can set the following items o Step value ranges fro 1 to 8 eo Zoom eo Focus Oo Iris Please click icon l and Ed to adjust zoom focus and iris O Zoom Focus e Iris Set Page Switch gars Use Figure 4 43 In Figure 4 43 please click direction arrows See Figure 4 44 to adjust PTZ position There are total 8 direction arrows Figure 4 44 4 8 3 3D Intelligent Positioning Key In the middle of the eight direction arrows there is a 3D intelligent positioning key SeeFigure 4 45 Please make sure your protocol supports this function and you need to use mouse to control 180 Click this key system goes back to the single screen mode Drag the mouse in the screen to adjust section size The dragged zone supports 4X to 16X speeds It can realize PTZ automatically The smaller zone you dragged the higher the speed a IT Figure 4 45 Here is a sheet for you reference Name Function function Shortcut Function function Shortcut key E T Key Zoom fs Near Fen A er CIR Y IE a O E ris cose n4 fg Open bum 4 10Preset Patrol Pattern Scan In Figure 4 43 pleas
9. HDMI Output Network Switch mr A ii i Network User Network User Network User Network Keyboard Figure 2 44 2 3 6 General 1 5U Series Please refer to Figure 2 45 for connection sample 116 Y as 3 i Alarm Output Al I P3483 Video Input s ss anaes a PTZ Control Bidirectional Talk Output A a Video Output Power Switch Do a oo00000000000F oo HO po00009000 y Power Input Jna MA Matrix Output Loop Output Audio Input Audio Output Bidirectional Talk Input VGA Output HDMI Output eSATA USB Port Network Switch Online User Online User Online User Network Keyboard Figure 2 45 2 3 7 HD SDI 1 5U Series Please refer to Figure 2 46 for connection sample The following figure is based on the 16 channel series product 117 Online User my j Ca T l Alarm Input Alarm Output no ha be Bidirectional Video Input Audio Input Talk Output Video Output alg Bidirectional Audio Output Talk Input Power Switch USB Port eSATA Port Power Input Fan VGA Output HDMI Output Network Switch Network User Network User Network User Network Keyboard Figure 2 46 2 3 8 2HDD 2CIF 1 5U Series Simple1 5U Series The following figure is based on the 2HDD 2CIF 1 5U 16 channel series product See Figure 2 47 118 ae 8 701084 Video Audio Alarm Alarm Video Input PU Vide
10. Network One RJ45 10M 100M 1000M self adaptable Ethernet port connection PTZ control port R485 Support various PTZ control protocols RS232 N A IZ System Hard Disk Display HDD current status Information Information Stream Statistics statistics Support various search engines such as time and type ion Display version information channel amount alarm input and output amount system version and release date User Multi lever user management various management modes Management User Integrated management for local user serial port user and network user Manageme Configurable user power nt Support user group and its corresponding rights modification No limit to the user or group amount ora Password modification ___ Administrator can modify other user s password Authenticati An Account lock strategy o Five times login failure in thirty minutes may result in account lock Upgrade Web browser client end and update tool Password login protection to guarantee safety User friendly interface when login Provide the following options Logout shutdown restart Right authentication when shut down to make sure only those proper people can turn off DVR DC 12V Power Consumptio Login Logout and Shutdown General lt 25W With adapter exclude HDD Parameter N 23 Working Temperatur e Working 10 90 Humidity Pressure 325 W x242 D x55mm H Weight 1 25K
11. PTZ control port TEE Support various PTZ control protocols RS232 Ordinary COM Debug keyboard connection and transparent serial port COM input and output via network System Hard Disk Display HDD current status Information Information Stream Statistics statistics Support various search engines such as time and type ersion amount system version and release date User Multi lever user management various management modes Management User Integrated management for local user serial port user and network user Manageme Configurable user power nt Support user group and its corresponding rights modification No limit to the user or group amount Ord Password modification a Administrator can modify other user s password Authenticati SN Account lock strategy o Five times login failure in thirty minutes may result in account lock Upgrade Web browser client end and update tool Password login protection to guarantee safety User friendly interface when login Provide the following options Logout shutdown restart Right authentication when shut down to make sure only those proper people can turn off DVR DC 12V Power General Consumptio Parameter Login Logout and Shutdown lt 25W Include adapter Exclude HDD n Working C C Temperatur e Working 10 90 Humidity Pressure 1 5U standard industrial case 440 W x410 D x70mm H Weight 3 5 4 5KG Exclude HDD Installati
12. The larger the number is the higher the contrast is You can use this function when the whole video bright is OK but the contrast is not proper Please note the video may become hazy if the value is too low If this value is too high the dark section may lack brightness while the bright section may over exposure The recommended value ranges from 40 to 60 It is to adjust monitor window saturation The value ranges from O to 100 The default value is 50 The larger the number is the strong the color is This value has no effect on the general brightness of the whole video The video color may become too strong if the value is too high For the grey part of the video the distortion may occur if the white 247 balance is not accurate Please note the video may not be attractive if the value is too low The recommended value ranges from 40 to 60 The gain adjust is to set the gain value The smaller the value is the low the noise is But the brightness is also too low in the dark environments It can enhance the video brightness if the value is high But the video noise may become too clear White level It is to enhance video effect Color mode It includes several modes such as standard color You can select corresponding color mode here you can see hue brightness and contrast and etc will adjust accordingly 7 8 1 2 Video and Audio 7 8 1 2 1 Encode The encode interface is shown as below See Figure 7 19 ele
13. 1112 4 13141516 7 et TE ob USABA t la ae A B T T R R Figure 3 7 You can refer to the following sheet for alarm input and output information la 2s Du Ay 5 ALARM 1 to ALARM 16 The alarm becomes active in low voltage 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 141 NO1 C1 The first four are four groups of normal open activation output NO2 C2 on off button NO3 C3 NO5 C5 NCS is a group of NO NC activation output on off button NO4 C4 NO5 C5 NC5 CTRL 12V Control power output The power output is off when the alarm is canceled It is rated power output ae his 485 A B 485 communication port They are used to control devices such as PTZ Please parallel connect 120TQ between A B cables if there are too many PTZ decoders T T R R 4 pin full duplex RS485 port T T are the output cable and R R are input cable 3 8 1 7 960H 4HDD 1 5U Series The 960H 4HDD 1 5U series product interface is shown as in Figure 3 8 SET EET 4234456786 4 9 1011 12 13141516 AAA AA 4 a Wo E Wo C Wo No amp F F Wo c Nc iy fav AG Figure 3 8 You can refer to the following sheet and Figure 3 6 for alarm input and output information la 237 45 55 ALARM 1 to ALARM 16 The alarm becomes active in low voltage 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 NO1 C1 The first four are four groups of normal open activation output NO2 C2 on off button N
14. 485 A B 485 communication port They are used to control devices such as PTZ Please parallel connect 120TQ between A B cables if there are too many PTZ decoders 3 8 1 2 960H 1U Series The interface is shown as below See Figure 3 3 12345678 9 1011 EESEREZ OE NDE elfelfelfe IIT Figure 3 3 Please refer to the following sheet and Figure 3 3 for detailed information do Dy Abe Os ALARM 1 to ALARM 8 The alarm becomes active in low voltage 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 There are three groups of normal open activation output on off button Earth cable 139 3 8 1 3 HD SDI 1080P 1U Series The interface is shown as below See Figure 3 4 NO1 C1 NO2C02LN03C3 123 4 aAB2 Figure 3 4 Please refer to the following sheet and Figure 3 5 for detailed information 1 2 3 4 ALARM 1 to ALARM 4 The alarm becomes active in low voltage There are three groups of normal open activation output on off button 485 A B 485 communication port They are used to control devices such as ia PTZ Please parallel connect 120TQ between A B cables if there are too many PTZ decoders ee Facet 3 8 1 4 2HDD 1U Entry level Series The interface is shown as below See Figure 3 5 SANAAA AEOBNASAANAA Figure 3 5 Please refer to the following sheet and Figure 3 5 for detailed information 1s 2 3 45 5 ALARM 1 to ALARM 8 The alarm becomes activ
15. 5 5 2 Abnormality Abnormality interface is shown as in Figure 5 52 Event type There are several options for you such as disk error no disk disconnection IP conflict MAC conflict and etc Alarm output Please select alarm activation output port multiple choices Latch Here you can set corresponding delaying time The value ranges from 10s 300s System automatically delays specified seconds in turning off alarm and activated output after external alarm cancelled Show message system can pop up the message in the local screen to alert you when alarm occurs Alarm upload System can upload the alarm signal to the network including alarm centre if you enabled current function Send email System can send out email to alert you when alarm occurs Buzzer Highlight the icon to enable this function The buzzer beeps when alarm occurs a ABNORMALITY Event Type No Disk Enable a M Alarm Out ES Latch MShow Message Alarm upload Send Efnail Cancel Figure 5 52 5 5 3 Alarm Output 218 Here is for you to set proper alarm output Please highlight icon O to select the corresponding alarm output After all the setups please click OK button system goes back to the previous menu See Figure 5 53 ALARM OUTPUT Cancel Figure 5 53 5 5 4 Manual Record Please refer to chapter 4 3 manual record 5 5 5 Account Here is for you to implement account management See Figure 5 54 Here you can Add new user Modif
16. No 0 Preset Pattern Tour AutoScan AutoPan Flip Reset Page Switch Figure 6 6 6 2 1 Preset Setup Note The following setups are usually operated in the Figure 6 2 Figure 6 5 and Figure 6 6 In Figure 6 2 use eight direction arrows to adjust camera to the proper position In Figure 6 5 click preset button and input preset number The interface is shown as in __Figure 6 7 Add this preset to one patrol number Function Preset 1 Preset Patrol No 10 Patrol Pattern Set Border Del Preset Figure 6 7 6 2 2 Activate Preset In Figure 6 6 please input preset number in the No blank and click preset button 6 2 3 Patrol Setup In Figure 6 5 click patrol button The interface is shown as in Figure 6 8 Input preset number and then add this preset to one patrol _ PANTILT ZOOM gt lt Function Preset 1 Preset Patrol No Patrol Le Pattern Add Preset Border Del Preset Figure 6 8 6 2 4 Activate Patrol In Figure 6 6 input patrol number in the No blank and click patrol button 6 2 5 Pattern Setup In Figure 6 5 click pattern button and then click begin button The interface shows like Figure 6 9 235 Please go to Figure 6 2 to modify zoom focus and iris Go back to _ Figure 6 9 and click end button You can memorize all these setups as pattern 1 Function Patern Preset Patrol No 0 Patrol ur Pattern Begin Border End Figure 6 9 6 2 6 Activate Pa
17. You need to check the box to enable motion detection function Please select a channel from the dropdown list Period Motion detection function becomes activated in the specified periods See Figure 7 39 There are six periods in one day Please draw a circle to enable corresponding period Click OK button system goes back to motion detection interface please click save button to exit Anti dither system only memorizes one event during the anti dither period The value ranges from 5s to 600s Sensitivity iti There are six levels The sixth level has the highest sensitivity Region There are six levels The sixth level has the highest sensitivity Region lf you select motion detection type you can click this button to set motion detection zone The interface is shown as in Figure 7 40 There are PAL 22X18 NTSC 22X15 zones Right click mouse you can go to full screen display mode Do remember clicking OK button to save your motion detection zone setup Record System auto activates motion detection channel s to record once channel an alarm occurs Please note you need to set motion detect record period and go to Storage gt Schedule to set current channel as schedule record Record Delay System can delay the record for specified time after alarm ended The value ranges from 10s to 300s Alarm out Enable alarm activation function You need to select alarm output port so that system can activate corresponding al
18. gt IP Filter SNMP Version Y va lv y2 gt Email gt UPnP gt Multicast gt Alarm Centre Event Storage System Advanced Information Figure 7 35 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Parameter Funeti n S SNMP Port The listening port of the proxy program of the device Itis a UDP port not a TCP port The value ranges from 1 to 65535 The default value is 161 It is a string It is a command between the manage process and the proxy process It defined the authentication access control and the management relationship between one proxy and one group of the managers Please make sure the device and the proxy are the same Read Community 260 Parameter Function a ee Hogan epa supported in the specified name The default setup is public Write Community It is a string lt is a command between the manage process and the proxy process It defined the authentication access control and the management relationship between one proxy and one group of the managers Please make sure the device and the proxy are the same The read community will read write access all the objects the SNMP supported in the specified name The default setup is write Trap address The destination address of the Trap information from the proxy program of the device Trap port The destination port of the Trap information from the proxy program of the device It is for the gateway device and the client end PC in
19. gt TCP IP O Send sms O sms Activate O Tel Activate i Receiver Sender Caller gt Connection gt WIFI gt PPPoE gt DDNS gt IP Filter gt Email gt UPnP gt SNMP Title DVR Message gt Multicast gt Alarm Centre Event Storage System Advanced Information Figure 7 29 255 7 8 2 5 PPPoE The PPPoE interface is shown as in Figure 7 30 Input the PPPoE user name and password you get from the IPS internet service provider and enable PPPoE function Please save current setup and then reboot the device to get the setup activated Device connects to the internet via PPPoE after reboot You can get the IP address in the WAN from the IP address column Please note you need to use previous IP address in the LAN to login the device Please go to the IP address item to via the device current device information You can access the client end via this new address WEB service T ANISTON ON ET Channel PPPOE Network gt TCPAP User Name gt Connection gt WIFI Password IP Address gt 3G gt IP Filter gt Email gt UPnP gt SNMP gt Multicast gt Alarm Centre Event Storage System Advanced Information Figure 7 30 7 8 2 6 DDNS The DDNS interface is shown as in Figure 7 31 The DDNS is to set to connect the various servers so that you can access the system via the server Please go to the corresponding service website to apply a domain name and then
20. 1 3 24 A OCHS A e UU E easter rane aau nana eee 76 1 3 25 8HDD Full D1 2U Entry level Seres onnu a Ea aS 80 2 OVERVIEW AND CONTRO Ss 84 2 1 Front Rano lsn N E casein we cee u onsen E a sas usteneausanse cane eneswetects O 84 2 1 1 1HDD Full D1 Smart 1U 1HDD 2CIF Smart 1U Series Enhanced 1HDD Full D1 Smart 1U Enhanced 1HDD 2CIF Smart 1U Series oo cc ccccccccccseeccccccccccccccaccseccccecscccceuusececeaeseeceeaees 84 O IN AM O O 84 219 General WIS Cre S in 85 2 1 4 960H 1U Series 2HDD 1U Entry level Series HD SDI 1080P 1U Series 87 2 1 5 Full D11 5U and Simple 1 5U SENE Sonae a E 89 2 1 6 HD SDI 1080P 1 5U Series 960H 1 5U Series 2HDD full D1 1 5U Entry level Series 4HDD full D1 1 5U Entry level Series 2HDD 2CIF 1 5U Series 2HDD CIF 1 5U Series ooooccconccoo 91 2 1 7 General 2U Series 8HDD Full D1 2U Entry level Series oooooconoocccoocncconanccananonananonnnos 92 2 2 A O 94 22 General MINUS SAO sai Said 94 22 Enhanced Mini TU Sereg ati 96 2 2 3 1HDD Full D1 Smart 1U Series 1HDD 2CIF Smart 1U Series cccnoonnccnonaccconananinonnnnnonos 97 2 2 4 Enhanced 1HDD Full D1 Smart 1U Series Enhanced 1HDD 2CIF Smart 1U Series 98 22 0 General VU Snes rara 99 A A A S o E O S wien senee en een 100 22 7 TAD SOO TOSOR TU Ses aca 100 22 0 2ADD AU Enty level Soles aria ala 101 2 259 FORD SUSE SEDO 102 2 2 10 2HDD 2CIF 1 5U Series Simple 1 5U Series ocoooo
21. 12V output port Output Alarm Relay 30VDC 2A 125V AC 1A activation alarm USB 2 USB 2 0 ports Interface Interface Network 1 RJ45 10M 100M 1000M self adaptable Ethernet port connection PTZ control port HES Support various PTZ control protocols RS232 Ordinary COM Debug keyboard connection and transparent serial port COM input and output via network 4 ch alarm input You 8 ch alarm input You 16 ch alarm input can set normal open or can set normal open or You can set Alarm Input normal close type to normal close type to normal open or select the alarm type gt select the alarm type normal close type to select the alarm type Information Information Data Data stream statistics for each channel in wave mode Stream Statistics Log Backup to 1024 log files statistics Support various search engines such as time and type Display version information channel amount alarm input and output amount system version and release date On line user Display current on line user User Multi lever user management various management modes Management User Integrated management for local user serial port user and network user Manageme Configurable user power nt Support user group and its corresponding rights modification No limit to the user or group amount Password modification Administrator can modify other user s password Authenticati en Account lock strategy as Five times login failure in thirty minute
22. 720P 30 720P 50 720P 60 1080P 25 1080P 30 10801 50 Standard 10801 60 43 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Dual stream supported Extra stream resolution D1 704x576 704x480 CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Quality mask Support max 4 zones Im boas age Channel information time information and privacy mask zone Information Channel Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding normally Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized user seeing secret video Channel Channel name recording status screen lock status video loss status Information and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of display screen Audio 4 ch 200 2000mv 8 ch 200 2000mv 4 ch 200 2000mv 10KQ BNC 10KQ BNC 10KQ BNC Audio 1 ch audio output 200 3000mv 5KO BNC Output Bidirectional 1 ch audio talk input 200 3000mv 10K 2 BNC Audio 1 ch audio talk output 200 3000mv 5K 2 BNC Real time Mode PAL 1f s to 25f s per channel In non real time mode and NTSC 1f s to 30f s per channel when the resolution of the main stream is Record 1080P the 1 5 9 13 Speed channel max supports 25f s or 30f s and the resolution of the rest channels support 12f s or 15f s Partition Touring schedule auto control PAL 50f s NTSC 60f s Real time 1080P 1920 1080 soon Recording playback 1 4 channel 1080P 1920 1080 720P 1280 720 PAL NTSC D1 704x576 704x480 CIF 352x288 352x240 Hard disk Hard Disk 4 buil
23. Channel Here you can view channel number The number displayed here is the max channel amount of your device Status There are three statuses schedule manual and stop Schedule System enables auto record function as you set in record schedule setup general motion detect and alarm It has the highest priority Enable corresponding channel to record no matter what period applied in the record setup record setup Start all Check the corresponding All button you can enable or disable all stop all channels record 7 8 5 System 7 8 5 1 General The general interface includes General date time and holiday setup 7 8 5 1 1 General The general interface is shown as in Figure 7 64 WEB service ve ACCESOO ANETO setup f Logout General Date amp Time Holiday Setup Channel Network Device ID DVR Event Device No 8 Storage Language English System i Video Standard NTSC kA A HDD Full Overrite gt Display Pack Duration 60 Minute gt Default gt Import amp Export gt Auto Maintain gt Upgrade gt RS232 gt PTZ Advanced Information Figure 7 64 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Parameter Function S Device ID It is to set device name Device No Itis device channel number Language You can select the language from the dropdown list Please note the device needs to reboot to get the modification activated Video This is to display video standard such as
24. Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S gt Pi re pa po po po po po po fo po pu po po pu pu po po po po po pd pu pu pudo pd ps Figure 7 92 button you can view the available storage device See Figure 7 93 Please select file s from the list and then Click Start backup button Please refer to chapter 7 8 1 2 4 to set device download path Search Download E Cfa Download Get Moises Channel Type All v 411 Record y Begin Time 2012 6 18 15 30 52 _ End Time 2012 6 19 15 30 52 MandAStrean y Stream Type Type Type Time y DAY Y Channel fi y Stream Type Begin Time Main Strean y 2012 6 18 15 30 52 End Time 2012 6 19 15 30 52 r Remote Backup Backup device sde5 USB y Backup type DAY o Size0m _ Bagin Tine _____ End Tine File type D 0 3 M04 0mr sde5 USB DISK 2012 06 18 1 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 16 2012 06 18 2012 06 16 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 DISK Be 42 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 D0 00 00 00 Ha 2012 06 18 1 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18
25. Image Channel information time information and privacy mask zone Information TV Adjust Adjust TV output zone suitable to anamorphic video Channel Lock Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding normally Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized user seeing secret video 67 Channel Channel name recording status screen lock status video loss status Information and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of display screen Color Hue brightness contrast saturation and gain setup for each channel Configuration Audio Maoron 4 ch 200 2000mv 8 ch 200 2000mv 4 ch 200 Audio Input 10KQ RCA 10KQ RCA 2000mv 10KQ RCA 1 ch audio output 200 3000mv 5KQ RCA Audio Output Bidirectional 1 ch audio talk input 200 3000mv 10KQ RCA Audio 1 ch audio talk output 200 3000mv 5K 2 RCA Hard Disk 2 built in SATA port Support 2 HDDs l Hard Disk Audio PCM 28 8MByte h nee Ck Occupation Video 56 900MByte h Manual recording motion detection recording schedule recording and alarm recording Recording Mode Priority Manual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection recording gt schedule recording Length Playback Repeat Way When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Record Search Various search engines such as time type and channel Playback Various fast play slow play speeds manual frame by frame playback Mode and reverse play mode Vari
26. P 75Q composite video signal output Video 1 ch VGA output Output 1 ch HDMI output Support TV VGA HDMI video output at the same time Video monitor Video 720P 25 720P 30 720P 50 720P 60 1080P 25 1080P 30 1080i 50 Standard 1080i 60 Record per channel Speed Partition Resol Recording playback 1 4 channel 1080P 1920 1080 720P 1280 720 Monitor Support monitor tour functions such as alarm motion detection and Touring schedule auto control QCIF 176x144 176x120 Dual stream supported Extra stream resolution D1 704x576 704x480 CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Image 6 level image quality Adjustable Quality Privacy Support one privacy mask of user defined size in full screen mask Support max 4 zones Image oe Oan Channel information time information and privacy mask zone TV Adjust Adjust TV output zone suitable to anamorphic video Channel Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding Lock normally Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized user seeing secret video Channel Channel name recording status screen lock status video loss status Information and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of display screen Audio Input 4 ch 200 2000mv 10KQ BNC 34 Audio 1 ch audio output 200 3000mv 5KO BNC Bidirectional 1 ch audio talk input 200 3000mv 10K 2 BNC 1 ch audio talk output 200 3000mv 5K Q BNC Hard disk Hard Disk 2 built in SATA
27. Sumsung TS H653 Sony Sony Samsung Compatible SATA HDD List NOTE Please upgrade the DVR firmware to latest version to ensure the accuracy of the table below And SATA HDD should be used for the DVR with SATA port Here we recommend HDD of 500G to 4T capacity 303 Seagate Seagate Pipeline 13250412CS 250G SATA HD2 Seagate Pipeline ST3320311CS 250G SATA HD2 Seagate Pipeline ST3500414CS 500G SATA HD2 Seagate Pipeline ST3500312CS 500G SATA HD2 Seagate Pipeline ST31000424CS SATA HD2 Seagate Pipeline ST31000322CS SATA HD2 a Pipeline ST1000VM002 ie SATA an Pipeline ST1500VMO002 SATA HD2 Seagate Pipeline ST2000VM002 EA SATA HD2 Seagate Pipeline ST2000VM003 SATA HD2 Seagate Seagate ST3500514NS 500G SATA Constellation ES Seagate Seagate ST31000524NS 1T SATA Constellation ES Seagate Seagate ST32000644NS SATA Constellation ES Seagate Seagate ST2000NM0011 SATA Constellation ES Seagate Seagate ST1000NM0011 SATA Constellation ES Seagate Seagate ST500NM0011 500G SATA Constellation ES ST2000NM0031 SATA 304 Constellation ES 1T SATA A E VO Seagate Seagate ST1000NM0031 Seems UE OO A e PP ica e Constellation ES e PP Constellation ES es THN Ta Constellation ES e imes O a Constellation ES e nese TORS r Constellation ES 2 e imee O r Constellation ES 2 nc e A Constellation ES 2 as IEA Constellation ES 2 as O r Constellation ES 2 O emea OEMS e Constellation ES 2 Westem Cariar SE WD320
28. e Each HDD Group is corresponding to several hard disks while one hard disk is only included in one HDD Group 214 e Each channel is only corresponding with one HDD Group while one HDD Group can store records from several channels e HDD Group is only available for read write HDD and self defined disks other types of hard disks cannot be set as HDD Group Important e Current series software version can only set the HDD group operation of the read write HDDs It is not for the redundancy HDD or read only HDD HDD Setting Click the button HDD Settings at the top right corner of the Figure 5 45 system will pop up an interface as below See Figure 5 47 e HDD Here you can view the HDD amount the device can support If there is a mark O in the front of the number it means current position has installed a HDD e HDD Group It lists the HDD Group number of current hard disk When you are setting the HDD Group please check the box of the hard disk and then choose the corresponding HDD Group number and save the settings Please note one HDD is corresponding to one group while one group can have many HDDs The HDD group No is corresponding HDD port the HDD group No may vary if you change the HDD In Figure 5 47 you can see the system has two working hard disks at the first and second position and the first hard disk belongs to HDD Group 1 the second hard disk belongs to HDD Group 2 Important Once you change the HDD Group s
29. 1080P 1 5U series product and the 4 8 channel HD SDI 2U series product do not support redundancy function When the schedule or the manual status is checked on the record control interface redundancy HDD only backups record files It does not backup picture Snapshot You can enable this function to snapshoot image when alarm occurs Record types There are four types regular motion detection MD Alarm MD amp alarm Holiday setting Click it you can see an interface shown as in Figure 4 19 Here you can set holiday date Check the box it means current channel shall record as your holiday setup 163 Please go to the Period interface to set the holiday date record setup Please note you need to go to Chapter 5 3 1 to enable Holiday function first Please highlight icon O to select the corresponding function After completing all the setups please click save button system goes back to the previous menu At the bottom of the menu there are color bars for your reference Green color stands for regular recording yellow color stands for motion detection and red color stands for alarm recording The white means the MD and alarm record is valid Once you have set to record when the MD and alarm occurs system will not record neither motion detect occurs nor the alarm occurs sec Redundancy i Snapshot Holiday Penod Record Type Regular MD Alarm MDSAlarm Period 1 00 00 x 0 E Pernod 2 0 Pernod 3 ip Period 4 00 Pernod 5 p Pern
30. 12 13 14 15 16 1 NOC 2 NOC There are three groups of normal open activation output on off 3 NO C button 3 8 2 Alarm Input Port Please refer to the following sheet for more information e Normal open or Normal close type Please parallel connect COM end and GND end of the alarm detector Provide external power to the alarm detector o Please parallel connect the Ground of the DVR and the ground of the alarm detector 146 eo Please connect the NC port of the alarm sensor to the DVR alarm input ALARM Use the same ground with that of DVR if you use external power to the alarm device Alarm input public end should jump out with device power end Alarm device connection terminal O ALARM GND Figure 3 17 3 8 3 Alarm Output Port Provide power to peripheral alarm device e To avoid overloading please read the following relay parameters sheet carefully e RS485 A B cable is for the A B cable of the PTZ decoder Relay Specification Model JRC 27F Material of the Silver touch Pidan Insulation Between touches with same 1000VAC minute polarity Between touches with different 1000VAC 1minute polarity Between touch and winding 1000VAC 1minute Surge voltage Between touches with same 1500V 10x160us polarity Length of open 9MS max time Length of close 9MS max time Electrical 200x103 times 0 5Hz 3 9 RS232 You can connect the DVR with POS or Keyboard through RS232 Wi
31. 12366 Domain Mode Y Default Domain Custom Domain Name Domain Name 52544CFA181C quickddns com Email Address Please input email address Note System will reclaim the domain that is idle for more than one year You can get a notification email one month before the reclaim if your email address setup is right Default Cancel Figure 5 22 Please note NNDS type includes CN99 DDNS NO IP DDNS Quick DDNS and Dyndns DDNS All the DDNS can be valid at the same time you can select as you requirement Quick DDNS function shall work with special DDNS server and special Professional Surveillance Software PSS 199 Quick DDNS and Client end Introduction 1 Background Introduction Device IP is not fixed if you use ADSL to login the network The DDNS function allows you to access the DVR via the registered domain name Besides the general DDNS the Quick DDNS works with the device from the manufacturer so that it can add the extension function 2 Function Introduction The quick DDNS client has the same function as other DDNS client end It realizes the bonding of the domain name and the IP address Right now current DDNS server is for our own devices only You need to refresh the bonding relationship of the domain and the IP regularly There is no user name password or the ID registration on the server At the same time each device has a default domain name Generated by MAC address for your option You can also use customized valid
32. 16 ch alarm input You input You input You input You input You can set can set can set can set can set normal normal normal normal normal open or open or open or open or open or normal normal normal normal normal close type close type close type close type close type to select the to select the to select the to select the to select the alarm alarm alarm alarm alarm type type type type type 6 channel 6 channel 6 channel 5 channel 5 channel relay relay relay relay relay output output output output output including including including including including one one one one one controllable controllable controllable controllable controllable DC 12V DC 12V DC 12V DC 12V DC 12V output port output port output port output port output port Alarm Relay 30V DC 2A 125VAC 1A activation alarm USB Interface 3 USB 2 0 ports Interface Network RJ45 10M 100M 1000M self adaptable Ethernet port connection PTZ control port EROS Support various PTZ control protocols RS232 Ordinary COM Debug keyboard connection and transparent serial port COM input and output via network Hard Disk Display HDD current status Information Data Stream Data stream statistics for each channel in wave mode Motion Detection and Alarm Alarm Input Alarm Output System Information ia Backup to 1024 log files 89 SENEMIES Support various search engines such as time and type Display vers
33. 2 Fix four screws in the HDD 3 Place the HDD in accordance with upper cover and side panel Turn just three rounds the four holes in the bottom 4 Turn the device upside down 6 Connect the HDD cable and and then turn the screws in power cable firmly 7 Put the cover in accordance 8 Secure the screws in the with the clip and then place the rear panel and the side panel upper cover back 3 3 3 1 5U series This series DVR has four SATA HDDs Please use HDD of 7200rpm or higher 1 Loosen the screws of the 2 Line up the HDD to the four 3 Use four screws to fix HDD upper cover holes of the HDD bracket 134 4 Unfasten the HDD power 5 Use the special data cable to 6 Insert the HDD power cable cable connect the HDD and the SATA Close the chassis and fix the port screws to secure firmly 3 3 4 2U series HD SDI series 960H This series DVR max supports 8 SATA HDDs Please use HDD of 7200rpm or higher 1 Loosen the screws of the 2 Remove the HDD upper 3 Now you can see the bottom Upper cover bracket bracket 4 Line up the HDD to the 5 Use screws to fix HDD 6 Install the upper bracket and then four holes of the HDD Use screws to fix HDD in the bracket bracket 7 Unfasten the HDD power 8 Insert the HDD power 9 Use the special data cable to cable cable connect the HDD and the SATA port Close the chassis and fix the screws to secure firmly Important lf the HDD a
34. 2 IP Filter IP filter interface is shown as in Figure 5 16 You can add IP in the following list The list supports max 64 IP addresses System supports valid address of IPv4 and IPv6 Please note system needs to check the validity of all IPv6 addresses After you enabled trusted sites function only the IP listed below can access current DVR If you enable blocked sites function the following listed IP addresses can not access current DVR e Enable Highlight the box here you can check the trusted site function and blocked sites function You can not see these two modes if the Enable button is grey e Type You can select trusted site and blacklist from the dropdown list You can view the IP address on the following column O Start address end address Select one type from the dropdown list you can input IP address in the start address and end address Now you can click Add IP address or Add IP section to add a For the newly added IP address it is in enable status by default Remove the V before the item and then current item is not in the list b System max supports 64 items c Address column supports IPv4 or IPv6 format If it is IPv6 address system can optimize it For example system can optimize aa 0000 00 O0aa O0aa O0aa O0aa 00aa as aa aa aa aa aa aa aa d System automatically removes space if there is any space before or after the newly added IP address e System only checks start address if you add IP addr
35. 2 ch D1 D1 1 2 ch D1 704x576 704x480 704x576 704x480 704x576 704x480 HD1 HD1 HD1 352x576 352x480 352x576 352x480 352x576 352x480 2CIF 2CIF 2CIF 704x288 704x240 704x288 704x240 704x288 704x240 Resolution CIF 352x288 CIF 352x288 CIF 352x288 176x144 176x120 176x144 176x120 176x144 176x120 Bidirectional 1 ch audio talk input 200 3000mv 10K 2 RCA Audio Reuse audio output channel Hard Disk 2 built in SATA port Support 2 HDDs Hard Disk Audio PCM 28 8MByte h AOS Occupation Video 56 900MByte h 54 Manual recording motion detection recording schedule recording and Recording alarm recording Mode Priority Manual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection recording gt schedule recording playback irae Support channel record quota setup Record and 1 to 120 minutes single record duration Default setup is 60 minutes Length Playback Repeat When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Way Record Various search engines such as time type and channel search Playback Various fast play slow play speeds manual frame by frame playback Mode and reverse play mode Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Various File Switch Ways Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto plays the next file in the current channel Multi There is 1 4 9 16 chann
36. 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 16 2012 06 18 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 T455744 Figure 7 93 LE 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 Zt 22 LE 23 23 00 00 0i 01 02 02 02 03 03 04 1 23 gt Pi Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main 5 Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S T81TT28 fnfs el mek a po po po po po ee po pul plo po pul po po pu po plo pul po po jd pd pudo pa 292 Now you can see system begins backup and the Stop backup button becomes valid You can click it to terminate current operation At the bottom of the interface there is a process bar for your reference 7 10 Alarm Click alarm function you can see an interface is shown as Figure 7 94 Here you can set device alarm type and alarm sound setup WEB service e Alarm Type O Motion Detect O External Alarm DO video Masking DO Disk Error O video Loss DO Disk Full Operation Cl Prompt Alarm Sound O Play Alarm Sound so
37. 8 4 Transfer Mode LAN Download NETWORK SETTING Default Net Mode MTU 1e30 5054 4cff fted6 16ec 64 2001 da8 207 9402 12001 da3 207 9401 HTTP Port 8086 RTSP Port 554 200 Latency NETWORK Multi address Default Ethernet Port Cancel Ethernet Subnet Mask Gateway TCP Port UDP Port Max Connection Preferred DNS Alternate DNS Default 255 20 2 3777 HTTP Pont 255 37778 RTSP Port 0 _ MTU 8 8 8 8 A 4 LAN Download Save Network Device Name LinkAddr IP Address Gateway TCP Pon UDP Port Max Connection Preferred DNS Alternate DNS A Cancel _Default_ NETWORK SETTING Ethernet IP Version fe80 2212 16ff fe19 19c 64 2001 da8 207 9471 2001 da8 207 9401 37777 HTTP Porn 37778 RTSP Port 20 MTU 1f 3 8 8 8 8 8 4 4 LAN Download Cancel 5 3 5 1 Network Setting Network setting interface is shown as in Figure 5 15 Please check the box to enable corresponding function and then double click current item to go to setup interface ls IP FILTER NTP MULTICAST PPPoE DDNS UPnP 3G WIFI EMAIL FTP ALARM CENTRE NETWORK PRIORITY REGISTER Figure 5 14 time windows com 60 239 255 42 42 No Available DDNS Setup Por Forwarding No Connection MailServer 25 Record FTP 0 0 0 0 Private 10 1 0 2 LAN 0 0 0 0 8000 Save Cancel Figure 5 15 194 5 3 5
38. Audio Input 4 ch 200 2000mv 10KQ RCA Audio 1 ch audio output 200 3000mv 5KO RCA Output Bidirectional Reuse the first audio input channel Audio Reuse audio output channel Hard Disk 1 built in SATA port Support 1 HDD Hard Disk Audio PCM 28 8MByte h Occupation Video 56 900MByte h Manual recording motion detection recording schedule recording and Recording alarm recording Mode Priority Manual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection recording gt schedule recording Storage Mode Support channel record quota setup Recording 1 to 120 minutes single record duration Default setup is 60 minutes Length Playback Repeat When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Way Record Various search engines such as time type and channel search Playback Various fast play slow play speeds manual frame by frame playback Mode and reverse play mode Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Various File Switch Ways Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto plays the next file in the current channel Multi There is 1 4 9 16 channel playback mode channel It may vary due to different series Playback Switch between self adaptive screen full screen when playback Zoom Partial When in one window full screen playback mode you can select any zone En
39. DVR configuration through client end and web browser Upgrade via client or browser to realize remote maintenance View alarm information such as external alarm motion detection and video loss via client Support network PTZ lens control File download backup and playback Multiple devices share information via corresponding software such as professional surveillance software PSS Duplex transparent COM Network alarm input and output Bidirectional audio Motion Zone setup support 396 330 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection Detection zones Various sensitivity levels Alarm can activate record or external alarm or screen message prompt Alarm can activate external alarm or screen message prompt Network Function Network control Motion Detection and Alarm Alarm can activate external alarm or screen message prompt Alarm message in specified period Manual Enable or disable alarm input channel Control 4 ch alarm 8 ch alarm 16 ch alarm input You can set normal input You input You open or normal close type to select the can set can set alarm type normal open normal open Alarm Input or normal or normal close type to close type to select the select the alarm alarm type type Alarm 3 channel relay output Output Alarm Relay 30VDC 2A 125V AC 0 5A activation alarm USB 2 USB 2 0 ports Interface Interface NO Network 1 RJ45 10M 100M 1000M self adaptable Ethernet port connection
40. Down 4 Increase decrease numeral Assistant function such as PTZ menu T z 4 In text mode input number 1 4 English character G H I Shift current activated control Left 2 When playback click these buttons to control playback bar In text mode input number 2 English character A B C 3 English character D E F Right 3 Go to previous menu or cancel current operation ESC When playback click it to restore real time monitor mode m Cp O Confirm current operation ENTER Enter Go to default button Go to menu Manually stop start recording working with direction keys Record AS or numeral keys to select the recording channel Multiple slow play speeds or normal playback Slow play 8 In text mode input number 8 English character T U V One window monitor mode click this button to display assistant function PTZ control and image color Assistant Fn Backspace function in numeral control or text control press it for 1 5seconds to delete the previous character before the Cursor 91 In motion detection setup working with Fn and direction keys to realize setup In text mode click it to switch between numeral English character small capitalized and etc Fast play 7 Realize other special functions Various fast soeeds and normal playback In text mode input number 7 English character P Q R S Play previous 0 In playback mode playback the previous video In
41. Input Alarm Input Alarm Output Bidirectional Talk Input Power Button A SUE eee eee EA dl a i i USB Port eSATA Port RS485 PTZ Control VGA Output HDMI Output Network Switch g Saa 3 Ea vsr Network User Network User Network User Network Keyboard Figure 2 55 2 4 Remote Control The remote control interface is shown as in Figure 2 56 Please note remote control is not our standard accessory and it is not included in the accessory bag 127 1 W Add 2 3 Nm a 7 5 Ta Faus iris A pe Hi 1H 8 6 o a E 11 12 A 1 a MY Ser ooo Tears I sruv fl ovooz o a ES Figure 2 56 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Serial Number__ Name 1 Power button Click it to boot up or shut down the device 2 Address Click it to input device number so that you can control it normal speed playback normal playback Next record In playback mode playback the 5 next video previous video to realize normal playback button to pause playback In real time monitor mode click this button to enter video search menu Reverse pause Reverse playback pause mode click this button to realize normal playback In reverse playback click this button to pause playback 128 Cancel Go back to previous menu or cancel current operation close upper interface or control 10 Record Start or stop record manually In record inte
42. Mode 36 1 3 12 2HDD System Compression Standard 4 CH composite 8 CH composite video 16 CH composite video input input NTSC PAL video input NTSC PAL BNC BNC 1 0VBp p 8750 NTSC PAL BNC 1 0VBp p B750 1 0VBp p B750 1 ch PAL NTSC BNC 1 0VP P 750 composite video signal output Video monitor 1 ch VGA output 1 ch HDMI output Video Output 1 ch matrix output 1 ch matrix output Support multiple window output mode Support TV VGA HDMI video output at the same time Support PAL NTSC Real time Mode PAL 1f s to 25f s per channel and NTSC 1f s to 30f s Record Speed per channel ee 1 4 1 4 8 9 windows windows Optional Monitor Support monitor tour functions such as alarm motion detection and Touring schedule auto control PAL 625TVL 50f s NTSC 525TVL 60f s 1U Entry level Series Main High performance industrial embedded micro controller Processor Embedded LINUX System Multiplex operations Multiple channel record multiple channel Resources playback and network operation simultaneously User friendly graphical user interface Input Devices Front panel USB mouse remote control Arabic number English character donation and extension Chinese Input Method optional Shortcut Copy paste operation USB mouse right key shortcut menu double Function click USB mouse to switch screen iai Compression G711A G711U POM Compression Real time monitor D1 704x576 704x480 Playback aa
43. PCM 28 8MByte h Occupation Video 56 900MByte h Manual recording motion detection recording schedule recording and Hard disk Recording alarm recording Mode Priority Manual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection Record and recording gt schedule recording Length Playback Repeat When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Way Record Various search engines such as time type and channel search Playback Various fast play slow play speeds manual frame by frame playback Mode and reverse play mode Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Various File Switch Ways Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto plays the next file in the current channel Multi There is 1 4 9 16 channel playback mode channel It may vary due to different series Playback Switch between self adaptive screen full screen when playback Zoom Partial When in one window full screen playback mode you can select any zone Enlargemen to activate partial enlargement function t Backup HDD backup function Backup Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk and etc os Support peripheral USB burner Support network download and save View monitor channel remotely DVR configuration through client end and web browser Upgrade via client or browser to reali
44. Port Mapping list The port mapping list here is the one to one relationship with the router s port mapping setting e Enable Switch Y It shows that the function of port mapping is enabled in this port o List lt gt Service name Defined by user lt gt Protocol Protocol type lt gt Internal port Port that has been mapped in the router 200 lt gt External port Port that has been mapped locally e Default UPNP default port setting is the HTTP TCP and UDP of the DVR e Add io the list Click it to add the mapping relationship eo Delete Click it to remove one mapping item Double click one item you can change the corresponding mapping information See Figure 5 24 Important When you are setting the router external port please use 1024 5000 port Do not use well known port 1 255 and the system port 256 1023 to avoid conflict For the TCP and UDP please make sure the internal port and external port are the same to guarantee the proper data transmission A UPNP ON de UPNP Status unknow Router LAN IP 0 WAN IP 0 Service Name Protocol vi HTTP TCP Y TCP TCP v UDP UDP Default Add to the List Delete Int Port 80 ELE 37778 Cancel Figure 5 23 Y PORT INFO Service Name TCP Protocol TCP IntPon AE Ext Port 37771 Cancel Figure 5 24 9 3 0 8 WIFI You can view the WIFI connection status in the Network Setting interface See Figure 5 25 You can view current c
45. SDI 2U series product support 1080P 720P D1 HD1 2CIF CIF QCIF resolution The 960H supports 960H D1 HD1 2CIF CIF QCIF resolution In FTP Main Menu gt Network gt Network Setting interface please input upload interval See the interface in the middle of Figure 4 22 In Schedule interface please enable snapshot function See interface on the right of Figure 4 22 Please refer to the following figure for detailed information See Figure 4 22 ENCODE Server IP E Port 21 Channel 1 y User Name Type Regular Extra Stream1 y Password Anonymous Compression H 264 v H 264 7 Remote Directon File Length 0 Resolution Snapshot sec __ SNAPSHOT Frame Rate Bit Rate Typ Mode Trigger Image Size CIF Channel Bit Rate Kb 3 Image Quality 4 Reference B Audio Video Audio Form OK Cancel Weekday Alarm Motion Regular Snapshot Frequency 1 SPL Time Period 1 Time Period 2 UVERLAT SNAPSHOT Default Copy Cancel Default Cancel 166 ya SCHEDULE Channel 1 v PreRecord 4 sec Redundancy W Snapshot Holidays Setting Period Record Type Regular MD Alarm MD amp Alarm Period 1 00 24 00 o Period 2 00 24 00 Period 3 00 24 00 Period 4 00 24 00 Period 5 00 24 00 Period 6 00 24 00 Regular MD Alarm MD amp Alarm 3 12 18 Default Copy Cancel Figure 4 22 4 5 2 2 Activation Snapshot Please follow the steps listed below to enable the activation snapshot
46. Select Delay Bro Snapshot a Video Matrix Buzzer Default Figure 4 23 4 5 2 3 Priority Please note the activation snapshot has the higher priority than schedule snapshot If you have enabled these two types at the same time system can activate the activation snapshot when alarm occurs and otherwise system just operates the schedule snapshot 4 5 3 Image FTP In Network interface you can set FTP server information Please enable FTP function and then click save button See Figure 4 24 Please boot up corresponding FTP server Please enable schedule snapshot Chapter 4 5 2 1 or activation snapshot Chapter 4 5 2 2 first now system can upload the image file to the FTP server e A A FTP Server IP 5 hy Ae Port 21 User Name Password Anonymous Remote Directory File Length 0 Snapshot sec Channal Please input the Weekday Alarm Motion Regular i pace corresponding information nee ds here if you just upload the image FTP Default Cancel Figure 4 24 4 6 Detect 4 6 1 Go to Detect Menu In the main menu from Setting to Detect you can see motion detect interface See Figure 4 25 There is three detection types motion detection video loss camera masking 168 The video loss has no detection region and sensitivity setup and camera masking has no detection region setup You can see motion detect icon if current channel has enabled motion detect alarm You can drag you mouse
47. Send email System can send out email to alert you when alarm occurs Record channel you can select proper channel to record alarm video Multiple choices lt You need to set alarm record mode as Schedule in Record interface Main Menu gt Advanced gt Record Please note the manual record has the highest priority System record all the time no matter there is an alarm or not if you select Manual mode lt gt Now you can go to the Schedule interface Main Menu gt Setting gt Schedule to set the record type corresponding channel number week and date You can select the record type Regular MD Alarm MD8Alarm Please note you can not select the MD amp Alarm and MD or Alarm at the same time lt gt Now you can go to the Encode interface to select the alarm record and set the encode parameter Main Menu gt Setting gt Encode lt gt Finally you can set the alarm input as the local alarm and then select the record channel The select channel begins alarm record when an alarm occurred Please note system begins the alarm record instead of the MD record if the local alarm and MD event occurred at the same time Latch When the anti dither time ended the channel alarm you select in the alarm output may last the specified period The value ranges from 1 to 300 seconds This function is not for other alarm activation operations The latch is still valid even you disable the alarm event function directly Tour Here you can enable tour
48. Upgrade gt RS232 gt PTZ Advanced Information Figure 7 77 7 8 5 5 Import Export The interface is shown as in Figure 7 78 283 import amp Export Channel Network Event Storage System gt General gt Account gt Display gt Default gt Auto Maintain gt Upgrade gt RS232 gt PTZ Advanced Information Figure 7 78 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information PO POR AAA Import It is to import the local setup files to the system Export It is to export the corresponding WEB setup to your local PC 7 8 5 6 Auto maintenance The auto maintenance interface is shown as in Figure 7 79 Here you can select auto reboot and auto delete old files interval from the dropdown list lf you want to use the auto delete old files function you need to set the file period WEB service tive riayoack aarm f sewp ACTO Channel Auto Maintain Network s Auto Reboot Every Tuesday x 02 Event Auto Delete Old Files Never a Storage E System Manual Reboot gt General gt Account gt Display gt Default gt Import amp Export gt gt Upgrade gt RS232 gt PIZ Advanced Information Figure 7 79 7 8 5 7 Upgrade The upgrade interface is shown as in Figure 7 80 Please select the upgrade file and then click the update button to begin update Please note the file name shall be as bin During the upgrade process do not unplug the power cab
49. Zone setup support 396 330 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection Motion Detection Zones Detection and Alarm Various sensitivity levels Alarm can activate record or external alarm or screen message prompt Alarm can activate external alarm or screen message prompt message in specified period Control Support analog alarm signal to specific alarm output channel 4 ch alarm input You 8 ch alarm input You 16 ch alarm input can set normal open can set normal open or You can set Alarm Input or normal close type to normal close type to normal open or select the alarm select the alarm type gt normal close type type to select the alarm type Alarm Output a relay output including one controllable DC 12V output Alarm Relay 30V DC 1A 125V AC 0 5A activation alarm USB Interface 2 USB 2 0 ports connection PTZ control port Ordinary COM Debug keyboard connection and transparent serial port COM input and output via network Information Information Statistics Support various search engines such as time and type Display version information channel amount alarm input and output amount system version and release date On line user Display current on line user Multi lever user management various management modes Integrated management for local user serial port user and network user Configurable user power No limit to the user or group amount Password Administrator can modify other user s password Five
50. all IPv6 addresses The IP address and the default gateway shall be in the same IP section That is to say the specified length of the subnet prefix shall have the same string DHCP It is to auto search IP When enable DHCP function you can not modify IP Subnet mask Gateway These values are from DHCP function If you have not enabled DHCP function IP Subnet mask Gateway display as zero You need to disable DHCP function to view current IP information Besides when PPPoE is operating you can not modify IP Subnet mask Gateway TCP port Default value is 37777 You can change if necessary UDP port Default value is 37778 You can change if necessary HTTP port Default value is 80 RTSP port Default value is 554 Important System needs to reboot after you changed and saved any setup of the above four ports Please make sure the port values here do not conflict Max connection system support maximal 128 users O means there is no connection limit 192 e MTU It is to set MTU value of the network adapter The value ranges from 1280 7200 bytes The default setup is 1500 bytes Please note MTU modification may result in network adapter reboot and network becomes off That is to say MTU modification can affect current network service System may pop up dialog box for you to confirm setup when you want to change MTU setup Click OK button to confirm current reboot or you can click Cancel button to terminate current modification Before
51. as professional surveillance software PSS Duplex transparent COM Network alarm input and output Bidirectional audio Support dual network cards mode such as multiple address mode fault tolerance and load balance Motion Zone setup support 396 330 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection Detection Zones Motion Detection and Alarm Various sensitivity levels Alarm can activate record or external alarm or screen message prompt message in specified period Control Support analog alarm signal to specific alarm output channel 32 Alarm Output 3 channel relay output Alarm Relay 30V DC 1A 125V AC 0 5A activation alarm 4 ch alarm input You 8 ch alarm input You 16 ch alarm input can set normal open can set normal open or You can set Alarm Input or normal close type to normal close type to normal open or select the alarm select the alarm type gt normal close type type to select the alarm type connection PTZ control port Ordinary COM Debug keyboard connection and transparent serial port COM input and output via network Information Information Statistics Loa statistics Backup to 1024 log files Support various search engines such as time and type Display version information channel amount alarm input and output Version amount system version and release date On line user Display current on line user Multi lever user management various management modes Integrated managemen
52. bit stream See Figure 7 10 20 2 2 78 4 499kK bps S2 Figure 7 10 On the top right corer there are six unction buttons See Figure 7 11 12 34 5 Figure 7 11 e 1 Digital zoom Click this button and then left drag the mouse in the zone to zoom in right click mouse system restores original status e 2 Local record When you click local record button the system begins recording and this button becomes highlighted You can go to system folder RecordDownload to view the recorded file e 3 Snapshot picture You can snapshoot important video All images are memorized in system client folder PictureDownload default e 4 Audio Turn on or off audio It has no relationship with system audio setup e 5 Close video 7 5 PTZ Before PTZ operation please make sure you have properly set PTZ protocol Please refer to chapter 7 8 5 9 There are eight direction keys In the middle of the eight direction keys there is a 3D intelligent positioning key Click 3D intelligent positioning key system goes back to the single screen mode Drag the mouse in the screen to adjust section size It can realize PTZ automatically Please refer to the following sheet for PTZ setup information Parameter Function Scan Select Scan from the dropdown list Click Set button you can set scan left and right limit Use direction buttons to move the camera to you desired location and then click left limit button Then move the camera again a
53. button the system begins auto scan Correspondingly the auto scan button becomes Stop button Click stop button to terminate scan operation 4 11 Flip In Figure 4 47 click page switch button you can see an interface is shown as below See Figure 4 52 Here you can set auxiliary function The aux value has relation ship with the Aux button of the decoder Click page switch button again system goes back to Figure 4 43 183 B PANTILT ZOOM X Direct Aux Oper Light Aux Num Oper 1 Page Switch Figure 4 52 184 5 Understanding of Menu Operations and Controls 5 1 Menu Tree This series DVR menu tree is shown as below Backup Information HTT Setting Menu Search Advanced Shutdown 5 2 Main Menu HDD Info BPS Log Version Online Users Network Info General Encode Schedule RS232 Network Alarm Detect Pan Tilt Zoom Display Default HDD Management Alarm Output Abnormality Manual Record Account Auto Maintain TV Adjust Video Matrix Title Overlay Config Backup After you logged in the system main menu is shown as below See Figure 5 1 There are total six icons search Information setting backup advanced and shutdown Move the cursor to highlight the icon then double click mouse to enter the sub menu 185 MAIN MENU x s yd SEARCH SETTING a d S p pie A ADVANCED BACKUP SHUTDOWN Figure 5 1 5 3 Setting In main menu highlight setting icon a
54. circuit to guarantee device safety e Communication port RS485 port can realize alarm input and PTZ control RS232 port can connect to keyboard to realize central control and can also connect to PC COM to upgrade system and realize maintenance and matrix control Standard Ethernet port can realize network access function Dual Ethernet ports support configuration modes such as multiple access Fault tolerance and load balancing e PTZ control Support PTZ decoder via RS485 Support various decode protocols to allow the PTZ to control the soeed dome eo Intelligent operation Mouse operation function In the menu support copy and paste setup function UPnP lt is to establish the mapping relationship between the LAN and the WAN via the UPnP protocol Slight function differences may be found due to different series 1 3 Specifications 1 3 1 1HDD Full D1 Smart 1U Series High performance industrial embedded micro controller Main System Processor FOS Embedded LINUX LINUX rn ener operations Multiple channel record multiple channel playback sates and network operation simultaneously User friendly graphical user interface Devices Method optional Function USB mouse to switch screen Compression Video Standard Compressio H 264 n Audio Compressio G711A G711U PCM n 4 CH composite video 8 CH composite video 16 CH composite Video nat input NTSC PAL input NTSC PAL video input p BNC 1 0Vp p 7
55. click this button to pause playback In text mode input number 6 English character M N O In playback mode playback the next video In menu setup go to down ward of the dropdown list In text mode input number 9 English character W X Y Z Reverse Pau se 6 Play Next 9 In normal playback click this button to pause playback In pause mode click this button to resume playback In text mode input number 5 English character J K L Play Pause 5 USB port To connect USB storage device USB mouse Mp CP Remote control indication light ACT Remote control indication light Status indication light Status Power Power indication light 1 16 It becomes on when system is recording lf there is Fn indication light current status indication light is null Power indication light Record light 2 1 6 HD SDI 1080P 1 5U Series 960H 1 5U Series 2HDD full D1 1 5U Entry level Series 4HDD full D1 1 5U Entry level Series 2HDD 2CIF 1 5U Series 2HDD CIF 1 5U Series The front panel is shown as in Figure 2 6 Figure 2 6 Please refer to the following sheet for front panel button information Icon Function Name Power button press this button for three seconds to boot up Power button or shut down DVR In textbox click this button to switch between numeral Shift Shift English Small Capitalized donation and etc Activate current control modify setup and then move up and down Up 1
56. detect button to begin play Once the motion detect play has begun click button again will terminate current motion detect file play Smart There is no motion detect zone by default search If you select to play other file in the file list system switches to motion detect play of other file During the motion detect play process you can not implement operations such as change time bar begin backward playback or frame by frame playback Please refer to chapter 4 4 1 Smart Search for detailed operation Other channel synchroni zation When playing the file click the number button system can switch to the same switch to period of the corresponding channel to play play when playback D When the system is in full screen playback mode left click the mouse in the igital 6 O screen Drag your mouse in the screen to select a section and then left click mouse to realize digital zoom You can right click mouse to exit Manually el During the file playback process you can switch to other channel via the dropdown list or rolling the mouse This function is null if there is no record file or system is in smart search process 17 channel when playback h h al P Note 159 All the operations here such as playback speed channel time and progress have relationship with hardware version Some series DVRs do not support some functions or playback speeds 4 4 1 Smart Search During the m
57. device is mainly used in the PC network communication system The connection type is serial connection Once you connected the signal lightning arrestor with the signal port it can cut the channel of the thunderstorm to the device and on the other hand it can discharge the current to the ground to guarantee the device proper 312 work The signal lightning arrester has many specifications and widely used in many devices such as telephone network analog communication digital communication cable TV and satellite antenna For all the input port especially those from the outdoor you need to install the signal lightning arrester Antenna feed cable lightning arrester It is suitable for antenna system of the transmitter or the device system to receive the wireless signal It uses the serial connection too Please note when you select the lighting arrester please pay attention to the port type and the earthing reliability In some important environment you need to use special shielded cable Do not parallel connect the thunder proof ground cable with the ground cable of the lightning rod Please make sure they are far enough and grounded respectively 2 The earthing modes We all know the earthing is the most complicated technology in the electromagnetism compatibility design since there is no systematic theory or module The earthing has many modes but the selection depends on the system structure and performance The following are some s
58. domain name has not registered 3 Operation Before you use Quick DDNS you need to enable this service and set proper server address port value and domain name O Server address www quickddns com Portnumber 80 e Domainname There are two modes Default domain name and customized domain name Except default domain name registration you can also use customized domain name You can input your self defined domain name After successful registration you can use domain name to login installed of the device IP eo User name It is optional You can input your commonly used email address Important e Do not register frequently The interval between two registrations shall be more than 60 seconds Too many registration requests may result in server attack Oo System may take back the domain name that is idle for one year You can get a notification email before the cancel operation if your email address setup is OK 5 3 5 7 UPNP The UPNP protocol is to establish a mapping relationship between the LAN and the WAN Please input the router IP address in the LAN in Figure 5 14 Double click the UPNP item in Figure 5 15 you can see the following interface See Figure 5 23 e UPNP on off Turn on or off the UPNP function of the device eo Status When the UPNP is offline it shows as Unknown When the UPNP works it shows Success e Router LAN IP It is the router IP in the LAN WAN IP It is the router IP in the WAN eo
59. erate oe 177 A ee ene ete Rem a Rat CSE SEPT mo ee eae eee 177 Aer o css aco tr tell ce ol a tects ee beet 177 4 9 PTZ Conmoland Color Setup aii idad 178 ASA A GONE Nao iasa 178 A PTA SGUD necp E oan sasgotauiarsacaeeaeny 179 4 833 MNteligent POSITIONING REV 180 4 10 Preset Patrol Pattern Scan eessooessecesseccessoceessccesscocesssceesscocessoceesscocesssceessccessoceessocessoceessocessoceessse 181 49 IPSE SE UDan RE n A 182 Ae Acivalte Proso tse cite tral ido A 182 4 9 3 Farolset p Tour SOLU heasse tang aaeetahoadeseesacachamieactans 182 AAC ALS Pan id 183 AS ed a edna dd denote saat eae 183 4 9 6 ACUV ALC Patern FUNCION ti ome 183 4 9 7 PUIO SCAN SCID ARPA uo eke sastbiacg techs waucetaal a teutetens 183 AOS ACUV ALE SAUL Oro Gallus coh en pa a eee 183 ATA TEND E EE Pon O O EO AG teenies ets 183 5 UNDERSTANDING OF MENU OPERATIONS AND CONTROLS 000 185 5 1 Menu A NS 185 5 2 Mam MU le careto 185 5 3 S 1 q 0 A in RE 186 FM CVO rset ccs cree e e OS 186 A ls A MTR ROUT TTT NER CORTONUT Rt ORCS Cre Te Tre POT E NE 189 O a e e 191 o A A IN 191 599 NEWOR ruses sae an A A ont ecg ence tose eae 192 5390 A A NN A A le alts Tense O a 210 O Aim SS CRO a ere aE ree nT eee er RTP Noe CE REAR o RCE eT a ee Pe Ra eT o 210 A ES A 210 So MI ao PETE SH SOD AHS FT OST ESET CSTE ETE 210 5 3 10 AICA A E A NG 212 5 4 A 213 5 5 NS A A O Ee 213 Sol ABD IManade nessa totali idas cp 213 D92 ADNOMA Aita ciao a 218 OO
60. file and support file search function so you need to set at least one read write disk otherwise you can not record video Note About redundancy setup e f current channel is not recording current setup gets activated when the channel begin recording the next time e f current channel is recording now current setup will get activated right away the current file will be packet and form a file then system begins recording as you have just set After all the setups please click save button system goes back to the previous menu 165 HDD MANAGE Alarm Set HDD Setting Alarm Release Channels Setting HDD No 1 Setto Read Write v Execute Type Read Write Status Normal Capacity 232 87 GB Record time 10 09 26 17 30 36 11 03 02 09 36 00 10 09 23 12 20 10 10 09 26 17 30 37 Figure 4 21 Playback or search in the redundant disk There are two ways for you to playback or search in the redundant disk e Set redundant disk s as read only disk or read write disk Main menu gt Advanced gt HDD management See Figure 4 21 System needs to reboot to get setup activated Now you can search or playback file in redundant disk e Dismantle the disk and play it in another PC 4 5 2 Snapshot 4 5 2 1 Schedule Snapshot In Encode interface click snapshot button to input snapshot mode size quality and frequency See the interface on the left of Figure 4 22 Note The HD SDI 1080P 1 5U series product and the HD
61. function when alarm occurs System supports one window tour Please go to chapter 5 3 9 Display for tour interval setup Snapshot You can enable this function to snapshoot image when an alarm occurs Video matrix Check the box to enable this function The video matrix output can display the alarm video of current channel when there is an alarm signal Buzzer Highlight the icon to enable this function The buzzer beeps when alarm occurs Snapshot For snapshot operation please refer to chapter 4 5 2 Note The network alarm means the alarm signal from the TCP IP You can enable the network alarm function via the net SDK The network alarm does not have the device type anti dither and alarm upload function The rest items are the same Please highlight icon O to select the corresponding function After setting all the setups please click save button system goes back to the previous menu 175 Event Type Local Alarm 7 Alarm In Ss Enable Bo Type Normal Open Period Set Anti dither C SC _JAlarm Out IEEE E N sec M Show Message Mi Alarm Upload MM Send Email Record Channel AEE ENEE k PTZ Activation Delay sec BTour BQ GVVOOVMMOMtA13140906 Snapshot 00D NE E _JBuzzer Figure 4 34 CAM 1 CAM 3 CAM 5 CAM 7 CAM 9 CAM 11 0 CAM 12 CAM 13 0 CAM 14 CAM 15 0 CAM 16 o J D E le 0O O o E E OOO ETENE i O 3 La Figure 4 35 Boo aw Of an Omo 0 Oo 200 Omo 0 O 200
62. in Figure 5 41 Please note all your modification here applies to local end only You need to refresh web or client end to get the latest channel name System max support 25 digital character 211 CAM 2 CAM 4 CAM 6 CAM 8 CAM 10 CAM 12 CAM 14 CAM 16 Default Cancel Figure 5 41 Te Tour Setup Enable Tour Interval 5 Split View 4 y Channel combine ea Add Delete Move up Move down Default Figure 5 42 5 3 10 Default Click default icon system pops up a dialogue box You can highlight O to restore default factory setup See Figure 5 26 Select all General Encode Schedule RS232 Network Alarm Detect Pan tilt zoom Display Channel name Please highlight icon O to select the corresponding function 212 After all the setups please click save button system goes back to the previous menu Warning System menu color language time display mode video format IP address user account will not maintain previous setup after default operation Figure 5 43 5 4 Search Please refer to chapter 4 4 Search 5 5 Advanced Double click advanced icon in the main window the interface is shown as below See Figure 5 44 There are total ten function keys HDD management alarm output abnormity manual record account auto maintenance TV adjust and video matrix ER d __ ADVANCED ABNORMALITY ALARM OUTPUT a e RECORD ACCOUNT AUTO MAINTAIN E A TV ADJUST TEXT OVERL
63. input number 1 4 English character G H I Shift current activated control Left 2 Right 3 When playback click these buttons to control playback bar In text mode input number 2 English character A B C 3 English character D E F Go to previous menu or cancel current operation ESC ESC When playback click it to restore real time monitor mode Confirm current operation Enter ENTER Go to default button 89 Go to menu Manually stop start recording working with direction keys Record MEE or numeral keys to select the recording channel Multiple slow play speeds or normal playback Slow play 8 In text mode input number 8 English character T U V One window monitor mode click this button to display assistant function PTZ control and image color Backspace function in numeral control or text control press it for 1 5seconds to delete the previous character before the cursor In motion detection setup working with Fn and direction Pn keys to realize setup Assistant In text mode click it to switch between numeral English character small capitalized and etc Realize other special functions Various fast soeeds and normal playback Fast play In text mode input number 7 English character P Q R S Play previous 0 In playback mode playback the previous video In text mode input number 0 In normal playback or pause mode click this button to reverse playback In reverse playback
64. its ground section shall be more than 20mm2 e The ground cable of the monitor system can not short circuit or mixed connected with the strong alternative current cable e For all the ground cables from the control room to the monitor system or ground cable of other monitor devices please use the copper resistance soft cable and its section shall be more than 4mm2 314 e The monitor system usually can adopt the one point ground Please connect the ground end of 3 pin socket in the monitor system to the ground port of the system protection ground cable 4 The shortcut way to check the electric system using the digital multimeter For 220V AC socket from the top to the bottom E ground cable N neutral cable L live cable Please refer to the following figure There is a shortcut way to check these thee cables connection are standard or not not the accurate check Importance In the following operations the multimeter range shall be at 750V For E earth cable Turn the digital multimeter to 750V AC use your one hand to hold the metal end and then the other hand insert the pen to the E port of the socket See the following figure If the multimeter shows 0 then you can see current earth cable connection is standard If the value is more than 10 then you can see there is inductive current and the earth cable connection is not proper 315 For L live cable Turn the digital multimeter to 750V AC use your one han
65. ports Support 2 HDDs Hard Disk Audio PCM 28 8MByte h Occupation Video 56 3600MByte h Record and playback Manual recording motion detection recording schedule recording and alarm recording Priority Manual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection recording gt schedule recording Recording 1 to 120 minutes single record duration Default setup is 60 minutes Length Playback Repeat When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Way Record Various search engines such as time type and channel search Playback Various fast play slow play speeds manual frame by frame playback Mode and reverse play mode Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Recording Mode Various File Switch Ways Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto plays the next file in the current channel Multi There is 1 4 channel playback mode channel Playback Switch between self adaptive screen full screen when playback Zoom Partial When in one window full screen playback mode you can select any zone Enlargemen to activate partial enlargement function t Backup HDD backup function Backu Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk USB Mode p burner and etc Support peripheral eSATA backup device Support network download and save View monitor ch
66. s per channel and NTSC 1f s to 30f s per Record channel Speed Video 1 4 8 9 16 windows Partition Monitor Support monitor tour functions such as alarm motion detection and Touring schedule auto control PAL NTSC Real time monitor D1 704x576 704x480 Resolution PAL NTSC Playback 1 2 ch D1 704x576 704x480 HD1 352x576 352x480 2CIF 704x288 704x240 CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 3 16 ch CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Support dual streams extra stream resolution QCIF 176x144 176x120 Image 6 level image quality Adjustable Quality Privacy Support one privacy mask of user defined size in full screen mask Support max 4 zones ma Channel information time information and privacy mask zone Information TV Adjust Adjust TV output zone suitable to anamorphic video Channel Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding Lock normally Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized user seeing secret video Channel Channel name recording status screen lock status video loss status Information and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of display screen Color Hue brightness contrast saturation and gain setup for each channel Configuratio n Audio N A Hard Disk 1 built in SATA port Support 1 HDD Hard Disk Video 56 900MByte h Hard disk Occupation Manual recording motion detection recording schedule recording and Recording alarm recording M
67. same time Video Support PAL NTSC Real time Mode PAL 1f s to 25f s per channel and NTSC 1f s to 30f s Record Speed per channel windows Optional Touring schedule auto control PAL 700TVL 50f s NTSC 700TVL 60f s Real time monitor 960H 960 x576 960x480 Playback channel 1 16 960 x576 960x480 Resolution PALINTSC D1 704x576 704x480 CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Support dual streams Extra stream resolution CIF 352 x 288 352 x 240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Image Quality 6 level image quality Adjustable Privacy mask Support one privacy mask of user defined size in full screen Support max 4 zones MERE Channel information time information and privacy mask zone Information Channel Lock Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding normally Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized user seeing secret video Channel Channel name recording status screen lock status video loss status Information and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of display screen Color Hue brightness contrast saturation and gain setup for each channel Configuration TI Audio Maoron 4 ch 200 2000mv 8 ch 200 2000mv 16 ch 200 Audio Input 10KQ BNC 10KQ BNC 2000mv 10KQ BNC Audio Output 1 ch audio talk input 200 3000mv 10KQ BNC Audio 1 ch audio talk output 200 3000mv 5K 2 BNC Hard Disk Audio PCM 28 8MByte h Manual recording motion detection recordin
68. specified zone of current channel It supports zoom in function of multiple channel The selected area has an icon as and the free area is shown as an icon askia It is to backup the video of current channel to the USB device System can not backup the video of multiple channel at the same time Current selected backup channel has an icon as and the free channel is shown as an icon as Once the backup started you can see the free channel is shown as an icon as D Support play pause and exit and drag function During the preview playback process you can not see the channel title and record status of current channel It will display the channel title and the record status once you exit the preview playback During the preview playback you can not switch the displayed channel or change current window display mode Please note the tour function has the higher priority than the preview playback You can not control the preview playback until the tour function ended 153 You need to have proper rights to implement the following operations Please make sure the HDD has been properly installed 4 3 1 Manual record menu There are two ways for you to go to manual record menu e Right click mouse or in the main menu Advanced gt Manual Record e In live viewing mode click record button in the front panel or record button in the remote control Manual record menu is shown as in Figure 4 7 4 3 2 Basic operation There are t
69. such as remarks and rights AS le Camera Account Networx User Name Event Storage Mody croup System Group gt General Remark Authority List gt PTZ gt Default gt ImportExport gt Auto Maintain gt Upgrade Information Authority List Shutdown Reboot Live Log Search Clear Log Network Alarm Add Group 7 8 5 3 Display admin administrator group All Shutdown Reboot Live Record control HDD PTZ Save Cancel Record control System Update Auto Maintain Video Detect PTZ General Setting Default Figure 7 72 Display interface includes GUI TV adjust Tour and video matrix Backup PTZ Encode Video Input Account Record Relay infout RS232 280 7 8 5 3 1 GUI Here you can set background color and transparency level See Figure 7 73 WEB service tive riaysack aarm f sewp Logout Channel Network Event Storage System gt General gt Account gt Default gt Import amp Export gt Auto Maintain gt Upgrade gt RS232 gt PTZ Advanced Information GUI TV Adjust Video Matrix Resolution 1280 1024 Transparency Time Display Channel Display Image Enhance Auto Logout Minute 0 60 Startup Wizard Navigation Bar Figure 7 73 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Parameter Resolution dic for you to adjust transparency The value ranges from 128 Check the box here you can view system time and channe
70. the cursor In motion detection setup working with Fn and direction keys to realize setup In text mode click it to switch between numeral English character small capitalized and etc Realize other special functions To connect USB storage device USB mouse Assistant F fy USB port Network abnormal Network error occurs or there is no network connection the AA Net indication light becomes red to alert you light HDD abnormal HDD HDD error occurs or HDD capacity is below specified indication light IR Receiver threshold value the light becomes red to alert you It is to receive the signal from the remote control The front panel is shown as in Figure 2 3 2 1 3 General 1U Series 85 0000 0000 0000 2090 900 00000 Figure 2 3 Please refer to the following sheet for front panel button information Power button D Power button press this button for three seconds to boot up or shut down DVR Number button Number 0 9 and e Input Arabic number e e Switch channel eo In textbox click this button to switch between numeral English Small Capitalized donation and etc e Enable or disable tour Various fast speeds and normal playback Multiple slow play speeds or normal playback e In backward playback or pause mode click this button to go normal playback e In normal playback click this button to pause playback eo In pause mode click this button to resu
71. the LAN to exchange the information lt is a non protocol connection port It has no effect on the network applications It is a UDP port not TCP port The value ranges from 1 to 165535 The default value is 162 SNMP version Check V1 system only processes the information of V1 Check V2 system only processes the information of V2 Check SNMP V3 you can set user name and password There is account security verification when the server wants to connect to the device At the same time the v1 and V2 is null and can not select 7 8 2 11 Multicast The multicast interface is shown as in Figure 7 36 Multicast is a transmission mode of data packet When there is multiple host to receive the same data packet multiple cast is the best option to reduce the broad width and the CPU load The source host can just send out one data to transit This function also depends on the relationship of the group member and group of the outer WEB sevice IA OTTO Te ARNET AO Channel Multicast Network V Enable gt TCPAP IP Address 239 255 42 42 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 gt Connection gt WIFI Port 36666 1 65500 gt PPPoE gt DDNS gt IP Filter gt Email gt UPnP gt SNMP gt gt Alarm Centre Event Storage System Advanced Information Figure 7 36 7 8 2 12 Alarm Centre 261 The alarm centre interface is shown as below See Figure 7 37 This interface is reserved for you to develop System can
72. the modification you can check the MTU of the gateway the MTU of the DVR shall be the same as or is lower than the MTU of the gateway In this way you can reduce packets and enhance network transmission efficiency The following MTU value is for reference only lt gt 1500 Ethernet information packet max value and it is also the default value It is the typical setup when there is no PPPoE or VPN It is the default setup of some router switch or the network adapter lt gt 1492 Recommend value for PPPoE lt gt 1468 Recommend value for DHCP Preferred DNS server DNS server IP address Alternate DNS server DNS server alternate address Transfer mode Here you can select the priority between fluency video qualities LAN download System can process the downloaded data first if you enable this function The download speed is 1 5X or 2 0X of the normal speed e Dual network adapters mode lt gt Multiple address mode ethO and eth1 operate separately You can use the services such as HTTP RTP service via ethoO or the ethi usually you need to set one default card default setup is etho to request the auto network service form the device end such as DHCP email FTP and etc In multiple address mode system network status is shown as offline once one card is offline lt gt Network fault tolerance In this mode device uses bond0 to communicate with the external devices You can focus on one host IP address At the same time you need to
73. times login failure in thirty minutes may result in account lock Upgrade Web browser client end and update tool Version User Management User Management Password login protection to guarantee safety User friendly interface when login Provide the following options Login Logout and Shutdown Logout shutdown restart Right authentication when shut down to make sure only those proper people can turn off DVR DC 12V Power General Consumption lt 25W With adapter exclude HDD Parameter Working OC 1 00 Temperature 69 Working 10 90 Humidity 86kpa 106kpa 1 5U standard industrial case 440 W x410 D x70mm H Weight 4 5 5 5KG Exclude HDD Installation Desktop rack installation Mode 1 3 22 General 2U Series Main High performance industrial embedded micro controller System Processor Embedded LINUX System Multiplex operations Multiple channel record multiple channel Resources playback and network operation simultaneously User friendly graphical user interface Input Devices Front panel USB mouse ahead Arabic number English character donation and extension Chinese p optional Shortcut Copy paste operation USB mouse right key shortcut menu double Function click USB mouse to switch screen Video Compression Audio Compression Compression Standard H 264 G 711A 4 CH 8 CH 16 CH 24H 32H composite composite composite composite composite video input video inp
74. video loss status Information and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of display screen Color Hue brightness contrast saturation and gain setup for each channel Configuration Audio 4 chamnel 8 channel 16 channel 16 channel 16 channel Auca Ina 200 200 200 200 200 2000mV 2000mV 2000mV 2000mV 2000mV 10KO 10KO 10KQ 10KQ 10KQ BNC BNC BNC BNC BNC Audio Output 1 channel audio output 200 3000mv 5KQ BNC Bidirectional 1 ch audio talk input 200 3000mv 10KO BNC Audio 1 ch audio talk output 200 3000mv 5K 2 BNC Hard Disk Hard Disk Audio PCM 28 8MByte h Hard disk Occupation Video 56 900MByte h Manual recording motion detection recording schedule recording and alarm recording Recording Mode Priority Manual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection recording gt schedule recording Recording 1 to 120 minutes single record duration Default setup is 60 minutes Length Record and playback Playback Repeat Way When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Record Search Various search engines such as time type and channel Playback Various fast play slow play speeds manual frame by frame playback Mode and reverse play mode Various File Switch Ways Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto pl
75. view some channel view without login Here you can input the user name and password and then select one group for current user Please note the user rights shall not exceed the group right setup For convenient setup please make sure the general user has the lower rights setup than the admin 10 10 4 122 ly tes er File Edit View Favorites Tools Help y Favorites WN CONFIG WEB service Channel Network Event Add User Storage System User Name gt General Reuseable Password gt Display Confirm Password gt Default Group gt Import amp Export User MAC gt Auto Maintain gt Upgrade idad uaan RS ainiin Panel Authority Select all BAS oi iia o Real time MonitorChanneld Real time Monitor hannel07 gt PTZ Real time MonitorChannel0l Micontrol Panel PlaybackChannel03 Aaned PlaybackChannel04 Mishutdown PlaybackChannel08 MReal time Monitor Information MiReal time MonitorChannel01 MiReal time MonitorChannel02 Done but with errors on page 9 Internet fa 100 Figure 7 68 Modify user lt is to modify the user property belonging group password and rights See Figure 7 69 Modify password It is to modify the user password You need to input the old password and then input the new password twice to confirm the new setup Please click the OK button to save Please note the password ranges from 1 digit to 6 digit It shall include the number only For the user of the account rights h
76. 00 1 550 Temperatur e Working 10 90 Humidity Parameter Pressure 1 5U standard industrial case 440 W x410 D x70mm H Weight 3 5 4 5KG Exclude HDD Installation Desktop rack installation Mode 1 3 19 Simple 1 5 U Series High performance industrial embedded micro controller Resources and network operation simultaneously Devices Method optional Function USB mouse to switch screen Compression Video Standard Compressio H 264 n Audio Compressio G711A G711U PCM n 4 CH 8 CH 16 CH 24 CH 32 CH composite composite composite composite composite vdeo noi video input video input video input video input video input p NTSC PAL NTSC PAL NTSC PAL NTSC PAL NTSC PAL Video monitor Main System Processor BNC 1 0Vp BNC 1 0Vp BNC 1 0Vp BNC 1 0Vp BNC 1 0Vp p 750 p 750 p 750 p 750 p 750 1 ch PAL NTSC BNC 1 0VP P 75Q composite video signal output Video 1 ch VGA output Outpbut 1 ch HDMI output p 1 ch matrix output Support TV VGA HDMI video output at the same time Video Standard Support PAL NTSC Real time Mode PAL 1f s to 25f s per channel and NTSC 1f s to 30f s Record per channel Speed Video 1 4 1 4 8 9 1 4 8 9 16 1 4 8 9 16 1 4 8 9 16 Partiti windows Op windows windows 24windows 25 32windo artition tional ws Monitor Support monitor tour functions such as alarm motion detection and Touring schedule auto control
77. 00 0 1 0 Es Figure 4 12 Please refer to the following sheet for more information i Display Here is to display the searched picture or file window Support 1 4 9 16 window playback 156 Search type Playback mode and channel selection pane Card 5 number search File list switch button Mark file list button Here you can select to search the picture or the recorded file eYou can select to play from the read write HDD from peripheral device or from redundancy HDD Before you select to play from the peripheral device please connect the corresponding peripheral device You can view all record files of the root directory of the peripheral device Click the Browse button you can select the file you want to play Important Redundancy HDD does not support picture backup function but it supports picture playback function You can select to play from redundancy HDD if there are pictures on the redundancy HDD eThe blue highlighted date means there is picture or file Otherwise there is no picture or file ein any play mode click the date you want to see you can see the corresponding record file trace in the time bar Playback mode 1 4 9 16 It may vary due to different series In 1 window playback mode you can select 1 16 channels In 4 window playback mode you can select 4 channels according to your requirement In 9 window playback mode you can switch between 1 8 and 9 16 channels In 16 window p
78. 011 05 25 14 20 50 Onekey Backup 0 CH Type start Time End Time Size KB r 14 Page Up Page Down Fn Select Cancel backup device or file Space Required Space Remaining 0 00 KB 3 71 GB Start Figure 4 39 Click backup button system begins burning At the same time the backup button becomes stop button You can view the remaining time and process bar at the left bottom File format Click the file format you can see there are two options DAV ASF e Picture backup Please set the corresponding time channel and then select the type as PIC from the dropdown list See Figure 4 40 Please click the Add button and then select the pictures Click the Start button you can copy the specified pictures to the selected portable devices Figure 4 40 e One key backup It includes three steps the search select all start the backup You can skip the above three steps and then copy all the searched files directly The file name format usually is Channel number Record type Time In the file name the YDM format is Y M D H M S File extension name is dav Tips During backup process you can click ESC to exit current interface for other operation The system will not terminate backup process Note When you click stop button during the burning process the stop function becomes activated immediately For example if there are ten files when you click stop system just backup five files system only save the previous
79. 06 e Click the Test button you can see the corresponding dialogue box to see the FTP connection is OK or not See Figure 5 35 Server IP d l Por 21 User Name Password Anonymous Remote Directory File Length 0 Snapshot sec Channel Weekday Alarm Motion Regular Time Period 1 Time Period 2 Default Cancel Figure 5 34 FTP Test Connect Failed Figure 5 35 5 3 5 11 Alarm Centre This interface is reserved for you to develop 5 3 5 12 SNMP SNMP is an abbreviation of Simple Network Management Protocol It provides the basic network management frame of the network management system The SNMP widely used in many environments It is used in many network device software and system You can set in the following interface See Figure 5 36 207 D SNMP i a SNMP Port Read Community public Write Community private Trap Address Trap Port 162 Default Figure 5 36 Please enable the SNMP function Use the corresponding software tool MIB Builder and MG SOFT MIB Browser You still need two MIB file BASE SNMP MIB DVR SNMP MIB to connect to the device You can get the device corresponding configuration information after successfully connection Please follow the steps listed below to configure e In Figure 5 36 check the box to enable the SNMP function Input the IP address of the PC than is running the software in the Trap address You can use default setup for the rest items e Compile
80. 0JD Digital WD3000JD WD2500JS Westem Cariar SE Digital Westem Cariar SE Digital WD7500KS Westem Cariar SE16 Digital WD5000KS Westem Cariar SE16 Digital Westem Cariar SE16 WD4000KD Digital WD3200KS Westem Cariar SE16 Digital Westem Cariar SE16 WD2500KS Digital 500G 21 1T 500G 3T 21 31 21 31 21 320G 300G 250G 750G 500G 400G 320G 250G 250G SATA SATA SATA SATA SATA SATA SATA SATA SATA SATA SATA SATA SATA SATA SATA SATA SATA SATA SATA WD Caviar SE16 WD2500YS 01SHBO AA Digital WD Caviar RE16 WD3200YS 01PGBO e Digital Digital WD AV AVJS WD2500AVJS 63WDAO Digital Westem WD AV AVJS WD3200AVJS 63WDAO Digital Westem WD AV AVJS Digital 320G SATA 500G SATA 500G SATA 320G SATA 500G 500G SATA WD5000AVJS 63YJAO AA SATA WDAV GP AVCS WD5000AVCS 63H1B1 er A Digital WDAV GP AVCS WD7500AVCS 63ZLB0 750G SATA Digital Westem WDAV GP AVCS WD3200AVCS 320G SATA Digital WDAV GP AVCS WD2500AVCS 250G SATA 305 Digital igi Coe A A e l WDAV GP EVDS WD10EVDS 63N5B1 igita WDAV GP AVDS WD5000AVDS 63U7B0 500G SATA Digital Westem WD AV GP WD30EURS 31 SATA Digital T SATA Westem WD AV GP WD25EURS 2 Digital ie iaa SATA Digital Westem WD AV GP WD15EURS 1 57 SATA Digital Westem WD AV GP WD10EURS 1T SATA Digital Westem WD AV GP WD10EURX 1T SATA Digital WD AV GP WD7500AURS
81. 1112 13 14 15 16NOMNONO 123445 67 Btetcte Figure 3 11 You can refer to the following sheet for detailed information I 2 Be E Ss ALARM 1 to ALARM 16 The alarm becomes active in low voltage 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 NOC 2 NOC There are three groups of normal open activation output on off 3 NO C button 3 8 1 11 4HDD full D1 1 5U Entry level Series The 4HDD full D1 1 5U entry level series product interface is shown as in Figure 3 12 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 LF N INO2NO3 AAAAAAANANA 1 23456 7 8 i c 63 AAAANAAAANNA Figure 3 12 You can refer to the following sheet for detailed information ls 25 Be Ze D ALARM 1 to ALARM 16 The alarm becomes active in low voltage 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 NO1C1 NO2C2 There are three groups of normal open activation output on off NO3 C3 button 3 8 1 12 General 2U Series The general 2U series product interface is shown as in Figure 3 13 efefefelelefelelef DAA Lelelelelelllellelelelelelelel fcfeTelelelelel fele 123 4 5 6 7 8 amp 9 10 1112 13 14 15 16 NO1C1NO2C2 NO3 C3 NO4C4 dr dr NO5C5NC5 SH HEY 4 AB AB cable connection Figure 3 13 144 You can refer to the following sheet for alarm input and output information is 2 3r 4 5 ALARM 1 to ALARM 16 The alarm becomes active in low voltage 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 NO1 C1 The first four are four groups of normal open activatio
82. 16 channel series DVR rear panel is shown as in Figure 2 30 Figure 2 30 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Power button Video input Audio output Bidirectional talk output port 6 Bidirectional talk input port Alarm input Alarm output RS485 port 8 GND pot GND port 9 Power input port Audio input Matrix video output Loop video output Video SPOT output 12 Video VGA output HDMI port eSATA port USB port RS232 port Network port 2 2 14 960H 2HDD 1 5U Series This series DVR rear panel is shown as below See Figure 2 31 Please note the following figure is based on the 8 channel series product 105 Figure 2 31 Please refer to the a sheet tor detailed information 0 Alarm input alarm output RS485 port GND port 2 2 15 2HDD full D1 1 5U Entry level Series The 16 channel series rear panel is shown as below See Figure 2 32 Figure 2 32 Please refer to the owing sheet for detailed information Video input Video output Video SPOT output Audio input o Audio input Audio output 106 HDMI port 2 2 16 4HDD full D1 1 5U Entry level Series The 16 channel series rear panel is shown as below See Figure 2 33 18 1 3 5 8 9 12 16 Figure 2 33 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information 18 Bidirectional talk input 2 2 17 General 2U Series This series DVR rear panel is shown as below See Figure 2 34 Ple
83. 2 2 9 Full D1 1 5U Series The rear panel is shown as in Figure 2 25 The following figure is based on the 16 channel series product elelee eo E Figure 2 25 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information 6 Videoinput O S 8 Bidirectional talk input pot 9 Bidirectional talk output port Video VGA output HDMI port ee AAA 2 2 10 2HDD 2CIF 1 5U Series Simple 1 5U Series The following figure is based on the 2HDD 2CIF 1 5U 16 channel series product See Figure 2 26 Figure 2 26 102 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information 2 2 11 2HDD CIF 1 5U Series The rear panel of 16 channel series product is shown as in Figure 2 27 Figure 2 27 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information 2 2 12 HD SDI 1080P 1 5U Series The rear panel of 4 8 channel series product is shown as in Figure 2 28 103 Figure 2 28 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information 6 Network port S 8 RS232port S 9 HDMI pot S 14 15 idirecti 15 Bidirectional talk output port Audio output Alarm input Alarm output RS485 port The rear panel of the 16 channel series product is shown as in Figure 2 29 Figure 2 29 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information GND port Power input port Video input Network port 104 Video VGA output 2 2 13 960H 4HDD 1 5U Series The
84. 28 8MByte h Occupation Video 56 900MByte h Manual recording motion detection recording schedule recording and alarm recording Recording Mode Priority Manual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection recording gt schedule recording Storage Mode Support channel record quota setup Recording 1 to 120 minutes single record duration Default setup is 60 minutes Length Playback Repeat When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Way Various search engines such as time type and channel search Playback Various fast play slow play speeds manual frame by frame playback Mode and reverse play mode Various File Switch Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Ways Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto plays the next file in the current channel Playback Support mark playback Switch between self adaptive screen full screen when playback Zoom Partial When in one window full screen playback mode you can select any zone Enlargemen to activate partial enlargement function t HDD backup Backup Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk USB Mode burner and etc Support network download and save Multi There is 1 4 9 16 channel playback mode channel It may vary due to different series Playback View monitor channel r
85. 4 38 click patrol button The interface is shown as in Figure 4 49 Input preset number and add this preset to a patrol tour For each patrol tour you can input max 80 presets Pp PAN TILT ZOOM X lt Function Preset 1 Preset Patrol Pattern Add Preset Border Del Preset Figure 4 49 182 4 9 4 Activate Patrol tour In _ Figure 4 46 input patrol tour number in the No blank and click patrol button 4 9 5 Pattern Setup In Figure 4 46 click pattern button and then click begin button The interface is shown as in Figure 4 50 Then you can go to Figure 4 43 X to modify zoom focus and iris Go back to Figure 4 50 and click end button You can memorize all these operations as pattern 1 W _ PANITILT ZOOM xX Function Pattern 1 Preset Patrol Pattern Begin Border End Patrol No 0 Figure 4 50 4 9 6 Activate Pattern Function In _ Figure 4 39 input mode value in the No blank and click pattern button 4 9 7 Auto Scan Setup In Figure 4 38 click border button The interface is shown as in Figure 4 43 Please go to Figure 4 35 use direction arrows to select camera left limit Then please go to Figure 4 43 and click left limit button Repeat the above procedures to set right limit PAN TILT ZOOM gt lt Function Pattern 1 Preset Patrol No 0 Patrol Pattern Left Border Right Figure 4 51 4 9 8 Activate Auto Scan In Figure 4 47 click Auto Scan
86. 44 176x120 Support dual streams extra stream resolution CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 6 level image quality Adjustable Quality Privacy Support one privacy mask of user defined size in full screen mask Support max 4 zones mass Channel information time information and privacy mask zone Information TV Adjust Adjust TV output zone suitable to anamorphic video Channel Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding Lock normally Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized user seeing secret video Channel Channel name recording status screen lock status video loss status Information and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of display screen Color Hue brightness contrast saturation and gain setup for each channel Configuratio n Audio Audio Input 4 ch 200 2000mv 10KQ RCA Audio 1 ch audio output 200 3000mv 5KO RCA Output Bidirectional 1 ch audio talk input 200 3000mv 10K 2 RCA Audio Hard Disk 2 built in SATA port Support 2 HDDs 47 Hard Disk Audio PCM 28 8MByte h Hard disk Occupation Video 56 900MByte h Manual recording motion detection recording schedule recording and Recording alarm recording Mode Priority Manual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection Record and recording gt schedule recording playback Storage Mode Support channel record quota setup Recording 1 to 120 minutes single record duration De
87. 485 PTZ Control _R 232_ ol Power Switch VGA Power Input Online User Online User Online User Network Keyboard Online User 1U series 148 A y RS485 PTZ Control Power Switch 4 o O la SE fooco0d0c00000 5 O oooccc000000 Jo o Power Input eSATA USB Port Network Switch Online User Online User Online User Network Keyboard Online User 1 5U Series gt RS485 PTZ Control Power Switch SY q Power Input au i coor our voso w eSATA USB Port Network Switch Online User Online User Online User Network Keyboard Online User 2U Series Figure 3 18 149 4 Overview of Navigation and Controls Note All the operations listed below are based on the 2U series product Before operation please make sure e You have properly installed HDD and all the cable connections e The provided input power and the device power are matched e The external power shall be DC 12V or AC90 264V 50 2 Hz Always use the stable current if necessary UPS is a best alternative measure 4 1 Login Logout amp Main Menu 4 1 1 Login After system booted up system pops up the startup wizard Click the Cancel button you can go to the system login interface Click the Next Step button you can go to the startup wizard interface Here you can set the system basic information See Figure 4 1 Startup Wizard startup Wizard General Di
88. 5 files in the device But you can view ten file names 4 9 PTZ Control and Color Setup Note All the operations here are based on PELCOD protocol For other protocols there might be a little difference 4 8 1 Cable Connection 178 Please follow the procedures below to go on cable connection e Connect the dome RS485 port to DVR 485 port e Connect dome video output cable to DVR video input port e Connect power adapter to the dome 4 8 2 PTZ Setup Note The camera video should be in the current screen Before setup please check the following connections are right e PTZ and decoder connection is right Decoder address setup is right e Decoder A B line connects with DVR A B line Boot up the DVR input user name and password In the main menu click setting and then click Pan Tilt Control button The interface is shown as in Figure 4 41 Here you can set the following items Channel select the current camera channel Protocol select corresponding PTZ protocol such as PELCOD Address default address is 1 Baud rate select corresponding baud rate Default value is 9600 Data bits select corresponding data bits Default value is 8 Stop bits select corresponding stop bits Default value is 1 Parity there are three options odd even none Default setup is none PAN TILT ZOOM PELCOD 1 115200 Paste Default Cancel Figure 4 41 After completing all the setting please click save button Right click mouse click
89. 50 BNC 1 0Vp p 750 NTSC PAL BNC 1 0Vp p 750 1 ch PAL NTSC BNC 1 0VP P 750 composite video signal output Video monitor Video 1 ch VGA output Output Support TV VGA video output at the same time Video dara Support PAL NTSC Real time Mode PAL 1f s to 25f s per channel and NTSC 1f s to 30f s per Record channel Speed Partition Touring schedule auto control PAL NTSC Real time monitor D1 704x5 6 04x480 Playback All channel D1 704x576 704x480 HD1 352x576 352x480 2CIF 704x288 704x240 CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Quality mask Support max 4 zones Im ENE Ta Channel information time information and privacy mask zone Information TV Adjust Adjust TV output zone suitable to anamorphic video Channel Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding Lock normally Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized user seeing secret video Channel Channel name recording status screen lock status video loss status Information and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of display Resolution PAL NTSC screen Color Hue brightness contrast saturation and gain setup for each channel Configuratio n Hard Disk 1 built in SATA port Support 1 HDD Hard Disk Video 56 900MByte h Hard disk Occupation Manual recording motion detection recording schedule recording and Recording alarm recording Mode Priority Man
90. 5f s per channel and NTSC 1f s to 30f s Record per channel Speed Partition Monitor Support monitor tour functions such as alarm motion detection and Touring schedule auto control PAL NTSC Real time monitor D1 704x576 704x480 Resolution Playback Playback PAL NTSC All ch All ch CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 176x144 176x120 Privacy Support one privacy mask of user defined size in full screen mask Support max 4 zones mel Channel information time information and privacy mask zone Information TV Adjust Adjust TV output zone suitable to anamorphic video 57 6 level image quality Adjustable Quality Hard disk Record and playback Backup function Network Function Channel Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding Lock normally Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized user seeing secret video Channel Channel name recording status screen lock status video loss status Information and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of display screen Color Hue brightness contrast saturation and gain setup for each channel Configuratio n Audio Input 4 ch 200 2000mv 10KQ BNC Audio 1 ch audio output 200 3000mv 5KO BNC Output Bidirectional 1 ch audio talk input 200 3000mv 10K 2 BNC Audio Reuse audio output channel Hard Disk 2 built in SATA port Support 2 HDDs Hard Disk Audio PCM
91. 60 PAL NTSC Real time monitor D1 704x576 704x480 Playback channel All channel D1 704x576 704x480 CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Resolution PAL NTSC Support dual streams Extra stream resolution CIF 352X 288 352 X 240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Quality mask Support max 4 zones Image Information Channel information time information and privacy mask zone TV Adjust Adjust TV output zone suitable to anamorphic video Channel Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding Lock normally Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized user seeing secret video Channel Channel name recording status screen lock status video loss status Information and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of display screen Color Hue brightness contrast saturation and gain setup for each channel Configuratio n Audio Rudo not 4 ch 200 8 ch 200 4 ch 200 4 ch 200 2000mv Audio Input 2000mv 2000mv 2000mv 10KQ BNC 1OKQ BNC 10KQ BNC 10KQ RCA 1 ch audio output 200 1 ch audio 1 ch audio output 200 Audio 3000mv 5KQ BNC output 200 3000mv Output 3000mv 5KQO BNC 5KO RCA 1 ch audio talk output 200 1 ch audio 1 ch audio output 200 3000mv 5KQ BNC output 200 3000mv 10KQ BNC Reuse audio output 3000mv Reuse audio output chamnel 1OKQ RCA channel Reuse audio output channel Hard Disk 2 built in SATA port Support 2 HDDs Hard Disk Audio
92. 704x576 704x480 CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Support dual streams Extra stream resolution CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Image Quality 6 level image quality Adjustable Privacy mask Support one privacy mask of user defined size in full screen Support max 4 zones MEE Channel information time information and privacy mask zone Information TV Adjust Adjust TV output zone suitable to anamorphic video Channel Lock Channel Information Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding normally Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized user seeing secret video Channel name recording status screen lock status video loss status and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of display screen Color Hue brightness contrast saturation and gain setup for each channel Configuration Audio Audio Input Audio Output 4 ch 200 2000mv 8 ch 200 2000mv 4 ch 200 10KQ RCA 10KQ RCA 2000mv 10KO RCA 1 ch audio output 200 3000mv 5KO RCA 31 ee 1 ch audio talk input 200 3000mv 10KQ RCA Audio 1 ch audio talk output 200 3000mv 5KO RCA 2 built in SATA port Support 2 HDDs l Hard Disk Audio PCM 28 8MByte h Manual recording motion detection recording schedule recording and alarm recording Recording Mode Priority Manual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection recording gt schedule recording playback 1 to 120 minutes single record du
93. 750G SATA Digital WD AV GP WD7500AVDS 500G SATA Digital WD AV GP WD500AVDS 500G SATA Digital al Westem WD AV GP WD10EUCX 1T SATA Digital HitachiCinemaStar HCP725050GLA380 500G SATA 5K500 Hitachi HitachiCinemaStar HCT7210505LA360 500G SATA 7K1000 B 7K1000 B 7K1000 B DiamondMax 20 STM3320820AS 320G SATA 306 DiamondMax 20 STM3250820AS 250G SATA 307 APPENDIX C Compatible CD DVD Device List NOTE Please upgrade the DVR firmware to latest version to ensure the accuracy of the table below And you can use the USB cable with the model recommended to set USB burner Manufacturer Mode PortType Type Sony Sony er Sony BenQ 308 Appendix D Compatible Displayer List Please refer to the following sheet for the compatible device brand Brand Moda Dimension Unit inch Q7T3 LXB L17C Samsung LCD 2243EW 309 Appendix E Compatible Switcher List Please refer to the following sheet form compatible switcher list Brand Modaia NetworkWorking Mode DES 1016D 10 100M self adaptive DES 1008D 10 100M self adaptive There are five network modes 1 AUTO RG 519265 2 HALF 10M 3 FULL 10M 4 HALF 100M 5 FULL 100M H3C S1024 10 100M self adaptive TP LINK TL SF1016 10 100M self adaptive TP LINK TL SF1008 10 100M self adaptive 310 Appendix F Compatible Wireless Mouse List Please refer to the following sheet for compatible SD card brand Brand Me po SINT TI 3500
94. 8 7 2 Log Here you can view system log See Figure 7 87 288 WEB service tive riayback stam ANETO osou Log Channel Network Start Time 2013 01 05 100 00 00 End Time 2013 01 07 00 00 00 Event Types ay iv Search Matched 127 logs Log Time 2013 01 05 00 29 13 2013 01 06 03 15 32 Storage System 2013 01 05 00 29 13 User logged in 2013 01 05 00 29 20 System Upgrade Information 3 2013 01 05 00 33 43 System Upgrade gt Version 2013 01 05 00 33 43 Shut down i 2013 01 05 00 33 43 Bootup 2013 01 05 00 33 43 Video Loss 2013 01 05 00 33 43 Video Loss 2013 01 05 00 33 43 Video Loss Advanced gt Online User System Log Info Id 4 12 pj GoTo 1 Figure 7 87 Please refer to the following sheet for log parameter information Parameter Function OO S Type Log types include system operation configuration operation data operation event operation record operation user management log clear Start time Set the start time of the requested log Set the end time of the requested log You can select log type from the drop down list and then click search button to view the list You can click the stop button to terminate current search operation Detailed You can select one item to view the detailed information information You can click this button to delete all displayed log files Please note system does not support clear by type You can click this button to backup log files to c
95. ARAU beatos 218 DOA y Manta Record o o e e ne 219 O A o RTT OORT cae 219 556 AUTO MaINTCI AN CO ora sais 222 Dor 7 O A O A ES 227 55G o A A A SN ere eT em a 222 e II 1 O O es o cx csivetsccsus a aR E ENEO 223 5 5 10 CONN BICKUD ss cat crt O O ian sana E 225 5 6 aa A cede ovcunceselccuenscecdesubueneacatencsteuseleesecseevoeeces 226 A 8 BB BIT pO FS 119 greene enn pe ne nen net amet A AS 226 A gcse aE Pe ere UES Te eRe or O 227 SUG e A E east 227 DEA O A estes cesta tea aes a aoe 229 DES TONI US cc Nemes neh a a col aces o eo o cabo fosa ap ad 229 566 NOMO INTO IMAION a e e da e bora lee o 230 5 7 A EEE EN EE AEON E EE TAE T ies Ae scl E E eS 231 6 ABOUT AUXILIAR Y MENU oaa e 233 6 1 Goto Pane Tilt ZOOM Mena id 233 GLA SBDNtelgen t do lopilato KEV AAA io UA o O soutonau omnes N 233 6 2 Preset Patrol Pattern Border Fun ction ccccccscscssssscccsssccccssccccsscccccsccccccsccccccccccccecccces 234 Vl A O 10 paren enn meme ste enctPer eee Sen E RC Te Ae reerTnE een 235 6 22 ACI O a Ric eT UE Ret PET TR ee bed 235 O29 POSED rrollo lacas 235 624 A lo A he See occ nd acs aca ee Rees 235 6025 2 1S Roe 218 Reamer o ae 235 626 ACtVate Pattern FUNCION ea alas 236 Bel BONES CU DS 236 62 6 JACIIVATE Border FUNCION si A raid 236 A A In 236 7 WEB OPERATION radiata iii 238 7 1 NetWork Connect 238 7 2 COIN laa 238 7 3 LAN MOQ nr oT OP RR Re 7 A BE A Rt 240 7 4 Realtime MON MO 242 7 5 A ow
96. AY CONFIG BACKUP a Ens VIDEO MATRIX Figure 5 44 5 5 1 HDD Management 213 Here is for you to view and implement hard disk management See Figure 5 45 You can see current HDD type status capacity and record time When HDD is working properly system is shown as O When HDD error occurred system is shown as X Alarm set Click alarm set button the interface is shown as below See Figure 5 46 This interface is just like the abnormity setup Please refer to chapter 5 5 2 for detailed information HDD operation You can select HDD mode from the dropdown list such as read only or you can erase all data in the HDD Please note system needs to reboot to get all the modification activated HDD MANAGE Alarm Set HDD Setting Alarm Release HDD Channel HDD No 1 v Setto Read Write 7 Execute Type Status Capacity Record Time Read Write Normal 465 74 GB 12 12 06 09 58 06 12 12 11 16 42 26 12 12 17 17 08 38 12 12 30 20 47 36 12 12 02 18 57 58 12 12 07 18 12 54 12 12 13 19 23 54 f 12 12 20 11 22 31 12 12 20 11 21 04 12 12 21 18 09 01 f 12 12 30 20 57 27 13 01 04 02 38 27 13 01 06 23 23 14 12 12 06 09 58 05 Figure 5 45 Please highlight icon O to select the corresponding function Disk Error A Cancel Figure 5 46 For the HDD group setup operation please note e Each channel s records can be stored into the specified HDD Group
97. CIF 704x288 704x240 CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Support dual streams extra stream resolution QCIF 176x144 176x120 Image 6 level image quality Adjustable Quality Privacy Support one privacy mask of user defined size in full screen mask Support max 4 zones Image re Channel information time information and privacy mask zone TV Adjust Adjust TV output zone suitable to anamorphic video Channel Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding normally Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized user seeing secret video Channel Channel name recording status screen lock status video loss status Information and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of display screen Color Hue brightness contrast saturation and gain setup for each channel n Audio 1 ch 200 2000mv 10KQ RCA Audio 1 ch audio output 200 3000mv 5KO RCA Output 15 Bidirectional Reuse the first audio input channel Audio Reuse audio output channel Hard Disk 1 built in SATA port Support 1 HDD Hard Disk Audio PCM 28 8MByte h Hard disk Occupation Video 56 900MByte h Manual recording motion detection recording schedule recording and alarm recording Priority Manual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection recording gt schedule recording Storage Mode Support channel record quota setup Recording 1 to 120 minutes single record duration Default setup is 60 minutes Length Play
98. Check privacy mask setup or your screen saver DVR hardware malfunctions 5 Real time video color is distorted There are following possibilities When using BNC output NTSC and PAL setup is not correct The real time video becomes black and white DVR and monitor resistance is not compatible Video transmission is too long or degrading is too huge 296 e DVR color or brightness setup is not correct 6 Can not search local records There are following possibilities e HDD ribbon is damaged e HDD is broken e Upgraded program is not compatible The recorded file has been overwritten e Record function has been disabled 7 Video is distorted when searching local records There are following possibilities Video quality setup is too low e Program read error bit data is too small There is mosaic in the full screen Please restart the DVR to solve this problem e HDD data ribbon error HDD malfunction e DVR hardware malfunctions 8 There is no audio when monitor There are following possibilities e It is not a power picker e Itis not a power acoustics e Audio cable is damaged DVR hardware malfunctions 9 There is audio when monitor but there is no audio when system playback There are following possibilities e Setup is not correct Please enable audio function e Corresponding channel has no video input Playback is not continuous when the screen is blue 10 Time display is not correct There are foll
99. Full D1 2U Entry level SEES nannan 126 2 4 Remote COM UO A eae 127 2 5 MOUSE CONTO ao ici 129 2 6 Vital Keyboard FrontRanBlcinnni ias 131 26k VINIASUDO ANC a di 131 A A Pe nn eae ee en Ree See ee ree 131 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONG ccccsscssceeecnsseseensenseeneonseeeeonees 132 3 1 Check Unpacked nn nE Neans E tu cacetua O ANENE AE REN 132 3 2 About Front Panel and Real Panel sseceesssoceesssoccessscoccessscccessssoceesscoccessscccessscccesssoccessscoceesssoeeesss 132 3 3 ADD TASCA COM A O o O NENA EE OEE EAE 132 31 SMART FUGEES ada 133 Se AVI TA SNS arado 133 o E PAI RC oe re ee ne ree Re eT 134 3 3 4 2U series HD SDI series 960H do 135 3 4 RACK MS tea AU cn E AEE E AEN 136 3 5 Connecting Power SUPDIY sd 136 3 6 Connecting Video Input and Output Devices ssessseesocesocsscssocescceocesocesccsocessosesossocesocesosesossoessoee 136 32051 GOMMECING Vid o plis 136 262 Connecting vided COUN UIE secarse oo 136 3 7 Connecting Audio Input amp Output Bidirectional Audio ooooooomo 137 TA AVIOPARI E 137 de PAudo ooo 137 3 8 Alarm Input and Output Connection sseeessocessoccessocessoccessocessoccessoccesoccessoceesoocessocesssocessocsessocessssee 137 So Alerminput and Quipur DetalS sanea T NR 138 111 3GA VEU A Lg 10 Oz lin rer en eRe Cron mr rE ne zd CEPR ISTE NOE 146 3 0 9 AlaiiQUIPUT FOF irena re nS aa 147 3 9 FZ sess A RO 147 210 RO 148 Si O
100. Function USB mouse to switch screen Video Compressio H 264 Audio Compressio G711A G711U PCM n 4 CH composite video 8 CH composite video 16 CH composite input NTSC PAL input NTSC PAL video input BNC 1 0Vp p 750 BNC 1 0Vp p 750 NTSC PAL BNC 1 0Vp p 750 1 ch PAL NTSC BNC 1 0VP P 750 composite video signal output 1 ch VGA output 1 ch HDMI output 1 ch matrix output Support multiple window output mode Support TV VGA HDMI video output at the same time Video Standard Support PAL NTSC Real time Mode PAL 1f s to 25f s per channel and NTSC 1f s to 30f s Record per channel Speed Partition Touring schedule auto control PAL NTSC Real time monitor D1 704x576 704x480 Compression Standard i Video Input Video monitor Wide Output Resolution PALINTSC Meyback All channel D1 704x576 704x480 HD1 352x576 352x480 2CIF 704x288 704x240 CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Quality mask Support max 4 zones 50 Channel Channel name recording status screen lock status video loss status Information and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of display screen Color Hue brightness contrast saturation and gain setup for each channel Configuratio n Audio Audio Input 4 ch 200 2000mv 10KQ BNC Audio 1 ch audio output 200 3000mv 5KO BNC Output Image E isa Channel information time information an
101. G Exclude HDD Installation Desktop installation Mode 1 3 8 Enhanced Full D1 Mini 1U Series Main High performance industrial embedded micro controller System p rocessor Resources and network operation simultaneously Devices Method optional Function USB mouse to switch screen Compression Video Standard Compressio H 264 n Audio G711A G711U PCM n 4 CH composite video 8 CH composite video 16 CH composite vdeo noui input NTSC PAL input NTSC PAL video input p BNC 1 0Vp p 750 BNC 1 0Vp p 750 NTSC PAL BNC 1 0Vp p 750 1 ch PAL NTSC BNC 1 0VP P 750 composite video signal output Video monitor Video 1 ch VGA output Output 1 ch HDMI output Support TV VGA HDMI video output at the same time Video Ganda Support PAL 625 TVL 50fps NTSC 525 TVL 60fps Record Real time Mode PAL 1f s to 25f s per channel and NTSC 1f s to 30f s per channel Speed Partition Touring schedule auto control PAL NTSC Real time monitor Resolution D1 704x576 704x480 PAL NTSC OCS 99 Playback All ch D1 704x576 704x480 HD1 352x576 352x480 2CIF 704x288 704x240 CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 24 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Quality mask Support max 4 zones Information TV Adjust Adjust TV output zone suitable to anamorphic video Channel Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding Lock normally Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized us
102. In playback mode playback the next video In menu setup go to down ward of the dropdown list In text mode input number 9 English character W X Y Z Reverse Pau se 6 Play Next 9 In normal playback click this button to pause playback In pause mode click this button to resume playback In text mode input number 5 English character J K L Play Pause 5 USB port To connect USB storage device USB mouse HEESEN 88 Network abnormal indication light HDD abnormal HDD HDD error occurs or HDD capacity is below specified indication threshold value the light becomes red to alert you Network error occurs or there is no network connection the light becomes red to alert you light System is recording or not It becomes on when system is Record Hg It is to receive the signal from the remote control 2 1 5 Full D1 1 5U and Simple 1 5U Series The front panel is shown as below See Figure 2 5 Figure 2 5 Please refer to the following sheet for front panel button information Name Icon Function y Power button press this button for three seconds to boot up Power button or shut down DVR Shift Shift In textbox click this button to switch between numeral English Small Capitalized donation and etc Activate current control modify setup and then move up and down Up 1 av Increase decrease numeral Down 4 f Assistant function such as PTZ menu In text mode
103. Logitech M215 Shuangfeiyan Tianyao G7 630 311 Appendix G Earthing 1 What is the surge Surge is a short current or voltage change during a very short time In the circuit it lasts for microsecond In a 220V circuit the 5KV or 10KV voltage change during a very short time about microseconds can be called a surge The surge comes from two ways external surge and internal surge e The external surge The external surge mainly comes from the thunder lightning Or it comes from the voltage change during the on off operation in the electric power cable e The internal surge The research finds 88 of the surge from the low voltage comes from the internal of the building such as the air conditioning elevator electric welding air compressor water pump power button duplicating machine and other device of inductive load The lightning surge is far above the load level the PC or the micro devices can support In most cases the surge can result in electric device chip damage PC error code accelerating the part aging data loss and etc Even when a small 20 horsepower inductive engine boots up or stops the surge can reach 3000V to 50000V which can adversely affect the electronic devices that use the same distribution box To protect the device you need to evaluate its environment the lighting affection degree objectively Because surge has close relationship with the voltage amplitude frequency network structure device voltage r
104. N6 Series Standalone DVR User s Manual Version 6 0 3 Table of Contents 1 FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONG c cssccsscnscseccnscnsscescnsecsscnsensscesensenssens 1 1 1 ONIS E E da 1 1 2 AAA AP 1 1 3 SDS CIM CATON NS lao E 2 Lot EDD FulleBa Sinan S eie eu a TE 2 Loe TADD2GIF Smanm Wl SONGS ainn A E A T TOA 5 1 3 3 Enhanced 1HDD Full D1 Smart 1U Series iarrann a a E O a 8 1 3 4 Enhanced 1HDD 2CIF Smart 1U Series cccooccccnccocccononcncnononacononnnncononnnncconnanononnanoconnnaconnnss 11 1 3 5 General 2CIF Real time Mini 1U Serles coooooccnnococccnoocccononanononananononanononanaconnnnanonnnnnnconananoos 14 t26 General FUFDTMALTU SEES aia 17 137 Enhanced 2CIF Real time Mini 1U Series s crini a A 21 130 Enhanced FulleDA Mili WU Snes corras 24 3 39 General 1U Ses yaaa 27 1 3 10 SODA TU Seneca 30 1 3 11 AIDS Dl LOB OP TU SEES co 33 1 3 12 ZADD 1U Entry level Seni ai iia 37 1 3 13 UIE DI Fiz WS SCS sad 40 1 3 14 AD SD TOSOP ASU SS ooo 43 1 315 ADD tull Dt 1 5U Entry level Senes ii baba 46 1 3 16 4HDD full D1 1 5U Entry level Serles ooooocccocccononacononancconanancnonananonnnnnnconnnnnccnnnnnccnnnnos 50 13 17 CAD D 2CIP 1 OU SEE Snan E Sao aeeacuaars 53 1 3 18 de DAS SUS E PRA RE A ae ene tedeunetes Suances 57 1 3 19 SIMP S USES tea 60 1 3 20 GOOF ARDD T SUSEN S ii A A 63 1 3 21 GOOF ZOD WSUS CHES aaa ai ran 66 1 3 22 General ZU Snes unan 70 1 3 23 Bs DBs 0 5 8 aed ey a a E 73
105. NTSC BNC 1 0VP P 750 composite video signal output Video monitor cai 1 ch VGA output Video Output 1 ch HDMI output 1 ch matrix output Support TV VGA HDMI video output at the same time Support PAL NTSC Real time Mode PAL 1f s to 25f s per channel and NTSC 1f s to 30f s Record Speed per channel en 1 4 1 4 8 9 windows windows Optional Monitor Support monitor tour functions such as alarm motion detection and Touring schedule auto control PAL 7O0OTVL 50f s NTSC 700TVL 60f s Real time monitor 960H 960 x576 960x480 Playback channel 1 16 960 x576 960x480 Regen D1 704x576 704x480 CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Main High performance industrial embedded micro controller Embedded LINUX Multiplex operations Multiple channel record multiple channel Resources playback and network operation simultaneously User friendly graphical user interface Input Devices Front panel USB mouse remote control Arabic number English character donation and extension Chinese Input Method optional Shortcut Copy paste operation USB mouse right key shortcut menu double Function click USB mouse to switch screen do Compression G711A G711U POM Compression Support dual streams Extra stream resolution CIF 352X 288 352 X 240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 6 level image quality Adjustable Support one privacy mask of user defined size in full screen Support max 4 zones Image Quality Privacy mask
106. O3 C3 NO5 C5 NC5 is a group of NO NC activation output on off button NO4 C4 NO5 C5 NC5 CTRL 12V Control power output The power output is off when the alarm is canceled It is rated power output Earth cable 485 A B 485 communication port They are used to control devices such as PTZ Please parallel connect 120TQ between A B cables if there are too many PTZ decoders 3 8 1 8 960H 2HDD 1 5U Series The 960H 2HDD 1 5U series product interface is shown as in Figure 3 9 The following interface is based on the 16 channel series product 142 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 NO NO NO 1234 56 78 e e Figure 3 9 You can refer to the following sheet for alarm input and output information L 2 3 4 5 ALARM 1 to ALARM 16 The alarm becomes active in low voltage 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 There are three groups of normal open activation output on off button 3 8 1 9 2HDD 2CIF 1 5U Series The 2HDD 2CIF 1 5U series product interface is shown as in Figure 3 10 Figure 3 10 You can refer to the following sheet for detailed information Is 2 Be 4 5 ALARM 1 to ALARM 16 The alarm becomes active in low voltage 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 NOC 2 NOC There are three groups of normal open activation output on off 3 NO C button 3 8 1 10 2HDD full D1 1 5U Entry level Series The 2HDD full D1 1 5U entry level series product interface is shown as in Figure 3 11 143 9 10
107. PAL Standard HDD full Here is for you to select working mode when hard disk is full There 275 are two options stop recording or rewrite If current working HDD is overwritten or the current HDD is full while the next HDD is no empty then system stops recording If the current HDD is full and then next HDD is not empty then system overwrites the previous files Pack Here is for you to specify record duration The value ranges from 1 duration to 120 minutes Default value is 60 minutes 7 8 5 1 2 Date and time The date and time interface is shown as in Figure 7 65 WEB service tive riayback stam ANETO Logout General Date4 Time Holiday Setup Channel Network Date Format YYYY MM DD bd Event Time Format 24 HOUR nd Storage o System Time 2013 01 06 03 12 39 r DST gt Account DST Type Date O Day of Week gt Display Start Time 2000 01 01 00 00 gt Default End Time 2000 01 01 00 00 gt Import amp Export Yi NTP gt Auto Maintain Time Zone GMT 08 00 E gt Upgrade Server time windows com Manual Update gt RS232 Pont 123 1 65535 gt PTZ Interval 60 Minute 0 65535 Advanced Figure 7 65 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Parameter Function Date format Here you can select date format from the dropdown list Time There are two options 24 H and 12 H Format Time zone The time zone of the device System It is to set system time It bec
108. PAL NTSC BNC 1 0VP P 750 composite video signal output Video monitor Video 1 ch VGA output Output 1 ch HDMI output Support TV VGA HDMI video output at the same time Support PAL NTSC Real time Mode PAL 1f s to 25f s per channel and NTSC 1f s to 30f s per Record channel Speed Video 1 4 windows Optional 1 4 8 9 windows 1 4 8 9 16 windows Partition Monitor Support monitor tour functions such as alarm motion detection and Touring schedule auto control PAL NTSC Real time monitor D1 704x576 704x480 Playback All channel D1 704x576 704x480 HD1 352x576 352x480 2CIF 704x288 704x240 CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Quality mask Support max 4 zones Im ee age Channel information time information and privacy mask zone Information Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding Lock normally Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized user seeing secret video Channel Channel name recording status screen lock status video loss status Information and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of display screen Color Hue brightness contrast saturation and gain setup for each channel Configuratio n Hard Disk 1 built in SATA port Support 1 HDD Hard Disk Video 56 900MByte h Hard disk Occupation Resolution PAL NTSC Manual recording motion detection recording schedule recording and Recording alarm recordi
109. PCM 28 8MByte h Manual recording motion detection recording schedule recording and Recording alarm recording Mode Priority Manual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection Record and recording gt schedule recording playback 1 to 120 minutes single record duration Default setup is 60 minutes Length Playback Repeat Bidirectional Audio When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Way 61 Record Various search engines such as time type and channel search Playback Various fast play slow play speeds manual frame by frame playback Mode and reverse play mode Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Various File Switch Ways Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto plays the next file in the current channel Multi There is 1 4 9 16 channel playback mode channel It may vary due to different series Playback Switch between self adaptive screen full screen when playback Zoom Partial When in one window full screen playback mode you can select any zone Enlargemen to activate partial enlargement function t Backup HDD backup function Backi Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk USB Moda p burner and etc Support peripheral eSATA backup device Support network download and save View monitor channel remotely
110. Preview MEncode Overlay Position LeftTop y Cancel Figure 5 61 5 5 9 2 Network Type The network type interface is shown as below See Figure 5 62 Here we take the ATM POS protocol to continue There are two types with or without the protocol according to client s requirements 223 With the protocol For ATM POS with the protocol you just need to set the source IP destination IP sometimes you need to input corresponding port number nim CARD OVERLAY Snifter Mode NET Protocols ATM POS z Setting ATM POS Overlay Mode MPreview MEncode Overlay Channel LeftTop v Cancel Figure 5 62 Without the protocol For the ATM POS without the protocol the interface is shown as in Figure 5 63 Source IP refers to host IP address that sends out information usually it is the device host Destination IP refers to other systems that receive information Usually you do not need to set source port and target port There are total four groups IP The record channel applies to one group optional only Six frame ID groups verification can guarantee information validity and legal a ATM POS Data Group Data Group1 7 Source IP TIE ATA Destination IP 10 6 amp 6 13 Record Channel startPosition Length Key Frame ID1 1 1 bank Frame ID2 Frame ID3 Frame ID4 Frame ID5 Frame ID6 Cancel Figure 5 63 Click Data button you can see an interface is shown as in Figure 5 64 Here you can set offset value l
111. Regular O mo O Alarm CJ MD amp Alarm O an Sunday O Monday O Tuesday O Wednesday O Thursday O Friday O Saturday O Holiday Save Cancel Figure 7 56 271 Setup Time Period 1 00 24 LJ Regular O mo O Alarm LJ MD Alarm Time Period 2 00 74 Cl Regular LI wo O Alarm O MD Alarm Time Period 3 00 724 LJ Regular LJ mo O Alarm LJ MD Alarm Time Period 4 00 124 LJ Regular O mo O Alarm O MD Alarm Time Period 5 00 24 Cl Regular O wo O Aarm LJ MD Alarm Time Period 6 00 724 LJ Regular O mo O Aarm LJ MD amp Alarm Oan O Sunday i Monday d Tuesday d Wednesday d Thursday d Friday d Saturday Holiday Save Cancel Figure 7 57 LI an Channel 1 L channel 2 L Channel 3 L Channel 4 L channel 5 L Channel 6 d Channel 7 d Channel 8 Dave Cancel Figure 7 58 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Parameter Function o Channel Please select a channel from the dropdown list Pre record Please input pre record time here The value ranges from 0 to 30 Redundancy Check the box here to enable redundancy function Please note this function is null if there is only one HDD Snapshot Check the box here to enable snapshot function Holiday Check the box here to enable holiday function Setup Click the Setup button you can set record period See Figure 7 56 Sunday to There are six periods in one day If you do not check the date at the Saturday bottom of the interf
112. SB Port Network Switch Online User Online User Online User Network Keyboard Online User Figure 2 52 2 3 14 HD SDI 1080P 2U Series Please refer to the following figure for detailed information See Figure 2 53 The following figure is based on the 4 channel series product 124 r A ICED ite iia Audio Input Video Input Audio Pivirectonal Tall PTZ Control Output Input Output Alarm input Alarm Output Video Output Matrix Power Switch Loop Output Output lee Py Ac on 8 Woe 8 ron a RS232 Port USB Port Power Input Port eSATA Port VGA Output HDMI Output Network Switch Network User Network User Network User Network Keyboard Figure 2 53 2 3 15 960H 2U Series Please refer to the following figure for detailed information See Figure 2 54 The following figure is based on the 16 channel series product 125 DUDE Car S DEPEN T 7 Audio Input Video Input Audio Output Alarm Input Alarm Output RS485 PTZ control Talk Input Talk Output Video Output Loop out Matrix Output O q voll NS O O O Power Input HDHT Network Swither Se Online User Online User Online User Network Keyboard Figure 2 54 2 3 16 8HDD Full D1 2U Entry level Series Please refer to Figure 2 55 for connection sample The following figure is based on the 16 channel series product 126 aes we aR o sta Audio input Video
113. Select corresponding PTZ protocol such as PELCOD Address input corresponding PTZ address Baud rate Select baud rate Data bit Select data bit Stop bit Select stop bit Parity There are three choices none odd even After completed all the setups please click save button system goes back to the previous menu For detailed setup please refer to chapter 4 10 preset patrol pattern scan PAN TILT ZOOM PELCOD 1 115200 Default Cancel Figure 5 39 5 3 9 Display Display setup interface is shown as below See Figure 5 40 e Transparency Here is for you to adjust transparency The value ranges from 128 to 255 e Channel name Here is for you to modify channel name System max support 25 digit The value may vary due to different series Please note all your modification here only applies to DVR local end You need to open web or client end to refresh channel name e Time display You can select to display time or not when system is playback e Channel display You can select to channel name or not when system is playback 210 e Resolution There are four options 1920x1080 1280 X 1024 default 1280 x 720 1024 X 768 Please note the system needs to reboot to activate current setup e Image enhance Check the box you can optimize the margin of the preview video e Tour setup Here you can activate tour function Click Setup button you can see an interface shown as in Figure 5 42 lt gt lt gt lt gt
114. System can send out an email to alert you when an alarm occurs Tour You need to check the box here to enable this function System begins 1 wiindow or multiple window tour display among the channel s you set to record when an alarm OCCUIS Please go to chapter 5 3 9 to set tour interval and tour mode PTZ Activation Here you can set PTZ movement when alarm occurs Such as go to preset X 7 8 3 2 2 Net Alarm The network alarm interface is shown as in Figure 7 47 Network alarm refers to the alarm signal from the network System does not anti dither and sensor type setup For reset setups please refer to chapter 7 8 3 2 1 WEB service SA ACTI ARNO AECE AUR Channel Local Alarm Net Alarm Alarm Out Network Enable 1 Event gt Video Detect gt Abnormality as eliz 8 Storage Delay Second 10 300 System Record Channel La 1 Alarm Out Advanced Latch PTZ Activation setup Tour Snapshot la 2 O show Message O send Email OC Buzer O Message Second 1 300 2 10 MJE information i 3 31 los 3 Figure 7 47 7 8 3 2 3 Alarm Out Here you can set alarm output channel mode See Figure 7 48 WEB service MONT TUTTO ANTI AECI AR Channel Local Alarm Alarm Out Network Alarm Type Event Schedule gt Video Detect Manual gt Abnormality Stop Storage Status Advanced Information Figure 7 48 7 8 3 3 Abnormity 268 It includes six statuses No disk disk er
115. THING eee ee es 312 APPENDIX H TOXIC OR HAZARDOUS MATERIALS OR ELEMENTGS 317 Vill Welcome Thank you for purchasing our DVR This user s manual is designed to be a reference tool for the installation and operation of your system Here you can find information about this series DVR features and functions as well as a detailed menu tree Before installation and operation please read the following safeguards and warnings carefully 1X Important Safeguards and Warnings 1 Electrical safety All installation and operation here should conform to your local electrical safety codes We assume no liability or responsibility for all the fires or electrical shock caused by improper handling or installation 2 Transportation security Heavy stress violent vibration or water splash are not allowed during transportation storage and installation 3 Installation Keep upwards Handle with care Do not apply power to the DVR before completing installation Do not place objects on the DVR 4 Qualified engineers needed All the examination and repair work should be done by the qualified service engineers We are not liable for any problems caused by unauthorized modifications or attempted repair 5 Environment The DVR should be installed in a cool dry place away from direct sunlight inflammable explosive substances and etc This series product shall be transported storage and used in the environment rang
116. This zone is For Internet websites asi except those listed in trusted and restricted zones Security level For this zone Security Settings Internet Zone Settings Disable Enable a Download signed Activex controls nok secure Disable Enable not secure Prompt recommended 9 Download unsigned Actives controls not secure Disable recommended Enable not secure O Prompt 4 Initialize and script Actives controls not marked as safe for si Disable recommended Allowed levels For this zone Medium to High 6 Enable not secure Medium high so Appropriate For most websites Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe 9 Run Acie controls and plug ins cantent Bn rrinictestar anne Unsigned Activex controls will not be downloaded ul Takes effect after you restart Internet Explorer Reset custom settings Reset to medium high default y 1 teset all zones to default level so Figure 7 2 After installation the interface is shown as below See Figure 7 3 Please input your user name and password Default factory name is admin and password is admin Then you can select the login mode LAN and WAN Note For security reasons please modify your password after you first login 7 WEB SERVICE Windows Internet Explorer provided by Yahoo er gt W 10 10 4 122 trx 1 Pi File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Ve Favorites f
117. UISRIMTSMACSS ni As 148 4 OVERVIEW OF NAVIGATION AND CONTROLS eonnmoccccnccnoncnananenannnnnrananenannns 150 4 1 Logi LOGOUT amp M n MU on ains 150 E o esatoon E 150 Aaa MAI oda 151 AS O o eo 151 4 1 4 Auto Resume after Power Failure cccooooncnoononcnnonanncnonnnccononancnnocnnncnnonnncnnnnnnnnncnnncnnnnos 152 4 1 5 Replace BUON Bat lla 152 4 2 VE MEW o oli 152 4 3 Manual o A TT 153 ES MANE e eo 154 40 2 151 90 6 1 2 1110 y PSOE COLOCO ease aa eee aa als 154 33 EMAble disable eco abad 154 4 3 4 Enable all channel recording oococooocccnoocnncnoonancnonannnonannnncnnonnnconocnnncnnonnncnnornnnnnnnnncnnnnos 155 os o la oleo recordin usne N 155 4 4 Search amp Play DAC AA E 156 441 Small SO Mid 160 442 Accurate playback OV IM lada 160 AALS o A 161 4 4 4 Multiple channel PreviewWw ooooooooonccnnooonncccnonannnononnnanonocononnnnncconannnnnoconnnnnncconnn ona nccnnanananccnnns 162 4 5 e O 163 45A Schedule MEA o 163 A2 A a S 166 A o AA A II CO Pe 168 1V 4 6 o A A cliswesacdbuatnewsveseuadsuacecaeelcemsaasGecdsavecuensacduaveccusticawceosseas 168 4 0631 GOlo Delec Me cuna ias silos 168 A62 Molon Dei iiaia 169 AS MMS o a e o aac 172 464 Camera Mask ii ia 173 4 7 Alarm Setup and Alarm ACI VAIO eds 174 ATTE GOO alarm Setup INterace spain red 174 Art Aarm AAA e OO a eies ta csh ent oilata trees ee ha ese es ite 174 4 8 A eT rer ner re Seer ee eer
118. WEB SERVICE WEB SERVICE A Username admin Password OLAN OWAN Internet far 100 Figure 7 3 239 7 3 LAN Mode For the LAN mode after you logged in you can see the main window See Figure 7 9 This main window can be divided into the following sections e Section 1 there are five function buttons Live chapter 7 4 setup chapter 7 8 search chapter 7 9 alarm chapter 7 10 and logout chapter 7 11 e Section 2 There are channel number and one button Start all Start all button is to enable disable all channel real time monitor Click it the button becomes yellow See Figure 7 4 Figure 7 4 Please refer to Figure 7 5 for main stream and extra stream switch information sub Stre am Figure 7 5 e Section 3 Start dialogue button You can click this button to enable audio talk Click Y to select bidirectional talk mode There are four options DEFAULT G711a G711u and PCM After you enable the bidirectional talk the Start talk button becomes End Talk button and it becomes yellow See Figure 7 6 Please note the audio input port from the device to the client end is using the first channel audio input port During the bidirectional talk process system will not encode the audio data from the 1 channel t Start Talk DEFAULT Gita G711u Figure 7 6 240 e Section 4 Instant record button Click it the button becomes yellow and system begins manual record See F
119. Yahoo j k 110 10 4 122 View Favorites Tool Help artes ES CONFIG PREVIEW WEB service Qe ONIS ANTI ARNET A ETE a ae pe 2013 01 06 22 45 48 aug yg a of Copyright 2012 Ali Rights Reserved Figure 7 17 Important The window display mode and the channel number are by default For example for the 16 channel the max window split mode is 16 3 Multiple channel monitor system adopts extra stream to monitor by default Double click one channel system switches to single channel and system uses main stream to monitor You can view there are two icons at the left top corner of the channel number for you reference M stands for main stream S stands for sub stream extra stream 4 If you login via the WAN mode system does not support alarm activation to open the video function in the Alarm setup interface Important e For multiple channel monitor mode system adopts extra stream to monitor by default You can not modify manually All channels are trying to synchronize Please note the synchronization effect still depends on your network environments e For bandwidth consideration system can not support monitor and playback at the same time System auto closes monitor or playback interface when you are searching setup in the configuration interface It is to enhance search speed 7 8 Setup 7 8 1 Channel 7 8 1 1 Conditions Here you can view device property information The setups become valid immediately af
120. You can get a notification email before the cancel operation if your email address setup is OK 7 8 2 7 IP filter The IP filter interface is shown as in Figure 7 32 After you enabled trusted sites function only the IP listed below can access current DVR 257 If you enable blocked sites function the following listed IP addresses can not access current DVR WEB service quae yan gare Channel gt TCPAP gt Connection gt WIFI gt 3G gt PPPoE gt DDNS gt Email gt UPnP gt SNMP gt Multicast gt Alarm Centre Event Storage System Advanced Information 7 8 2 8 Email IP Filter O Enable Trusted Sites Add Blocked Sites Figure 7 32 The email interface is shown as in Figure 7 33 Channel Network gt TCPAP gt Connection gt WIFI gt 3G gt PPPoE gt DDNS gt IP Filter gt UPnP gt SNMP gt Multicast gt Alarm Centre Event Storage System Advanced Information Email SMTP Server Port C Anonymous User Name Password Sender Encrypt Type Subject Receiver Interval O Health Enable MailServer 25 NONE E DVR ALERT Attachment 120 Second 0 3600 60 Minute 301440 Email Test Figure 7 33 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Parameter Enable SMTP Server Port Please check the box here to enable email function Input server address and then enable this function Default
121. Z control port Pereg Support various PTZ control protocols RS232 Ordinary COM Debug keyboard connection and transparent serial port COM input and output via network System Hard Disk Display HDD current status Information Information Data Data stream statistics for each channel in wave mode Stream Statistics statistics Support various search engines such as time and type Display version information channel amount alarm input and output amount system version and release date On line user Display current on line user User Multi lever user management various management modes Management User Integrated management for local user serial port user and network user Manageme Configurable user power nt Support user group and its corresponding rights modification No limit to the user or group amount ora Password modification Administrator can modify other user s password Authenticati ae Account lock strategy Five times login failure in thirty minutes may result in account lock Upgrade Web browser client end and update tool Password login protection to guarantee safety User friendly interface when login Provide the following options Logout shutdown restart Right authentication when shut down to make sure only those proper people can turn off DVR Power 0c tev Version Login Logout and Shutdown 59 Power General Consumptio lt 25W With adapter exclude HDD n Working 0
122. access the system via the domain It works even your IP address has changed Please select DDNS from the dropdown list Multiple choices Before you use this function please make sure your purchased device support current function WEB service IAN ANT TIA ACTO AR Channel DDNS Network Ol Enable gt TCPAP DDNS Type Quick gt Connection S Typ Quick DDNS gt WIFI Server IP Address gt 36 Domain Mode Default Domain Custom Domain Name gt PPPoE Domain Name quickddhs com Email Address Optional Please input email address gt IP Filter gt Email gt UPnP gt SNMP gt Multicast gt Alarm Centre Event Storage System Advanced Information Figure 7 31 256 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Parameter Server Type You can select DDNS protocol from the dropdown list and then enable DDNS function Server IP DDNS server IP address server Port DDNS server port Domain Name_ Your self defined domain name User The user name you input to log in the server Password The password you input to log in the server Update period Device sends out alive signal to the server regularly You can set interval value between the device and DDNS server here Quick DDNS and Client end Introduction 1 Background Introduction Device IP is not fixed if you use ADSL to login the network The DDNS function allows you to access the DVR via the registered domain name Besi
123. ace current setup is for today only Please click Save button and then exit Setup Click the Setup button you can set record period See Figure 7 57 Holiday There are six periods in one day If you check Holiday box current channel shall record as your holiday setup here 2172 Copy function allows you to copy one channel setup to another After setting in channel click Copy button you can go to interface Figure 7 58 You can see current channel name is grey such as channel 1 Copy Now you can select the channel you wan to paste such as channel 5 6 7 If you wan to save current setup of channel 1 to all channels you can Click the first box ALL Click the OK button to save current copy setup Click the OK button in the Encode interface the copy function succeeded 7 8 4 2 Storage 7 8 4 2 1 Local Storage The local interface is shown as in Figure 7 59 Here you can see HDD information You can also operate the read only write only hot swap and format operation Channel Network Event i dis Setas read write HDD M Read write HDD Normal 0GB 465 756GB 2012 12 02 17 18 04 2013 01 06 03 09 41 Storage NS gt Schedule gt Record System Advanced Information Figure 7 59 7 8 4 2 2 HDD Setting Here is for you to set HDD group See Figure 7 60 WEB service S ANT ANT ACT aera Channel Local Storage HDD Setting HDD Channel Network Event Storage gt Schedule gt Record Sys
124. ack to the previous menu 59 TV ADJUST Top Deflate a Bottom Deflate Left Deflate a Right Deflate Brightness Default Cancel Figure 5 59 5 5 8 Video Matrix Here you can set matrix output channel and its interval See Figure 5 60 It can support the 1 4 9 16 window sport tour and you can specify the interval Note e HD SDI series product does not support this function e 960H series only supports single window spot tour 222 VIDEO MATRIX Interval 5 v gas T T IN Add Delete Move up Move down Default Cancel Figure 5 60 5 5 9 Card Overlay The card overlay function is for financial areas It includes Sniffer information analysis and title overlay function The Sniffer mode includes COM and network 5 5 9 1 COM Type The COM interface is shown as below See Figure 5 61 Protocol Please select from the dropdown list e Setting Click COM setting button the interface is shown as in RS232 interface Please refer to Chapter 5 3 4 RS232 e Overlay channel Please select the channel you want to overlay the card number e Overlay mode There are two options preview and encode Preview means overlay the card number in the local monitor video Encode means overlay the card number in the record file e Overlay Position Here you can select the proper overlay position from the dropdown list ig CARD OVERLAY Sniffer Mode 0 Protocols NONE Setting Com Setting Overlay Channel Overlay Mode M
125. acket loss rate and you can also view the network status as OK bad no connection and etc eo Network Sniffer backup Please insert USB2 0 device and click the Refresh button you can view the device on the following column You can use the dropdown list to select peripheral device Click Browse button to select the snap path The steps here are same as preview backup operation You can view all connected network adapter names including Ethernet PPPoE WIFI and 3G you can click the button gt on the right panel to begin Sniffer Click the grey stop button to stop Please note system can not Sniffer several network adapters at the same time After Sniffer began you can exit to implement corresponding network operation such as login WEB monitor Please go back to Sniffer interface to click CI stop Sniffer System can save the packets to the specified path The file is named after Network adapter name time You can use software such as Wireshark to open the packets on the PC for the professional engineer to solve complicated problems 230 Le NETWORK TEST Network Test Destination IP 10 36 43 86 Test Result Average Delay 3 630ms Packet Loss Rate 0 3G State OK Network Sniffer Packet Backup DeviceName H m Sniffer Packet Size Sniffer Packet Backup 10 43 3 63 TOSS Figure 5 73 5 6 6 2 Network Load Network load is shown as in Figure 5 74 Here you can view the follow statistics of the device network ad
126. ad backup and playback Multiple devices share information via corresponding software such as professional surveillance software PSS Support network multiple window preview function Motion Zone setup support 396 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection zones Motion Detection Various sensitivity levels Detection and Alarm can activate record or external alarm or screen message prompt Alarm Video Loss Alarm can activate external alarm or screen message prompt External N A Alarm Manual N A Alarm Control Alarm N A Output Alarm Relay USB 2 USB 2 0 ports Interface Interface Network 1 RJ45 10M 100M 1000M self adaptable Ethernet port connection RS485 N A Network Function oo RS232 N A IZ Information Information Stream Statistics Log Backup to 1024 log files statistics Support various search engines such as time and type Ware Display version information channel amount alarm input and output ersion amount system version and release date On line user Display current on line user User Multi lever user management various management modes Management User Integrated management for local user serial port user and network user Manageme Configurable user power nt Support user group and its corresponding rights modification No limit to the user or group amount SST Password modification ___ Administrator can modify other user s password Authenticati an Account lock strategy Fiv
127. adjust zoom focus and Iris lt _ PANITILT ZOOM x Zoom EP Focus Iris P Set Page Switch Figure 6 2 In Figure 6 2 please click direction arrows See _ Figure 6 3 to adjust PTZ position There are totally eight direction arrows Please note there are only four direction arrows in DVR front panel Figure 6 3 6 1 1 3D intelligent Positioning Key 233 In the middle of the eight direction arrows there is a 3D intelligent positioning key See _ Figure 6 4 Please make sure your protocol supports this function and you need to use mouse to control Click this button system goes back to the single screen mode Drag the mouse in the screen to adjust section size Figure 6 4 Here is a sheet for you reference Name Function function Shortcut Function Shortcut key key key key Zoom fs Near B Far Focus Near 14 Far gt l ris cose ne Open bum 6 2 Preset Patrol Pattern Border Function In Figure 6 2 click the set button The interface is shown as below Here you can set the following items Preset Patrol Pattern Border PAN TILTIZOOM X Function Preset 1 Preset Patrol No i0 Patrol Pattern Set Border Del Preset Figure 6 5 In Figure 6 2 click page switch button you can see an interface as in _ Figure 6 6 Here you can activate the following functions Preset Tour Patrol Pattern Auto scan Auto pan Flip Page Switch 234 PY PAN TILT ZOOM x
128. amount Motion detection Preview Control The preview control function has the following features e Support preview playback lt gt Inthe preview desktop system can playback previous 5 60 minutes record of current channel Please go to the Main Menu gt General to set real time playback time lt gt Support drag and play function You can use your mouse to select any playback start time lt gt Support playback pause and exit function lt gt Right now system does not support slow playback and backward playback function e Support digital zoom function e Support real time backup function You can follow the contents listed below for the operation instruction Preview control interface 152 Move you mouse to the top centre of the video of current channel you can see system pops up the preview control interface See Figure 4 6 If your mouse stays in this area for more than 6 seconds and has no operation the control bar automatically hides Figure 4 6 You can refer to the following sheet for detailed information Realtime playback Digital Zoom Real time backup function Playback control The playback control has the following features 4 3 Manual Record Note It is to playback the previous 5 60 minutes record of current channel Please go to the Main Menu gt General to set real time playback time System may pop up a dialogue box if there is no such record in current channel It is to zoom in
129. amp Front Panel 2 6 1 Virtual Keyboard The system supports two input methods numeral input and English character small and capitalized input Move the cursor to the text column the text is shown as blue input button pops up on the right Click that button to switch between numeral input and English input capitalized and small Use gt or lt to shift between small character and capitalized character 2 6 2 Front Panel Move the cursor to the text column Click Fn key and use direction keys to select number you wanted Please click enter button to input 131 3 Installation and Connections Note All the installation and operations here should conform to your local electric safety rules 3 1 Check Unpacked DVR When you receive the DVR from the forwarding agent please check whether there is any visible damage The protective materials used for the package of the DVR can protect most accidental clashes during transportation Then you can open the box to check the accessories Please check the items in accordance with the list Finally you can remove the protective film of the DVR 3 2 About Front Panel and Real Panel The model label in the front panel is very important please check according to your purchase order The label in the rear panel is very important too Usually we need you to represent the serial number when we provide the service after sales 3 3 HDD Installation Before the installation you c
130. an refer to the sheet to know the max HDD amount your product supports Product Series Max HDD No General 2CIF real time mini 1U General full D1 mini IU Enhanced 2CIF real time mini 1U Enhanced full D1 mini 1U General 1U 960H 1U HD SDI 1080P 1U 2HDD 1U entry level Full D1 1 5U HD SDI 1080P 1 5U 960H 4HDD 1 5U 960H 2HDD 1 5U 2HDD full D1 1 5U entry level mb a mb bh 4 4 4 4HDD full D1 1 5U entry level 2HDD 2CIF 1 5U Simple1 5U 2HDD CIF 1 5U General 2U es 132 SMART 1U Enhanced 1HDD Full D1 Smart Enhanced 1HDD CIF Smart You can refer to the Appendix for recommended HDD brand Please use HDD of 7200rpm or higher Please follow the instructions below to install hard disk All the figurers listed below are for reference only Slight difference may be found on the front or rear panel 3 3 1 SMART 1U Series 1 Loosen the screws of the 2 Fix four screws in the HDD 3 Place the HDD in accordance with upper cover and side panel Turn just three rounds the four holes in the bottom 4 Turn the device upside down 6 Connect the HDD cable and and then turn the screws in power cable firmly 7 Put the cover in accordance 8 Secure the screws in the with the clip and then place the rear panel and the side panel upper cover back 3 3 2 Mini 1U 1U Series The mini 1U series DVR has one SATA HDD and 1U series DVR has two SATA HDDs 133 1 Loosen the screws of the
131. and DHCP are read only when the PPPoE dial is OK Mac Address It is to display host Mac address IP Version It is to select IP version IPV4 or IPV6 You can access the IP address of these two versions IP Address Please use the keyboard to input the corresponding number to modify the IP address and then set the corresponding subnet mask and the default gateway Preferred DNS DNS IP address Alternate DNS Alternate DNS IP address For the IP address of IPv6 version default gateway preferred DNS and alternate DNS the input value shall be 128 digit It shall not be left in blank LAN load System can process the downloaded data first if you enable this function The download speed is 1 5X or 2 0X of the normal speed 292 7 8 2 2 Connection The connection interface is shown as in Figure 7 25 WEB SERVICE3s0 Camera Connection Network Max Connection gt TCP IP TCP Pont 1025 65535 gt PPPoE UDP Port 1025 65535 gt DDNS HTTP Port RTSP Port 554 gt IP Filter gt UPnP gt SNMP gt Bonjour gt Multicast gt WIFI gt Q05 Event Storage System information Figure 7 25 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Parameter Function OOO Max connection Itis the max Web connection for the same device The value ranges from 1 to 20 The default setup is 10 TCP port The default value is 37777 You can input the actual port number if necessary UDP port The default value i
132. andard industrial case 440 W x460 D x89mm H 6 5 7 5KG Exclude HDD Desktop rack installation NO 1 3 25 8HDD Full D1 2U Entry level Series Main High performance industrial embedded micro controller System p rocessor Embedded LINUX System Multiplex operations Multiple channel record multiple channel Resources playback and network operation simultaneously User friendly graphical user interface Input Devices Front panel USB mouse aN einod Arabic number English character donation and extension Chinese p optional Shortcut Copy paste operation USB mouse right key shortcut menu double Function click USB mouse to switch screen Compression E G711A G711U PON ompression 4 CH composite 8 CH composite video 16 CH composite video input input NTSC PAL video input NTSC PAL BNC BNC 1 0Vp p 750 NTSC PAL BNC 1 0Vp p 750 1 0Vp p 750 1 ch PAL NTSC BNC 1 0VP P 750 composite video signal output Video monitor esi 1 ch VGA output Video Output 1 ch HDMI output 1 ch matrix output Support multiple window output mode Support TV VGA HDMI video output at the same time Support PAL NTSC Real time Mode PAL 1f s to 25f s per channel and NTSC 1f s to 30f s Record Speed per channel Vi 7 1 4 1 4 8 9 windows ideo Partition windows Optional Monitor Support monitor tour functions such as alarm motion detection and Touring schedule auto control PAL 625TVL 50f s NTSC 525TVL 60f s Real time monitor
133. annel remotely DVR configuration through client end and web browser Upgrade via client or browser to realize remote maintenance Function video loss via client Network control Multiple devices share information via corresponding software such as professional surveillance software PSS Duplex transparent COM Network alarm input and output Bidirectional audio Motion Zone setup support 396 330 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection Detection zones Motion Detection and Various sensitivity levels Alarm can activate record or external alarm or screen message prompt Video Loss Alarm can activate external alarm or screen message prompt External Support record activation function or activate external alarm or screen Alarm message in specified period Alarm Manual Enable or disable alarm input channel Alarm Support analog alarm signal to specific alarm output channel Control 4 ch alarm input You can set normal open or normal close type to Alarm Input select the alarm type Alarm 3 channel relay output Output Alarm Relay 30V DC 2A 125V AC 1A activation alarm gt USB 2 USB 2 0 ports Interface Interface Network RJ45 10M 100M 1000M self adaptable Ethernet port connection PTZ control port Teh Support various PTZ control protocols RS232 Ordinary COM Debug keyboard connection and transparent serial port COM input and output via network System Information Hard Disk Information Data Data stream
134. apter Here you can view information of all connected network adapters The connection status is shown as offline if connection is disconnected Click one network adapter you can view the flow statistics such as send rate and receive rate at the top panel 367 Kb S 14 8 Mb S Name MAC Address Status IP Address Type MTU LAN1 90 02 a9 94 42 f1 Succeed 10 43 3 63 Ethernet 1500 LAN2 46 a4 80 56 24 3c Succeed 100151 Ethernet 1500 Figure 5 74 5 7 Shutdown Double click shutdown button system pops up a dialogue box for you to select See Figure 5 75 e Logout menu user log out menu You need to input password when you login the next time o Restart application reboot DVR 231 e Shutdown system shuts down and turns off power eo Restart system system begins rebooting e Switch user you can use another account to log in hgRestart application shutdown Restart system Switch user Figure 5 75 22 6 About Auxiliary Menu 6 1 Goto Pan Tilt Zoom Menu In the one window surveillance mode right click mouse click fn Button in the front panel or click AUX key in the remote control The interface is shown as below See _ Figure 6 1 View 1 View 4 View 9 View 16 Color Setting search Record Alarm Output Alarm Input Main Menu Figure 6 1 Click Pan Tilt Zoom the interface is shown as in _ Figure 6 2 Here you can set the following items eo Zoom eo Focus O jris Please click icon bel and kl to
135. arm device when an alarm occurs System can delay the alarm output for specified time after an alarm ended The value ranges from 1s to 300s Latch Show message System can pop up a message to alarm you in the local host screen if you enabled this function Check the box here to enable this function The buzzer beeps when an alarm occurs Buzzer Alarm upload System can upload the alarm signal to the centre Including alarm centre When 3G network connection is OK system can send out a message when motion detect occurs Message Send Email If you enabled this function System can send out an email to alert you when an alarm occurs Tour You need to check the box here to enable this function System begins 1 wiindow or multiple window tour display among the channel s you set to record when an alarm occurs Please go to chapter 5 3 9 to set tour interval and tour mode PTZ Here you can set PTZ movement when alarm occurs Such as go Activation to preset X See Figure 7 41 264 Video Matrix This function is for motion detect only Check the box here to enable video matrix function Right now system supports one channel tour function System takes first come and first serve principle to deal with the activated tour System will process the new tour when a new alarm occurs after previous alarm ended Otherwise it restores the previous output status before the alarm activation 7 8 3 1 2 Video Lo
136. ase note the following figure is based on the 16 channel series product 107 L 2 4 6 2 1112 13 14 15 161718 19 20 Figure 2 34 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information 1 GND pot OOO 2 Power input port S 6 1 to4 channelaudioinput 8 Videoinput S 9 Video CVBS output o Matrix video output EE 13 15 e 7 19 20 1 2 11 Audio output Audio output o 12 Bidirectional talk input port Bidirectional talk output port Alarm input Alarm output RS485 port HDMI port 15 Video VGA output 16 HDMI port Video CVBS output RS232 port r Video matrix output eSATA port 19 USB port 20 Network port The 32 channel series DVR rear panel is shown as below See Figure 2 35 13 1415161718 19 Figure 2 35 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information 108 1 GND port Power input port Power button Fan 1 to 4 channel audio input DB25 port 5 to 16 channel audio input port Video input Video CVBS output EE 6 8 9 a ECE 12 Video VGA output 2 2 18 HD SDI 1080P 2U Series The rear panel 4 8 channel series product is shown as in Figure 2 36 1 2 3 45 6 789 1011 Figure 2 36 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Network port 8 RS232 pot EN eSATA port USB port 12 Power button Audio input B
137. atus Information Information Data Data stream statistics for each channel in wave mode Stream Statistics Log Backup to 1024 log files Statistics Support various search engines such as time and type ersion amount system version and release date On line user Display current on line user User Multi lever user management various management modes Management User Integrated management for local user serial port user and network user Manageme Configurable user power nt Support user group and its corresponding rights modification No limit to the user or group amount a Password modification Administrator can modify other user s password Authenticati ae Account lock strategy a Five times login failure in thirty minutes may result in account lock Upgrade Web browser client end and update tool Password login protection to guarantee safety User friendly interface when login Provide the following options Logout Login Logout and Shutdown shutdown restart Right authentication when shut down to make sure only those proper people can turn off DVR AC90 264V 50 2 Hz Max 220W Power General Consumptio 40W Exclude HDD Parameter n Working 0C0 2 559 Temperatur e Working 10 90 Humidity Air 86kpa 106kpa Pressure 1 5U standard industrial case 440 W x410 D x70mm H Weight 4 5 5 5KG Exclude HDD Installation Desktop rack installation Mode 1 3 15 2HDD full D1 1 5U Ent
138. ay before mark time Here you can set to begin playback from previous N seconds of the mark time 161 Note Usually system can playbacks previous N seconds record if there is such kind of record file Otherwise system playbacks from the previous X seconds when there is such as kind of record o Mark M ark Manager Click the mark manager button 4 on the Search interface Figure 4 12 you can go to Mark Manager interface See Figure 4 16 System can manage all the record mark information of A Marks Manager Channel 1 v Start Time 2013 01 15 00 00 00 End Time 2013 01 16 00 00 00 Search channel Mark Time Mark Name 7 1 2013 01 15 00 00 12 Tag 1 2013 01 15 00 00 59 123 Delete Figure 4 16 e Modify Double click one mark information item you can see system pops up a dialogue box for you to change mark information You can only change mark name here eo Delete Here you can check the mark information item you want to delete and then click Delete button you can remove one mark item Note eo After you go to the mark management interface system needs to pause current playback System resume playback after you exit mark management interface lfthe mark file you want to playback has been removed system begin playbacking from the first file in the list 4 4 4 Multiple channel Preview 162 Right click mouse and then select multiple channel preview you can go to the following interface See Fig
139. ays the next file in the current channel Multi channel There is 1 4 9 16 channel playback mode Playback It may vary due to different series Window Zoom Switch between self adaptive screen full screen when playback Partial When in one window full screen playback mode you can select any Enlargement zone to activate partial enlargement function HDD backup Backup function Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk USB burner and etc Support peripheral eSATA backup device Backup Mode 71 TY Support network download and save View monitor channel remotely DVR configuration through client end and web browser Upgrade via client or browser to realize remote maintenance sare eh View alarm information such as external alarm motion detection and 5 video loss via client Network Support network PTZ lens control control File download backup and playback Multiple devices share information via corresponding software such as professional surveillance software PSS Duplex transparent COM Network alarm input and output Bidirectional audio Motion Zone setup support 396 330 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection Detection Zones Various sensitivity levels Alarm can activate record or external alarm or screen message prompt Video Loss message in specified period Control Support analog alarm signal to specific alarm output channel 4 ch alarm 8 ch alarm 16 ch alarm 16 ch alarm
140. back Repeat When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Way Record Various search engines such as time type and channel search Playback Various fast play slow play speeds manual frame by frame playback Mode and reverse play mode Various File Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Switch Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto plays the next file in the current channel Multi There is 1 4 9 16 channel playback mode channel It may vary due to different series Playback Recording Mode Record and playback Ways Window Switch between self adaptive screen full screen when playback Zoom Partial When in one window full screen playback mode you can select any zone Enlargemen to activate partial enlargement function t Backup function HDD backup Backup Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk and Mode etc Support network download and save View monitor channel remotely DVR configuration through client end and web browser Upgrade via client or browser to realize remote maintenance View alarm information such as external alarm motion detection and video loss via client Support network PTZ lens control File download backup and playback Multiple devices share information via corresponding software such as professional surveil
141. back Si ral Support channel record quota setup Recording 1 to 120 minutes single record duration Default setup is 60 minutes Length Playback Repeat When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Way Record Various search engines such as time type and channel Search Playback Various fast play slow play speeds manual frame by frame playback and Mode reverse play mode Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Various File Switch Ways Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto plays the next file in the current channel channel It may vary due to different series Playback Zoom Partial When in one window full screen playback mode you can select any zone Enlargemen to activate partial enlargement function t Backup HDD backup function Backup Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk and Mode etc Support network download and save View monitor channel remotely DVR configuration through client end and web browser Upgrade via client or browser to realize remote maintenance View alarm information such as external alarm motion detection and video loss via client Support network PTZ lens control File download backup and playback Multiple devices share information via corresponding software such as professional surveillance software PSS Support n
142. back to the monitor interface to control speed dome WEB suce STR ANTI ARNET ACTI AT Channel PIZ Network Channel 1 Event Protocol Storage NONE Address 1 System gt General Baud Rate 9600 gt Account Data Bit 8 gt Display Stop Bit 1 gt Default Parity None gt Import amp Export gt Auto Maintain gt Upgrade gt RS232 Advanced Information Figure 7 82 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Parameter Function Select speed dome connected channel Select the corresponding dome protocol such as PELCOD Address Set corresponding dome address Default value is 1 Please note your setup here shall comply with your dome address otherwise you can not control the speed dome Select the dome baud rate Default setup is 9600 Rate Data Bit Default setup is 8 Please set according to the speed dome dial switch setup Stop bit Default setup is 1 Please set according to the speed dome dial switch setup Parity Default setup is none Please set according to the speed dome dial switch setup 7 8 6 Advanced 7 8 6 1 Text Overlay The card overlay function is for financial areas It includes Sniffer information analysis and title overlay function The Sniffer mode includes COM and network 7 8 6 1 1 COM Type The COM interface is shown as below See Figure 7 83 Protocol Please select from the dropdown list e Setting Click COM setting button the inter
143. bled this function Alarm System can upload the alarm signal to the centre Including alarm upload centre Send If you enabled this function System can send out an email to alert you Email when an alarm occurs Buzzer Check the box here to enable this function The buzzer beeps when an alarm occurs 7 8 4 Storage 7 8 4 1 Schedule 270 In this interfaces you can add or remove the schedule record setup See Figure 7 55 There are three record modes general auto motion detect and alarm There are six periods in one day Please make sure you have enabled the corresponding record mode in the Setup gt Storage gt Conditions You can view the current time period setup from the color bar e Green color stands for the general record snapshot e Yellow color stands for the motion detect record snapshot e Red color stands for the alarm record snapshot WEB svc NIN ATT ANTI ACTI AT Channel Schedule Network Channel 1 Pre record 4 Second 0 30 C Snapshot O Holiday Event Storage gt Storage gt Record System Advanced Information Figure 7 55 Setup eS Time Period 1 00 1724 Regular CL mo CJ Alarm CJ MD8Alarm Time Period 2 00 1724 C Regular O mo O Alarm CJ MD amp Alarm Time Period 3 00 24 Cl Regular O mo CJ Aarm LC MD amp Alarm Time Period 4 00 1724 CL Regular O mo O Alarm CJ MD8Alarm Time Period 5 00 E 24 O Regular CJ mo O Alarm CI MD amp Alarm Time Period 6 00 1724 CL
144. ccnncoccccnoncccconanacononnnnconananononancnnonnnnanonnns 102 2 2 11 ADD CIF TU SAS ia 103 2 2 12 AD SDI 10801 SUS Cle S aa 103 2 2 13 SO0F GRD DT SUL Ere S tia o 105 2 2 14 SOO 2ADDA SUSO 105 2 2 15 2HDD full D1 1 5U Entry level Series ooocooooccnonccccononccononcnoconananonanancconananoconananonnass 106 2 2 16 4HDD full D1 1 5U Entry level Series ooooconconccnooocccononcccnonanacononcnnononnnononananccnnnnanonnno 107 2 2 17 General 2 UU Snes di E 107 2 2 18 AD SDI 1080720 Sens isis 109 2 2 19 A A cena alienate 110 2 2 20 SALDO Full D2 ENT ACV Oli a ti 111 2 3 COMMECHION Sen osain a E at isle eee 112 2 95 Sman TUMIA TW SEES roca 112 rode aysiu General gL ie gt cp Tea ea Se ea 112 2038 SOOM TU SEES a aia 113 20 4 SAD SDITOSOP TU SEOs ad 114 2 3 5 2HDD 1U Entry level Series 2HDD full D1 1 5U Entry level Series oooooooooo 115 206 General SU Series os 116 Zot ADS DI SU SOMES ES 117 2 3 8 2HDD 2CIF 1 5U Series Simple1 5U SECS ennnen a Ei 118 2309 RABDDCIE SUSO Sia ti E sate wiag aco useacas nasa ener EA 119 2 3 10 I00RAAADO TES SS o ds 120 2 3 11 JGORR DETOU Ser E oy O N 121 2 3 12 4HDD Full D1 1 5U Entry level Series oooccoooccccnoocccononancconanacononananononnnanonanancconnnanonnno 122 2 3 13 Genera 2S CUS a E A AN 123 2 3 14 AD SD TOSOP 2U SEES ninio teria reads 124 11 2 3 15 g60R A mn PR Rn NTT none TCT ERT STC nT eo PRET TN 125 2 3 16 8HDD
145. ch as alarm motion detection and Touring schedule auto control PAL NTSC Real time monitor D1 704x576 704x480 Playback 1 2 ch D1 704x576 704x480 HD1 352x576 352x480 2CIF 704x288 704x240 CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 3 16 ch CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Support dual streams extra stream resolution QCIF 176x144 176x120 6 level image quality Adjustable Quality Compression Standard Resolution PAL NTSC Privacy Support one privacy mask of user defined size in full screen mask Support max 4 zones Image Poan Channel information time information and privacy mask zone TV Adjust Adjust TV output zone suitable to anamorphic video Channel Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding Lock normally Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized user seeing secret video Channel Channel name recording status screen lock status video loss status Information and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of display screen Color Hue brightness contrast saturation and gain setup for each channel Configuratio n J Hard Disk 1 built in SATA port Support 1 HDD 12 Hard Disk Video 56 900MByte h Hard disk Occupation Manual recording motion detection recording schedule recording and Recording alarm recording Mode Priority Manual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection Record and recording gt schedule recording play
146. ch may result in heavy load for the email server 204 D EMAIL SMTP Server MailServer Anonymous User Name Password Receiver Sender Title DYR ALERT Attachment a Encrypt Type NONE Event Interval 120 Health Enable Interval 60 Default Cancel Figure 5 30 Message Mail Test Error Figure 5 31 5 3 5 10 FIP You need to download or buy FTP service tool such as Ser U FTP SERVER to establish FTP service Please install Ser U FTP SERVER first From start gt program gt Serv U FTP Server gt Serv U Administator Now you can set user password and FTP folder Please note you need to grant write right to FTP upload user See Figure 5 32 205 E Serv U Administrator lt lt Local Server gt gt 10 x File Edit User View Window Help El Serv U Servers E B lt lt Local Server gt gt Account 41 General Dir Access p IP Access UL DL Rati 4 gt ye License 4 Settings Activity E fal Domains Y write IV Append zhonghy Hai e Settings Y a E Activity a AA Users Directories E w IV List Yp Grops V Create V Remove if sorirectories HV Inherit Add Delete Edit Y Apply wy Restore Down 0 000 kBps Up 0 000 kBps 3 0f 32767 Sockets 0 0 Users DXfers _ lt lt Local Server gt gt System Administrator Figure 5 32 You can use a PC or FTP login tool to t
147. creen lock status video loss status Information and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of display screen Audio 4 ch 200 2000mv 8 ch 200 2000mv 16 ch 200 2000mv 10KQ BNG 10KQ BNC 10KQ BNC Audio 1 ch audio output 200 3000mv SKO BNC Output Bidirectional 1 ch audio talk input 200 3000mv 10K 2 BNC Audio 1 ch audio talk output 200 3000mv 5K 2 BNC Hard disk 8 built in SATA port Support 8 HDDs cc Occupation Video 56 3600MByte h Record and playback Manual recording motion detection recording schedule recording and Recording alarm recording Mode Priority Manual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection recording gt schedule recording 1 to 120 minutes single record duration Default setup is 60 minutes Length 74 Playback Repeat Way When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Record Various search engines such as time type and channel search Playback Various fast play slow play speeds manual frame by frame playback Mode and reverse play mode Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Various File Switch Ways Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto plays the next file in the current channel Multi There is 1 4 channel There is 1 4 channel There is 1 4 channel Playback Zoom Partial When in one window full sc
148. d backup and playback Multiple devices share information via corresponding software such as professional surveillance software PSS Duplex transparent COM Network Function Network control Network alarm input and output Support network multiple window preview function Bidirectional audio Motion Zone setup support 396 330 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection Motion Detection Zones Detection and Alarm Various sensitivity levels Alarm can activate record or external alarm or screen message prompt Video Loss message in specified period Control Support analog alarm signal to specific alarm output channel 4 ch alarm input You 8 ch alarm input You 16 ch alarm input can set normal open can set normal open or You can set or normal close type to normal close type to normal open or select the alarm select the alarm type gt normal close type type to select the alarm type Alarm Output 3 channel relay output Alarm Relay 30V DC 2A 125VAC 1A activation alarm USB Interface 2 USB 2 0 ports Interface Network 1 RJ45 10M 100M 1000M self adaptable Ethernet port connection PTZ control port RSE Support various PTZ control protocols RS232 Ordinary COM Debug keyboard connection and transparent serial port COM input and output via network Hard Disk Display HDD current status Information Data Stream Data stream statistics for each channel in wave mode Statistics Alarm In
149. d privacy mask zone TV Adjust Adjust TV output zone suitable to anamorphic video Channel Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding Lock normally Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized user seeing secret video Bidirectional 1 ch audio talk input 200 3000mv 10K 2 BNC Audio Hard Disk 4 built in SATA port Support 4 HDDs Hard Disk Audio PCM 28 8MByte h ar ASK Occupation Video 56 900MByte h Manual recording motion detection recording schedule recording and Recording alarm recording Mode Priority Manual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection recording gt schedule recording Storage Mode Support channel record quota setup Recording 1 to 120 minutes single record duration Default setup is 60 minutes Length Playback Repeat When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Way Various search engines such as time type and channel Search Playback Various fast play slow play speeds manual frame by frame playback Mode and reverse play mode Record and playback Various File Switch Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Ways Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto plays the next file in the current channel Multi There is 1 4 9 16 channel playback mode Playback Zoom Partial When in one window full screen playback mo
150. d to hold the metal end and then the other hand insert the pen to the L port of the socket See the following figure If the multimeter shows 120 then you can see current live cable connection is standard If the value is less than 60 then you can see current live cable connection is not proper or it is not the live cable at all For N Neutral cable Turn the digital multimeter to 750V AC use your one hand to hold the metal end and then the other hand insert the pen to the N port of the socket See the following figure If the multimeter shows 0 then you can see current N cable connection is standard If the value is more than 10 then you can see there Is inductive current and the neutral cable connection is not proper If the value is 120 then you can know misconnected the neutral cable to the live cable 316 Distributed by Ecctv 153 rue Michel Carr 95100 Argenteuil Appendix H Toxic or Hazardous Materials or Elements Component NN Sheet Metal Case Plastic Parts Panel Fastener o of o o o o Wire and Cable Ac Adapter Packing Material Accessories o e o o o o Note O Indicates that the concentration of the hazardous substance in all homogeneous materials in the parts is below the relevant threshold of the SJ T11363 2006 standard X Indicates that the concentration of the hazardous substance of at least one of all homogeneous materials in the parts is above the relevant threshold o
151. de you can select any zone t Backup HDD backup function Back Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk USB vie burner and etc Support peripheral eSATA Does not support disk array enclosure Support network download and save o Network View monitor channel remotely 51 control DVR configuration through client end and web browser Upgrade via client or browser to realize remote maintenance video loss via client Multiple devices share information via corresponding software such as professional surveillance software PSS Duplex transparent COM Network alarm input and output Support network multiple window preview function Bidirectional audio Network Function Motion Detection Zone setup support 396 330 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection zones Motion Detection and Alarm Various sensitivity levels Alarm can activate record or external alarm or screen message prompt Video Loss Alarm can activate external alarm or screen message prompt External Support record activation function or activate external alarm or screen Alarm message in specified period Manual Enable or disable alarm input channel Alarm Support analog alarm signal to specific alarm output channel Control 4 ch alarm input You 8 ch alarm input You 16 ch alarm input can set normal open or can set normal open or You can set normal close type to normal close type to normal open or Alarm In
152. dent zone factory warehouse resources and water conservancy 1 2 Features This series product has the following features eo Real time monitor lt has analog output port VGA port and HDMI port You can use monitor or displayer to realize surveillance function System supports TV VGA HDMI output at the same time eo Storage function Special data format to guarantee data security and can avoid vicious data modification e Compression format Support multiple channel audio and video An independent hardware decodes the audio and video signal from each channel to maintain video and audio synchronization eo Backup function Support backup operation via USB port such as flash disk portable HDD burner Client end user can download the file to local HDD to backup via network e Record playback function Support each channel real time record independently and at the same time it can support search forward play network monitor record search download and etc Support various playback modes slow play fast play backward play and frame by frame play Support time title overlay so that you can view event accurate occurred time Support specified zone enlargement eo Network operation Support network remote real time monitor remote record search and remote PTZ control eo Alarm activation function Several relay alarm outputs to realize alarm activation and on site light control The alarm input port and output has the protection
153. des the general DDNS the quick DDNS works with the device from the manufacturer so that it can add the extension function 2 Function Introduction The quick DDNS client has the same function as other DDNS client end It realizes the bonding of the domain name and the IP address Right now current DDNS server is for our own devices only You need to refresh the bonding relationship of the domain and the IP regularly There is no user name password or the ID registration on the server At the same time each device has a default domain name Generated by MAC address for your option You can also use customized valid domain name has not registered 3 Operation Before you use Quick DDNS you need to enable this service and set proper server address port value and domain name O Server address www quickddns com Portnumber 80 e Domainname There are two modes Default domain name and customized domain name Except default domain name registration you can also use customized domain name You can input your self defined domain name After successful registration you can use domain name to login installed of the device IP User name It is optional You can input your commonly used email address Important e Do not register frequently The interval between two registrations shall be more than 60 seconds Too many registration requests may result in server attack Oo System may take back the domain name that is idle for one year
154. dification a Administrator can modify other user s password Authenticati oe Account lock strategy o Five times login failure in thirty minutes may result in account lock Upgrade Web browser client end and update tool Password login protection to guarantee safety Version Password User friendly interface when login Provide the following options Logout Login Logout and Shutdown shutdown restart Right authentication when shut down to make sure only those proper people can turn off DVR DC 12V Power Consumptio General n Working OC 55 C Temperatur e Working 10 90 Humidity Air 86kpa 106kpa Pressure 325 W x242 D x55mm H Weight 1 25KG KG Exclude HDD Installation Desktop installation Mode 1 3 6 General Full D1 Mini 1U Series 17 Main High performance industrial embedded micro controller System Processor Embedded LINUX System Multiplex operations Multiple channel record multiple channel playback Resources and network operation simultaneously User friendly graphical user interface Devices Method optional Function USB mouse to switch screen Compression Video Standard H 264 n Audio G711A G711U PCM n 4 CH composite video 8 CH composite video 16 CH composite Viera inoui input NTSC PAL input NTSC PAL video input p BNC 1 0Vp p 750 BNC 1 0Vp p 750 NTSC PAL BNC 1 0Vp p 750 1 ch PAL NTSC BNC 1 0VP P 750 composi
155. dify Password Figure 5 54 5 5 5 1 Modify Password Click password button the interface is shown as in Figure 5 55 Here you can modify account password Please select the account from the dropdown list input the old password and then input the new password twice Click the Save button to confirm current modification For the users of user account right it can modify password of other users 888888 Cancel Figure 5 55 5 5 5 2 Add Modify Group Click add group button the interface is shown as below See Figure 5 56 Here you can input group name and then input some memo information if necessary There are total 60 rights such as control panel shut down real time monitor playback record record file backup PTZ user account system information view alarm input output setup system setup log view clear log upgrade system control device and etc The modify group interface is similar to the Figure 5 56 220 Control Panel Shutdown the device Monitor Monitor_CHO1 Monitor _CH02 Monitor CH03 Monitor_CH04 Monitor CH05 Monitor CH06 Monitor CHO OMAHA A w N a KAI IS MT ESF TSTS NSS E O Cancel Figure 5 56 5 5 5 3 Add Modify User Click add user button the interface is shown as in Figure 5 57 Please input the user name password user MAC address and select the group it belongs to from the dropdown list Then you can check the corresponding rights for current user For convenient us
156. down list The main stream supports D1 HD1 2CIF CIF QCIF and the extra stream supports CIF QCIF Please note the option may vary due to different series Note a For HD SDI series the main code stream types are 1080P 720P D1 HD1 2CIF CIF QCIF Extra stream resolution supports D1 CIF QCIF b For 960H series the main code stream types are 960H D1 HD1 2CIF CIF QCIF Extra stream resolution supports 960H D1 HD1 2CIF CIF QCIF Frame Rate PAL 1 25f s NTSC 1 30f s Note For the 16 channel series product of the HD SDI 1080P 1 5U series product and the HD SDI 1080P 2U series product when the main stream resolution is 1080P 720P the frame rate of the 1 5 9 13 channel max supports 25f s or 30f s and the frame rate of the rest channels support 12f s or 15f s The extras stream of the HD SDI 1080P 1 5U series product and the HD SDI 1080P 2U series product support D1 6fps or 71 S Bit Rate Main stream You can set bit rate here to change video quality The large the bit rate is the better the quality is Please refer to recommend bit rate for the detailed information Extra stream In CBR the bit rate here is the max value In dynamic video system needs to low frame rate or video quality to guarantee the value The value is null in VBR mode Reference bit Recommended bit rate value according to the resolution and rate frame rate you have set Frame Here you can set the P frame amount between two frames The value ra
157. duced voltage Please unplug the power cable before you remove the audio video signal cable RS232 or RS485 cable e Do not connect the TV to the local video output port VOUT It may result in video output circuit e Always shut down the device properly Please use the shutdown function in the menu or you can press the power button in the rear pane for at least three seconds to shut down the device Otherwise it may result in HDD malfunction Please make sure the device is away from the direct sunlight or other heating sources Please keep the sound ventilation eo Please check and maintain the device regularly 300 Appendix A HDD Capacity Calculation Calculate total capacity needed by each DVR according to video recording video recording type and video file storage time Step 1 According to Formula 1 to calculate storage capacity g that is the capacity of each channel needed for each hour unit Mbyte q d 8x3600 1024 1 In the formula d means the bit rate unit Kbit s Step 2 After video time requirement is confirmed according to Formula 2 to calculate the storage capacity m which is storage of each channel needed unit Mbyte m q x h xD 2 l In the formula h means the recording time for each day hour D means number of days for which the video shall be kept Step 3 According to Formula 3 to calculate total capacity accumulation q that is needed for all channels in the DVR du
158. e type and channel Playback Various fast play slow play speeds manual frame by frame playback Mode and reverse play mode Various File Switch Ways Record and Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto plays the next file in the current channel Multi channel There is 1 4 9 16 channel playback mode Playback It may vary due to different series Switch between self adaptive screen full screen when playback Partial When in one window full screen playback mode you can select any Enlargement zone to activate partial enlargement function Backup HDD backup function Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk Backup Mode USB burner and etc Support peripheral eSATA backup device Support network download and save View monitor channel remotely DVR configuration through client end and web browser Upgrade via client or browser to realize remote maintenance ala View alarm information such as external alarm motion detection and i video loss via client Support network PTZ lens control Network File download backup and playback control Multiple devices share information via corresponding software such as professional surveillance software PSS Duplex transparent COM Network alarm input and output Bidirectional audio Su
159. e IP refers to host IP address that sends out information usually it is the device host Destination IP refers to other systems that receive information Usually you do not need to set source port and target port There are total four groups IP The record channel applies to one group optional only Six frame ID groups verification can guarantee information validity and legal 287 10 10 4 122 IICA File Edit View Favorites Tools Help yy Favorites UY CONFIG WEB sevice A ANETO ART ACT Channel Text Overlay Network Event Text Overlay Storage Sniffer Group Sniffer Group1 System y Source IP Address 0 0 Source Port Advanced Destination IP Address 0 Destination Port Record Channel 14 5 6 8 Information Key Words 1 Key Words2 Key Words3 Key Words4 Key Words5 Key Words6 A E Internet fa 100 Figure 7 85 Click Data button you can set offset value length title according to your communication protocol and data package 7 8 7 Information 7 8 7 1 Version The version interface is shown as in Figure 7 86 Here you can view system hardware features software version release date and etc Please note the following information is for reference only Channel Version Network Record Channel Event Alarm In Storage Alarm Out System Advanced SN YPA1DQ2400115 Information System Version 2 616 0000 0 Build Date 2013 01 05 gt Log gt Online User Figure 7 86 7
160. e Web browser client end and update tool Password login protection to guarantee safety User friendly interface when login Provide the following options Logout Login Logout and Shutdown shutdown restart Right authentication when shut down to make sure only those proper people can turn off DVR DC 12V Power General i EARE E lt 25W With adapter exclude HDD Working OC 755 e Temperatur e Working 10 90 Humidity Air 86kpa 106kpa Pressure 325 W x242 D x55mm H Weight 1 25KG Exclude HDD Installation Desktop installation Mode 1 3 9 General 1U Series Main High performance industrial embedded micro controller System Processor Resources and network operation simultaneously Devices Method optional Function USB mouse to switch screen Compression Video Standard Compressio H 264 n Audio Compressio G 711A n 4 CH composite video 8 CH composite video 16 CH composite Video Input input NTSC PAL input NTSC PAL video input BNC 1 0Vp p 750 BNC 1 0Vp p 750 NTSC PAL BNC 1 0Vp p 750 1 ch PAL NTSC BNC 1 0VP P 750 composite video signal output Video monitor Video 1 ch VGA output 1 ch HDMI output 1 ch matrix output Support TV VGA HDMI video output at the same time Video Standard Support PAL NTSC Output 2 Real time Mode PAL 1f s to 25f s per channel and NTSC 1f s to 30f s Record per channel Speed Partition Touring schedule auto contro
161. e can modify the password of other users 278 xplorer provided by Yahoo 10 10 4 122 iy te gt lt e File Edit View Favorites Tools Help yy Favorites UY CONFIG WEB service NINA ANTI ARTO ACT Channel Network Event Storage System gt General Display Default Import amp Export Auto Maintain Upgrade RS232 PTZ Advanced Information J Done but with errors on page Account User Name Test User Name Test Reuseable Memo Group admin User MAC Authority O Modify Password Control Panel Real time MonitorShannel0 Real time MonitorChanneld Mcontrol Panel PlaybackChannel04 Mishutdown MiReal time Monitor Add User MiReal time MonitorChannel01 MiReal time MonitorChannel02 Authority Select All Figure 7 69 7 8 5 2 2 Group The group management interface can add remove group modify group password and etc The interface is shown as in Figure 7 70 WEB suc INTA ATT AUTO ACT ANT Channel Network Event Storage System gt General Display Default Import amp Export Auto Maintain Upgrade RS232 PTZ Advanced Information Account User user group Authority Control Panel Shutdown Real time Monitor Real time MonitorChannel01 Real time MonitorChannel03 Real time MonitorChannel04 Real time MonitorChanneld5 Real time MonitorChannel06 Real time MonitorChannel08 Playback PlaybackChannel01 PlaybackChannel02 PlaybackChannel04 PlaybackChannel05 PlaybackChannel06 P
162. e click the set button The interface is shown as below See Figure 4 46 Here you can set the following items o Preset e Tour o Pattern e Border PAN TILT ZOOM Function Preset Preset Patrol No l0 Tour Pattern Set Border Del Preset Figure 4 46 In _ Figure 4 43 click page switch button the interface is shown as in Figure 4 47 Here you can activate the following functions Preset Tour Pattern Auto scan Auto pan Flip Reset Page switch 181 W __PANITILT ZOOM X No 0 Preset Pattern Tour AutoScan AutoPan Flip Reset Page Switch Figure 4 47 Note Preset tour and pattern all need the value to be the control parameter You can define it as you require e You need to refer to your speed dome user s manual for Aux definition In some cases it can be used for special process The following setups are usually operated in the Figure 4 43 Figure 4 46 and Figure 4 47 4 9 1Preset Setup In Figure 4 43 use eight direction arrows to adjust camera to the proper position In Figure 4 46 click preset button and input preset number The interface is shown as in Figure 4 48 Now you can add this preset to one tour W PANTILTIZOOM x Function Preset Preset Patrol No 0 Tour Pattern Set Border Del Preset Figure 4 48 4 9 2 Activate Preset In Figure 4 47 please input preset number in the No blank and click preset button 4 9 3 Patrol setup Tour Setup In Figure
163. e connecting one DVR and one other device please use a relay to separate them 2 Alarm output The alarm output port should not be connected to high power load directly It shall be less than 1A to avoid high current which may result in relay damage Please use the co contactor to realize the connection between the alarm output port and the load 3 How to connect PTZ decoder 137 a Ensure the decoder has the same grounding with DVR otherwise you may not control the PTZ Shielded twisted wire is recommended and the shielded layer is used to connect to the grounding b Avoid high voltage Ensure proper wiring and some thunder protection measures c For too long signal wires 1200 should be parallel connected between A B lines on the far end to reduce reflection and guarantee the signal quality d 485 A B of DVR cannot parallel connect with 485 port of other device e The voltage between of A B lines of the decoder should be less than 5v 4 Please make sure the front end device has soundly earthed Improper grounding may result in chip damage 3 8 1 Alarm Input and Output Details You can refer to the following sheet for alarm input and output information Important Please refer to the specifications for the alarm input and output channel amount Do not merely count the alarm input and out channel amount according to the ports on the rear panel 3 8 1 1 General 1U Series The 4 8 channel series product interface is
164. e front panel is shown as below See Figure 2 1 Figure 2 1 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information fu Name Funston Network status indicator The red light becomes on when the network light connection is abnormal Power indicator light The red light becomes on when the power connection is OK HDD status indictor light The red light becomes on when HDD is abnormal 2 1 2 Mini 1U The front panel is shown as below See Figure 2 2 Figure 2 2 Please refer to the following sheet for front panel button information Name Icon Function 84 Power button press this button for three seconds to boot up Power button Q or shut down DVR Activate current control modify setup and then move up and down uP A Y Down Increase decrease numeral Assistant function such as PTZ menu Left Right Go to previous menu or cancel current operation ESC ESC When playback click it to restore real time monitor mode Confirm current operation Enter ENTER Slow play j Shift current activated control When playback click these buttons to control playback bar Go to default button Go to menu Multiple slow play speeds or normal playback One window monitor mode click this button to display assistant function PTZ control and image color Backspace function in numeral control or text control press it for 1 5seconds to delete the previous character before
165. e in low voltage 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 There are three groups of normal open activation output on off button 3 8 1 5 Full D1 1 5U and Simple 1 5U Series The 1 5U series product interface is shown as in Figure 3 6 140 5 Es ED E I ES Uo OS ods Ls CS 2S LS eS e 9 10 11 12 13 1415 16 Yes CS ES ES EN Cees OS CSE AB cable gt connection 5 CTRL m 12V NO C NC 12V cee 4 ody Figure 3 6 You can refer to the following sheet and Figure 3 6 for alarm input and output information In the first line from ALARM 1 to ALARM 16 The alarm becomes active in low voltage the left to the right 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 In the second line The first four are four groups of normal open activation output from the left to the on off button right NO5 C5 NC5 is a group of NO NC activation output on off button NO1 C1 NO2 C2 NO3 C3 NO4 C4 NO5 C5 NC5 CTRL 12V Control power output The power output is off when the alarm is canceled 12V lt is rated power output Earth cable 485 A B 485 communication port They are used to control devices such as PTZ Please parallel connect 120TQ between A B cables if there are too many PTZ decoders 3 8 1 6 HD SDI 1080P 1 5U Series The HD SDI 1080P 1 5U series product interface is shown as in Figure 3 12344567 amp 9 10
166. e point ground and multiple point ground For example the power in the system needs to use the one point ground mode while the radio frequency signal requires the multiple point ground So you can use the following figure to earth For the direct current DC the capacitance is open circuit and the circuit is one point ground For the radio frequency signal the capacitance is conducive and the circuit adopts multiple point ground When connecting devices of huge size the device physical dimension and connection cable is big comparing with the wave path of existed interference then there are possibility of interference when the current goes through the chassis and cable In this situation the interference circuit path usually lies in the system ground circuit When considering the earthing you need to think about two aspects The first is the system compatibility and the other is the external interference coupling into the earth circuit which results in system error For the external interference is not regular it is not easy to resolve 3 Thunder proof ground method in the monitor system e The monitor system shall have sound thunder proof earthing to guarantee personnel safety and device safety e The monitor system working ground resistance shall be less than 10 The thunder proof ground shall adopt the special ground cable from the monitor control room to the ground object The ground cable adopts copper insulation cable or wire and
167. e refer to Figure 2 50 for connection sample The following figure is based on the 8 channel series product 121 A w w Video Input p Audio Output n i Audio Input Hi g Video Output p f a Alarm Input Alarm Output Power On Off RS232 Port Button Power Input Port USB Port RS485 PTZ Control r 1 k Y Bidirectional Talk Input Video SPOT Output VGA Output HDMI Output Network Switch i a ha e Network User Network User Network User Network Keyboard Figure 2 50 2 3 12 4HDD Full D1 1 5U Entry level Series Please refer to Figure 2 51 for connection sample 122 Audio Krew Input Alarm Output Video a Input Audio Input T Output y Bidirectional Talk Input Power Button Video Output Power Input Fan RS232 Port eSATA Port Port l D 7 ra w R5485 PTZ Control Video SPOT Output VGA Output HDMI Output Network Switch Network User Network User Network User Network Keyboard Pal Figure 2 51 2 3 13 General 2U series Please refer to Figure 2 52 for connection sample The following figure is based on the 16 channel series product 123 pa Ss ie 3 ry 8 Og 2 QJM ap os A j 13 2 rehi j l e PTZ Control m Video Inout e Alarm Input Alarm Output ae i Audio Output Bidirectional Talk Input Bidirectional i e u pu Talk Output Loop Output Power Switch Power Input VGA Output HDMI Output eSATA U
168. e times login failure in thirty minutes may result in account lock Upgrade Web browser client end and update tool Password login protection to guarantee safety User friendly interface when login Provide the following options Logout shutdown restart Right authentication when shut down to make sure only those proper people can turn off DVR DC 12V Login Logout and Shutdown z Power enera Seer aa lt 25W With adapter exclude HDD Working OC 55 C Temperatur e Working 10 90 Humidity Air 86kpa 106kpa Pressure SMART 1U case 270 W x205 D x41mm H Weight 1 0 1 5KG Exclude HDD Installation Desktop installation Mode 1 3 3 Enhanced 1HDD Full D1 Smart 1U Series Main High performance industrial embedded micro controller System Processor Embedded LINUX User friendly graphical user interface Input Front panel USB mouse remote control Devices System Multiplex operations Multiple channel record multiple channel playback Resources and network operation simultaneously Input Arabic number English character donation and extension Chinese Method optional D a Function USB mouse to switch screen Compression Video Standard Compressio H 264 n Audio G711A G711U PCM n 4 CH composite video 8 CH composite video 16 CH composite Video Input input NTSC PAL input NTSC PAL video input BNC 1 0Vp p 750 BNC 1 0Vp p 750 NTSC PAL BNC 1 0Vp p 750 1 ch
169. eb the Web can automatically get multiple cast address and add it to the multiple cast groups You can enable real time monitor function to view the view Please note multiple cast function applies to special series only 5 3 5 5 PPPoE PPPoE interface is shown as in Figure 5 21 Input PPPoE name and PPPoE password you get from your ISP Internet service provider Click save button you need to restart to activate your configuration After rebooting DVR will connect to internet automatically The IP in the PPPoE is the DVR dynamic value You can access this IP to visit the unit 198 User Name Password IP Address Default Cancel Figure 5 21 5 3 5 6 DDNS Setup DDNS setup interface is shown as in Figure 5 22 You need a PC of fixed IP in the internet and there is the DDNS software running in this PC In other words this PC is a DNS domain name server In network DDNS please select DDNS type and highlight enable item Them please input your PPPoE name you get from you IPS and server IP PC with DDNS Click save button and then reboot system Click save button system prompts for rebooting to get all setup activated After rebooting open lE and input as below htip DDNS server IP virtual directory name webtest htm e g http 10 6 2 85 DVR _DDNS webtest htm Now you can open DDNSServer web search page 55 DDNS DDNS Type Quick DDNS v Enable server IP www quickddns com Pont
170. edded micro controller System Processor Embedded LINUX system Multiplex operations Multiple channel record multiple channel Resources playback and network operation simultaneously User friendly graphical user interface Input Devices Front panel USB mouse remote control Arabic number English character donation and extension Chinese Input Method optional 30 Compression Standard nds Video monitor Compression S711A G711U POM Compression Video Input Video Output Video Standard H 264 Shortcut Copy paste operation USB mouse right key shortcut menu double Function click USB mouse to switch screen 4 CH composite 8 CH composite video 16 CH composite video input input NTSC PAL video input NTSC PAL BNC BNC 1 0VBp p 8750 NTSC PAL BNC 1 0VBp pP 8750 1 0VBp pP 8750 1 ch PAL NTSC BNC 1 0VP P 75Q composite video signal output 1 ch VGA output 1 ch HDMI output 1 ch matrix output Support TV VGA HDMI video output at the same time Support PAL NTSC Real time Mode PAL 1f s to 25f s per channel and NTSC 1f s to 30f s Record Speed per channel cheat A Video Partition l l windows Optional Monitor Support monitor tour functions such as alarm motion detection and Touring schedule auto control Resolution PAL NTSC PAL 700TVL 50f s NTSC 700TVL 60f s Real time monitor 960H 960 x576 960x480 Playback channel 1 16 960 x576 960x480 D1
171. el Name Snapshot CPictureDownload Figure 7 22 Here you can set channel name See Figure 7 23 WEB serve SON ANTI ARTO ANETO ANTE Channel Name Channel gt Video Property Channel 1 gt Video amp Audio Channel 5 Network Event Storage System Advanced Information CAM 1 Channel 2 CAM 2 Channel 3 CAM 3 Channel 4 CAM 4 CAM 5 Channel 6 CAM 6 Channel 7 CAM 7 Channel 8 CAM 8 Figure 7 23 251 7 8 2 Network 7 8 2 1 TCP IP The TCP IP interface is shown as in Figure 7 24 WEB service SA T ANUN ACTA ATT Channel TCP IP Network Mode Static O DHCP MAC Address gt Connection MTU 1500 gt WIFI gt 36 IP Version IPv4 gt PPPoE IP Address gt DDNS Subnet Mask gt IP Filter Default Gateway gt Email Preferred DNS Server gt UPnP Alternate DNS Server gt SNMP O LAN Download gt Multicast gt Alarm Centre Save Event Storage System Advanced Information Figure 7 24 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Parameter There are two modes static mode and the DHCP mode The IP submask gateway are null when you select the DHCP mode to auto search the IP If you select the static mode you need to set the IP submask gateway manually If you select the DHCP mode you can view the IP submask gateway from the DHCP If you switch from the DHCP mode to the static mode you need to reset the IP parameters Besides IP submask gateway
172. el Snapshot Overlay gt Conditions Channel 1 2013 01 07 00 33 26 gt Channel Name ea Network Event Channel Display Storage System Advanced Y Time Display Information Figure 7 21 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information 250 Parameter Cover area Privacy mask Time Title Channel Title 7 8 1 2 4 Path Check Preview or Monitor first Click Set button you can privacy mask the specified video in the preview or monitor video System max supports 4 privacy mask zones You can enable this function so that system overlays time information in video window You can use the mouse to drag the time title position You can view time title on the live video of the WEB or the playback video You can enable this function so that system overlays channel information in video window You can use the mouse to drag the channel title position You can view channel title on the live video of the WEB or the playback video The storage path interface is shown as in Figure 7 22 Here you can set snap image saved path e in the preview interface and the record storage path C RecordDownload in the preview interface The default setup is C PictureDownload and Please click the Save button to save current setup Channel gt Conditions Snap Path Record Path C RecordDownload gt Channel Name Network Event Storage System Advanced Information 7 8 1 3 Chann
173. el playback mode Playback Zoom Partial When in one window full screen playback mode you can select any zone t Backup HDD backup function Backup Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk USB Mode burner and etc Support network download and save View monitor channel remotely DVR configuration through client end and web browser Upgrade via client or browser to realize remote maintenance View alarm information such as external alarm motion detection and video loss via client Support network PTZ lens control File download backup and playback Multiple devices share information via corresponding software such as professional surveillance software PSS Duplex transparent COM Network alarm input and output Support network multiple window preview function Bidirectional audio Zone setup support 396 330 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection zones Network Function Network control Motion Motion Detection Detection and Alarm Various sensitivity levels Alarm can activate record or external alarm or screen message prompt Video Loss Alarm can activate external alarm or screen message prompt Support record activation function or activate external alarm or screen Alarm message in specified period Manual Enable or disable alarm input channel Alarm Support analog alarm signal to specific alarm output channel Control N 3 channel relay output including one controllable DC
174. emotely DVR configuration through client end and web browser Network Upgrade via client or browser to realize remote maintenance control View alarm information such as external alarm motion detection and video loss via client Support network PTZ lens control 58 File download backup and playback Multiple devices share information via corresponding software such as professional surveillance software PSS Duplex transparent COM Network alarm input and output Support network multiple window preview function Bidirectional audio Motion Zone setup support 396 330 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection Detection zones Motion Detection and Alarm Various sensitivity levels Alarm can activate record or external alarm or screen message prompt Video Loss Alarm can activate external alarm or screen message prompt External Support record activation function or activate external alarm or screen Alarm message in specified period Manual Enable or disable alarm input channel Alarm Support analog alarm signal to specific alarm output channel Control Alarm Input 16 ch alarm input You can set normal open or normal close type to select the alarm type Alarm 3 channel relay output including one controllable DC 12V output port Output Alarm Relay 30V DC 1A 125V AC 0 5A activation alarm USB 2 USB 2 0 ports Interface Interface Network 1 RJ45 10M 100M 1000M self adaptable Ethernet port connection PT
175. end and update tool Password login protection to guarantee safety User friendly interface when login Provide the following options Logout shutdown restart Right authentication when shut down to make sure only those proper people can turn off DVR DC 12V Power General Consumptio Parameter Login Logout and Shutdown lt 25W With adapter exclude HDD n Working OC 750 Temperatur e Working 10 90 Humidity Pressure SMART 1U case 205 W x205 D x41mm H SMART 1U case Dimension 270 W x205 D x41mm H Weight 1 0 1 5KG Exclude HDD Installation Desktop installation Mode 1 3 2 1HDD 2CIF Smart 1U Series Main High performance industrial embedded micro controller System Processor Embedded LINUX System Multiplex operations Multiple channel record multiple channel playback Resources and network operation simultaneously User friendly graphical user interface Devices Method optional Shortcut Copy paste operation USB mouse right key shortcut menu double click Function USB mouse to switch screen Compression Standard Video Compressio H 264 n Audio Compressio G711A G711U PCM Video Input 16 CH composite video input NTSC PAL BNC 1 0Vp p 750 1 ch PAL NTSC BNC 1 0VP P 75Q composite video signal output Video 1 ch VGA output Output Support TV VGA video output at the same time enor Stacdarq Support PAL NTSC Real time Mode PAL 1f s to 25f
176. end and web browser Upgrade via client or browser to realize remote maintenance View alarm information such as external alarm motion detection and video loss via client Support network PTZ lens control File download backup and playback Multiple devices share information via corresponding software such as professional surveillance software PSS Duplex transparent COM Network alarm input and output Bidirectional audio Network Function Network control Motion Detection Zone setup support 396 330 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection Motion zones Detection and Alarm Various sensitivity levels Alarm can activate record or external alarm or screen message prompt Video Loss Alarm message in specified period Manual Enable or disable alarm input channel Alarm Support analog alarm signal to specific alarm output channel Control 4 ch alarm input You 8 ch alarm input You 16 ch alarm input can set normal open can set normal open You can set normal Alarm Input or normal close type to or normal close type to open or normal close select the alarm select the alarm type to select the type type alarm type Output Alarm Relay 30V DC 2A 125V AC 1A activation alarm Interface Interface connection Support various PTZ control protocols RS232 Ordinary COM Debug keyboard connection and transparent serial port COM input and output via network System Hard Disk Display HDD current st
177. ength title according to your communication protocol and data package 224 startPosition Length Title Field1 5 10 card Field2 1 0 Field3 1 0 Field4 1 0 Cancel Figure 5 64 5 5 10 Config Backup The configuration file backup interface is shown as below See Figure 5 65 This function allows you to import export system configuration You can use this function when there are several devices need the same setup e Export Please connect the peripheral device first and then go to the following interface Click Export button you can see there is a corresponding Config_Time folder Double click the folder you can view some backup files e Import Here you can import the configuration files from the peripheral device to current device You need to select a folder first You can see a dialogue box asking you to select a folder if you are selecting a file System pops up a dialogue box if there is no configuration file under current folder After successfully import system needs to reboot to activate new setup e Format Click Format button system pops up a dialogue box for you to confirm current operation System begins format process after you click the OK button Note e System can not open config backup interface again if there is backup operation in the process System refreshes device when you go to the config backup every time and set current directory as the root directory of the peripheral device e f yo
178. er management usually we recommend the general user right is lower than the admin account The modify user interface is similar to Figure 5 57 i _ Add User User Reuseable Password Confirm Memo User MAC Group 49 Control Panel Shutdown the Device Monitor Monitor _CH01 Monitor CH02 Monitor _CH03 Monitor_CH04 Monitor _CH05 Monitor CH06 p Page Down fr Enable Disable Authority 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Save Cancel Figure 5 57 When you create a new user you can input the corresponding MAC address of current user If you leave this item in blank any MAC address user can share this user account to login Please note system needs to check the validity of MAC Only the 12 digit 0 f format address can pass the validity verification System only saves small character even you input capitalized one You can see the corresponding prompt if there is any illegal input 721 5 5 6 Auto Maintenance Here you can set auto reboot time and auto delete old files setup You can set to delete the files for the specified days See Figure 5 58 You can select proper setup from dropdown list After all the setups please click save button system goes back to the previous menu Every Tuesday al Custom Day s Ago Cancel Figure 5 58 5 5 7 TV Adjust Here is for you to adjust TV output setup See Figure 5 59 Please drag slide bar to adjust each item After all the setups please click OK button system goes b
179. er seeing secret video Channel Channel name recording status screen lock status video loss status Information and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of display screen Color Hue brightness contrast saturation and gain setup for each channel Configuratio n Audio 1 ch audio output 200 3000mv 5KO RCA Reuse the first audio input channel Audio Reuse audio output channel 1 built in SATA port Support 1 HDD Hard Disk Audio PCM 28 8MByte h Manual recording motion detection recording schedule recording and alarm recording Priority Manual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection recording gt schedule recording Storage Mode Support channel record quota setup Recording 1 to 120 minutes single record duration Default setup is 60 minutes Length Playback Repeat When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Way Record Various search engines such as time type and channel search Playback Various fast play slow play speeds manual frame by frame playback and Mode reverse play mode Various File Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto plays the Recording Mode Record and playback next file in the current channel Multi There is 1 4 9 16 channel playback mode channel It may vary due to di
180. er the backup you can see there is a folder named Log_time on the backup path Double click the folder you can see the log file Details Click the Details button or double click the log item you can view the detailed information See Figure 5 70 Here you can use rolling bar to view information or you can use Page up Page down to view other log information For the alarm event log such as video loss you can click the Playback button at the bottom right corner to playback LOG Type All v Start Time 2013 01 06 00 00 00 End Time 2013 01 07 00 00 00 Details Search _ 61 Logtime Event _ _ _ _ _ 25 2013 01 06 21 30 05 Reboot with Flag 0x01 26 2013 01 06 21 30 05 lt Video Loss 1 gt 27 2013 01 06 21 30 05 lt Video Loss 2 gt 29 2013 01 06 21 30 05 lt Video Loss 4 gt 30 2013 01 06 21 30 05 lt Video Loss 5 gt 31 2013 01 06 21 30 05 lt Video Loss 6 gt 32 2013 01 06 21 30 05 lt Video Loss 7 gt 33 2013 01 06 21 30 05 lt Video Loss 8 gt 34 2013 01 06 21 30 05 Disk totals lt 1 gt Current working disk lt 1 gt 35 2013 01 06 21 43 25 User logged in lt 10 10 6 19 gt 36 2013 01 06 21 43 33 System Upgrade Start Upgrade 14 Page Up Page Down Backup PrePage NextPage 1 1 Curent Page Total Page Jump to 1 Figure 5 69 228 Log Time 2013 01 06 21 30 05 Alarm Event gt Event Begin Video Loss 1 2013 01 06 21 29 51 Channel Next Figure 5 70 5 6 4 Ver
181. erT Horu e ar A i oido Aaa ks mo ZE No lp Power Input Pat Power On Off USB Port of Button Bidirectional RS485 PTZ Control Video SPOT Output TK Input ape n o y v HDMI Output VGA Output Network Switch E a a See eee Network User Network User Network User Network Keyboard Figure 2 42 2 3 4 HD SDI 1080P 1U Series The connection sample is shown as in Figure 2 43 114 E Jee ey T y i do a ea E Alarm Input R5485 Alarm Output Audio Input Audio Output Bidirectional j p PTZ Control j Talk Output Port RS232 Port O i D caem ie if EVO g A dL L ON OFF ion O ocny aja eSATA Port USB Port Power Input Port Power Button Video Input Bidirectional burda A Talk Input Port 5 n w 3 Video Output VGA Output HDMI Output Network Switch Network User Network User Network User Network User Network Keyboard Network User Figure 2 43 2 3 5 2HDD 1U Entry level Series 2HDD full D1 1 5U Entry level Series Please refer to Figure 2 44 for connection sample The following figure is based on the 2HDD 1U entry level series product 115 Y Video Input 4 eee d 43 Audio Input Audio Alarm Input Alarm Output Output Video Output GND Port USB Port Power Button RS485 PTZ Control P Y gt w Power Input Port Bidirectional a Video SPOT Output Talk Input VGA Output
182. es wacauacacauechacew lucas coauadestusuiwciseu octal alecth deus A NA 242 7 6 Mage Rela SOU A 243 A a nee ae 243 Oe ROV OUD eea rascdeassasescananactcandoaceaslioendasauanaanceoeuasaatsandaaeest E T E ER 244 7 63 M ltiple ch annel DVI WA 244 7 1 WAN dadas 244 7 8 SCUD r E sa seuwtu sn de cere save tess ca E E E E 246 To AS o A A tacks onan O 246 LO A A e O 252 Eoo A cs facies aG5e cocnlea tease BESTE 262 TRS VOU AS is rests E sel wt cso ces teat Gemcen waoe ga sea oN Seca teen ee ee 270 A OVE Meana O Ee aaa Ee 275 LOO NS O ene te eet ane One A eer oe en eT En Oe RM BeNOR EI cet EO LEE SOE eRe TCE AO ART aR 286 Pee O A ates aetsss stare mecseta E A E 288 Vil 7 9 See E O A PEEN douscltdeedibe wel EEEE 290 TWO AMM Ads 293 RO 293 1 12 Un inStall Web Control musicas ii iii 294 8 PROFESSIONAL SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM ccccsesseceeeseeeseeeseeseeseeeeeeees 295 aera aie acme ee csc eee ec a eae r 296 APPENDIX A HDD CAPACITY CALCULATION ccceeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeseeeeeeseeeneees 301 APPENDIX B COMPATIBLE BACKUP DEVICE LIST ccccceesseeeeeeseeeeeeneees 302 APPENDIX C COMPATIBLE CD DVD DEVICE LIST ccesseccccteeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 308 APPENDIX D COMPATIBLE DISPLAYER LIST ccceececceseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeneees 309 APPENDIX E COMPATIBLE SWITCHER LIST cc cceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaes 310 APPENDIX F COMPATIBLE WIRELESS MOUSE LIST ccctesseeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 311 APPENDIX G EAR
183. esistance protection level ground and etc The thunder proof work shall be a systematic project emphasizing the all round protection including building transmission cable device ground and etc There shall be comprehensive management and the measures shall be scientific reliable practical and economic Considering the high voltage during the inductive thundering the International Electrotechnical Committee IEC standard on the energy absorbing step by step theory and magnitude classification in the protection zone you need to prepare multiple precaution levels You can use the lightning rod lightning strap or the lightning net to reduce the damage to the building personal injury or the property e The lightning protection device can be divided into three types Power lightning arrester There are 220V single phrase lightning arrester and 380V three phrase lightening arrester mainly in parallel connection sometimes use series connection You can parallel connect the power lightning arrester in the electric cable to reduce the short time voltage change and release the surge current From the BUS to the device there are usually three levels so that system can reduce the voltage and release the current step by step to remove the thunderstorm energy and guarantee the device safety You can select the replaceable module type the terminal connection type and portable socket according to your requirement e Signal lightning arrester This
184. ess System check start address and end address if you add IP section and the end address shall be larger than the start address f System may check newly added IP address exists or not System does not add if input IP address does not exist e Delete Click it to remove specified item e Edit Click it to edit start address and end address See Figure 5 18 System can check the IP address validity after the edit operation and implement IPv6 optimization e Default Click it to restore default setup In this case the trusted sites and blocked sites are both null Note e lf you enabled trusted sites only the IP in the trusted sites list can access the device e f you enabled blocked sites the IP in the blocked sites can not access the device eo System supports add MAC address 195 Enable Trusted Sites O Blocked Sites Type Trusted Sites Stat Adress End Address Figure 5 16 Restricted Type Trusted Sites 7 IP Version IP Address E 2001 255 258 bc52 Figure 5 17 start Address 110 10 6 21 k End Address Figure 5 18 5 3 5 3 NTP Setup 196 You need to install SNTP server Such as Absolute Time Server in your PC first In Windows XP OS you can use command net start w32time to boot up NTP service NTP setup interface is shown as in Figure 5 19 Host IP Input your PC address Port This series DVR supports TCP transmission only Port default value is 123 Update inter
185. est setup is right or not For example you can login user ZHY to _ FTP 10 10 7 7 and then test it can modify or delete folder or not See Figure 5 33 Internet Explorer P To logon to this FTP server type a user name and password FIP server 10 10 7 7 User name Password After yog log on you can add this server to your Favorites and return bo je easily C Log on anonymously Figure 5 33 System also supports upload multiple DVRs to one FTP server You can create multiple folders under this FTP In Figure 5 239 select FTP and then double click mouse You can see the following interface See Figure 5 34 o Please highlight the icon O in front of Enable to activate FTP function o Here you can input FTP server address port and remote directory When remote directory is null system automatically create folders according to the IP time and channel e Username and password is the account information for you to login the FTP e Now you can set upload file length picture upload interval upload file channel time and type lt File length is upload file length When setup is larger than the actual file length system will upload the whole file When setup here is smaller than the actual file length system only uploads the set length and auto ignore the left section When interval value is 0 system uploads all corresponding files lt gt Atthe same time you can set two periods three record files for different channels 2
186. ettings system will reboot A HDD Setting HDD No HDD Group 1 1 si 2 O Cancel Figure 5 47 Channels Setting Click the button named with Channels Settings at the top right corner of the Figure 5 45 system will pop up an interface shown as in Figure 5 48 Channel Here you can view the actual channel amount of the device Group No lt is the SN in the HDD group management Here we can set HDD 1 and HDD 2 sets to as HDD group 1 and HDD group 2 respectively You can see the HDD group option has only two options 1 and 2 when you set corresponding HDD group of the channel 215 When you set the channel setup please select the corresponding channel such as 1 and 2 and then select the HDD group such as 1 Click the Save button you can complete the setup In the Figure 5 48 you set channel 1 and channel 3 to the corresponding HDD group2 and set channel 2 and channel 4 to channel 16 to HDD group 1 In this setup the records from channel 1 and channel 3 are both saved in HDD of the group 2 The records from channel 2 and channel 4 to channel 16 are all saved in HDD of the group 1 When you are setting the configurations of the channels setting please select relevant channels first such as channel 1 to 16 and then select the HDD Group NO Please click the Save button to save current setup Important e Once you change the HDD Group settings system will pack the records and then reboot Tips There is an eas
187. etwork multiple window preview function Motion Zone setup support 396 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection zones Motion Detection Various sensitivity levels Detection and Alarm can activate record or external alarm or screen message prompt Alarm External N A Alarm Manual N A Alarm Control Alarm Input Output 13 Network Function Network control Alaa NA USB 2 USB 2 0 ports Interface Interface 1 RJ45 10M 100M 1000M self adaptable Ethernet port connection RS485 N A RS232 N A Information Information Data Data stream statistics for each channel in wave mode Stream Statistics Log Backup to 1024 log files statistics Support various search engines such as time and type Display version information channel amount alarm input and output amount system version and release date On line user Display current on line user User Multi lever user management various management modes Management User Integrated management for local user serial port user and network user Manageme Configurable user power nt Support user group and its corresponding rights modification No limit to the user or group amount Password modification a Administrator can modify other user s password Authenticati ae Account lock strategy A Five times login failure in thirty minutes may result in account lock Upgrade Web browser client end and update tool Password login protection to guaran
188. ew Logout No Disk Disk Error Disk No Space Net Disconnection IP Conflict MAC Conflict Channel Network Enabie O Alarm Out 2 13 Latch 10 Second 1 300 Event gt Video Detect gt Alarm O Show Message C Send Email O Buzzer O Message System Advanced information Figure 7 53 WEB service INN ATT ANTI ACT AO Channel No Disk Disk Error Disk No Space Net Disconnection IP Conflict MAC Conflict Network Enable CI Alarm Out EM 2 3 Latch 10 Second 1 300 Event gt Video Detect gt Alarm l O Show Message L Send Email CI Buzer OL Message System Advanced information Figure 7 54 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Parameter Function IO Event The abnormal events include No disk disk error disk no space net Type disconnection IP conflict and MAC conflict You can set one or more items here Less than You can set the minimum percentage value here For disk not space only The device can alarm when capacity is not sufficient You need to draw a circle to enable this function Check the box here to enable selected function Alarm Out Please select corresponding alarm output channel when an alarm occurs You need to check the box to enable this function Latch The alarm output can delay for the specified time after an alarm stops The value ranges from 1s to 300s Show System can pop up a message to alarm you in the local host screen if message you ena
189. f the SJ T11363 2006 standard During the environmental friendly use period EFUP period the toxic or hazardous substance or elements contained in products will not leak or mutate so that the use of these substances or elements will not result in any severe environmental pollution any bodily injury or damage to any assets The consumer is not authorized to process such kind of substances or elements please return to the corresponding local authorities to process according to your local government statutes Note e This manual is for reference only Slight difference may be found in the user interface eo All the designs and software here are subject to change without prior written notice All trademarks and registered trademarks mentioned are the properties of their respective owners lf there is any uncertainty or controversy please refer to the final explanation of us Please visit our website or contact your local retailer for more information 317
190. face is shown as in RS232 interface Please refer to Chapter 7 8 5 8 RS232 e Overlay channel Please select the channel you want to overlay the card number 286 e Overlay mode There are two options preview and encode Preview means overlay the card number in the local monitor video Encode means overlay the card number in the record file e Overlay Position Here you can select the proper overlay position from the dropdown list WEB service ve iayoack aarm f setup Logout Channel Text Overlay Network Sniffer Mode Event Protocol Storage System Setting Advanced Overlay Channel Overlay Mode Information Overlay Position COM NONE iv Preview v Encode Top Left x Figure 7 83 7 8 6 1 2 Network Type The network type interface is shown as below See Figure 7 84 Here we take the ATM POS protocol to continue There are two types with or without the protocol according to client s requirements With the protocol For ATM POS with the protocol you just need to set the source IP destination IP sometimes you need to input corresponding port number WEB service OA Qa ANT a Chantal Text Overlay Network Sniffer Mode NET Event Protocol ATM POS Setting ATMWPOS Overlay Mode Preview Encode Storage System Advanced Top Left Overlay Position Information Figure 7 84 Without the protocol For the ATM POS without the protocol the interface is shown as in Figure 7 85 Sourc
191. fault setup is 60 minutes Length Playback Repeat When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Way Search Mode and reverse play mode Various File Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Switch Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Ways Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto plays the next file in the current channel channel It may vary due to different series Playback Zoom Partial When in one window full screen playback mode you can select any zone Enlargemen to activate partial enlargement function t Backup HDD backup function Backup Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk USB Mode burner and etc Support network download and save View monitor channel remotely DVR configuration through client end and web browser Upgrade via client or browser to realize remote maintenance eae k View alarm information such as external alarm motion detection and video loss via client Support network PTZ lens control Network l control File download backup and playback Multiple devices share information via corresponding software such as professional surveillance software PSS Duplex transparent COM Network alarm input and output Support network multiple window preview function Bidirectional audio Motion Zone setup support 396 330 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection Detection Zones
192. fferent series Playback Zoom Partial When in one window full screen playback mode you can select any zone Enlargemen to activate partial enlargement function t HDD backup 25 function Mode Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk and etc Support network download and save View monitor channel remotely DVR configuration through client end and web browser Upgrade via client or browser to realize remote maintenance View alarm information such as external alarm motion detection and video loss via client Support network PTZ lens control File download backup and playback Multiple devices share information via corresponding software such as professional surveillance software PSS Duplex transparent COM Network alarm input and output Bidirectional audio Motion Zone setup support 396 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection zones Motion Detection Various sensitivity levels Detection and Alarm can activate record or external alarm or screen message prompt Network Function Network control Alarm Video Loss Alarm can activate external alarm or screen message prompt External Support record activation function or activate external alarm or screen Alarm message in specified period Manual Enable or disable alarm input channel Alarm Support analog alarm signal to specific alarm output channel Control 8 ch alarm input You 16 ch alarm input can set normal open Yo
193. fied time Value ranges from O to 60 minutes e Mouse property Click mouse setup button you can go to mouse setup interface See Figure 5 7 You can set double click speed via dragging the slide bard You can Click Default button to restore default setup o Startup wizard Check the box here system goes to the startup wizard when the device boots up the next time Otherwise it goes to the system login interface directly o Navigation bar Check the box here system displays the navigation bar on the interface Note Since system time is very important do not modify time casually unless there is a must Before your time modification please stop record operation first After completing all the setups please click save button system goes back to the previous menu 187 system Time Basic Settings Date Format YYYY MM DD Date Separator y Device Settings Language EXT Video Standard Device No Device ID Other Settings Holiday NENE W Startup Wizard 2013 01 05 23 28 46 O psr Time Format 24 HOUR Overwrite eo Jmn E Jmn HDD Full Pack Duration Realtime Play Mouse Property Auto Logout min Figure 5 3 DayofWeek Date Start Ist End ist C O Day of Week Date Start 492008 06 01 00 00 End 492008 09 01 00 00 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 188 Mouse Setup Default Cancel Figure 5 7 5 3 2 Encode Encode setting inc
194. formation Data Stream Data stream statistics for each channel in wave mode Statistics System Information Display HDD current status Backup to 1024 log files Support various search engines such as time and type Display version information channel amount alarm input and output amount system version and release date Display current on line user Multi lever user management various management modes Integrated management for local user serial port user and network Log statistics Version On line user User Management user Configurable user power Support user group and its corresponding rights modification No limit to the user or group amount Password modification Administrator can modify other user s password Account lock strategy Five times login failure in thirty minutes may result in account lock Upgrade Web browser client end and update tool Password login protection to guarantee safety User friendly interface when login Provide the following options Logout shutdown restart Right authentication when shut down to make sure only those proper people can turn off DVR AC90 264V 50 2 Hz Max 220W User Management Password Authentication Login Logout and Shutdown Power Power General Consumption 25W Exclude HDD Parameter Working OG ao 6 Temperature Working 10 90 Humidity Air Pressure Dimension Weight Installation Mode 86kpa 106kpa 2U st
195. function After you enabled this function system can snapshot when the corresponding alarm occurred e In Encode interface click snapshot button to input snapshot mode size quality and frequency See the interface on the left of Figure 4 23 e In FTP interface please input upload interval See the interface in the middle of Figure 4 22 e In Detect interface please enable snapshot function for specified channels interface in the middle of Figure 4 23 Or in alarm interface interface on the right of Figure 4 23 please enable snapshot function for specified channels Please refer to the following figure for detailed information See Figure 4 23 DETECT ENCODE Event Type Video Loss Channel Channel 1 y Enable B Type Regular v Extra Stream1 7 Compression H 264 H 264 X Resolution _ D 18 SNAPSHOT Frame Rated Period Set PATO Latch Mi Show Message Alarm Upload Send Email MRecord Channel PTZ Activation Select Delay Tour Bit Rate Typt Mode Trigger Image Size CIF Bit Rate Kb Image Quality 4 Snapshot 11 MBuzze Reference B Audio Video Audio Form OK Cancel Snapshot Frequency 1 SPL VUVERLAT SNAPSHOT Default Copy Cancel Default Copy 167 ALARM Event Type Local Alarm 7 Alarm In 1 y Enable Type Normal Open 7 Period Set Anti dither Alarm Out Latch Show Message Ml Alarm Upload M Send Email MRecord Channel PTZ Activation
196. g schedule recording and Recording alarm recording Mode Priority Manual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection Record and recording gt schedule recording playback 1 to 120 minutes single record duration Default setup is 60 minutes Length Playback Repeat Way When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Record Search Various search engines such as time type and channel Playback Various fast play slow play speeds manual frame by frame playback Mode and reverse play mode Various File Switch Ways Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto plays the next file in the current channel Multi channel There is 1 4 9 16 channel playback mode Playback It may vary due to different series Switch between self adaptive screen full screen when playback Partial When in one window full screen playback mode you can select any Enlargement zone to activate partial enlargement function Backup HDD backup function Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk Backup Mode USB burner and etc Support peripheral eSATA backup device Support network download and save View monitor channel remotely DVR configuration through client end and web browser Upgrade via client or browser to realize remote maintenance V
197. g working with direction mee or numeral keys to select the recording channel Window switch CN Click it to switch one window multiple window USB port To connect USB storage device USB mouse burner and etc Record light For 4 8 16 channel device indication light on means that the channel is in recording Power indication Power indication light light HDD abnormal HDD error occurs or HDD capacity is below specified indication light threshold value the light becomes red to alert you Network abnormal Network error occurs or there is no network connection indication light the light becomes red to alert you a e It is to receive the signal from the remote control 2 1 4 960H 1U Series 2HDD 1U Entry level Series HD SDI 1080P 1U Series The front panel is shown as below See Figure 2 4 Am 8 s 0 i 2 B KBE 6 HD NT pS CJC 01 C3 Gy Gz Figure 2 4 Please refer to the following sheet for front panel button information Name Icon Function Power button press this button for three seconds to boot up Power button l or shut down DVR Shift In textbox click this button to switch between numeral English Small Capitalized donation and etc Activate current control modify setup and then move up Up 1 and down Down 4 Y Increase decrease numeral 87 pf Assistant function such as PTZ menu In text mode input number 1 4 English character G H I Shift current activated control Left 2 Ri
198. ght 3 When playback click these buttons to control playback bar In text mode input number 2 English character A B C 3 English character D E F Go to previous menu or cancel current operation ESC ESC When playback click it to restore real time monitor mode Confirm current operation Enter ENTER Go to default button Go to menu Manually stop start recording working with direction keys REC or numeral keys to select the recording channel Record Multiple slow play speeds or normal playback Slow play 8 In text mode input number 8 English character T U V One window monitor mode click this button to display assistant function PTZ control and image color Backspace function in numeral control or text control press it for 1 5seconds to delete the previous character before the cursor hea En In motion detection setup working with Fn and direction keys to realize setup In text mode click it to switch between numeral English character small capitalized and etc Realize other special functions Various fast speeds and normal playback Fast play 7 In text mode input number 7 English character P Q R S Play previous 0 In playback mode playback the previous video In text mode input number 0 In normal playback or pause mode click this button to reverse playback In reverse playback click this button to pause playback In text mode input number 6 English character M N O
199. gure 2 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information 2 5 7 Network port gt 12 Alarm input alarm output RS485 port ES J 10 11 AAA 2a S 6 Audio output S E 8 9 10 1 13 Power socket GND port On off button 2 2 6 960H 1U Series The 8 channel series DVR rear panel is shown as below See Figure 2 22 2 a 6 8 T JO Of 7 8 9 10 11 12 1314 15 16 Figure 2 22 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information 6 Alarminput alarm output sd 8 Bidirectional talk input 9 Video VGA output SSS RS485 port Power input port 2 2 7 HD SDI 1080P 1U Series The 16 channel rear panel is shown as below See Figure 2 23 100 Q qPR AUDIO OUT 232 a de 2 eun A E ooog Figure 2 23 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Audio output Bidirectional talk output port RS232 port Video input Audio input 6 Video output S O 8 VideoVGA output S 9 Network port S O 13 cm 1 Alarm input Alarm output RS485 port 14 Power input port 15 Power button 2 2 8 2HDD 1U Entry level Series The 4 channel rear panel is shown as below See Figure 2 24 Figure 2 24 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information 6 Bidirectional talk input Z 8 9 10 1 Video VGA output Alarm input alarm output 10 HDMI port 11 USB port 101 Network port
200. gure 7 13 7 6 2 Relay output Here you can select alarm output channel the select channel alarm mode becomes manual and alarm is enabled See Figure 7 14 Image Relay out Figure 7 14 7 6 3 Multiple channel preview System allows you to preview several channels on one channel lt supports 1 4 8 9 window See Figure 7 15 Please note only the product of this icon can support current function O H GH H Figure 7 15 7 7 WAN Login In WAN mode after you logged in the interface is shown as below See Figure 7 16 244 PREVIEW Windows internet Explorer provided by Yanoo 1X wi 10 10 4 122 vllt O File Edit View Favorites Tools Help r Favorites 22 Ge CONFIG MO PREVIEW WEB service Dt CAM 1 M B 00O a 2013 01 06 22 48 13 alo 060 Speed 1 9 S O 22m O Om O a t gt a 4 gt A gt ee ee lt gt ee e to Start Talk zl A instant Record C AM 1 o REO aa Copyright 2012 AIl Rights Reserved amp Internet fa KR 100 Figure 7 16 Please refer to the following contents for LAN and WAN login difference 1 In the WAN mode system opens the main stream of the first channel to monitor by default The open close button on the left pane is null 2 You can select different channel and different monitor mode at the bottom of the interface See Figure 7 17 245 ZO PREVIEW Windows Internet Explorer provided by
201. h Occupation Video 56 900MByte h Manual recording motion detection recording schedule recording and alarm recording Recording Mode Priority Manual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection recording gt schedule recording playback Recording 1 to 120 minutes single record duration Default setup is 60 minutes Length Record and Playback Repeat When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Way Various search engines such as time type and channel search Playback Various fast play slow play speeds manual frame by frame playback Mode and reverse play mode Various File Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Switch Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Ways Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto plays the next file in the current channel Multi There is 1 4 9 16 channel playback mode channel It may vary due to different series Playback Switch between self adaptive screen full screen when playback Zoom Partial When in one window full screen playback mode you can select any zone Enlargemen to activate partial enlargement function t Backup HDD backup function Backup Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk and etc shel Support peripheral USB burner Support network download and save View monitor channel remotely DVR configuration through cl
202. han 10 button and then input In textbox click this button to switch between numeral Shift 4 English Small Capitalized donation and etc Enable or disable tour Activate current control modify setup and then move up and down Up A Y Down Increase decrease numeral Assistant function such as PTZ menu Left Shift current activated control and then move left and right e Right When playback click these buttons to control playback bar Go to previous menu or cancel current operation Z Q D ESC ESC When playback click it to restore real time monitor mode Confirm current operation Enter ENTER Go to default button Go to menu Manually stop start recording working with direction keys or numeral keys to select the recording channel Slow play bo Multiple slow play speeds or normal playback One window monitor mode click this button to display assistant function PTZ control and image color Backspace function in numeral control or text control press it for 1 5seconds to delete the previous character before the cursor In motion detection setup working with Fn and direction keys to realize setup Assistant ds In text mode click it to switch between numeral English character small capitalized and etc In HDD management interface you can click it to switch HDD record information and other information Menu prompt Realize other special functions Fast play Various fast speeds and
203. hen the main stream is D1 the extra stream can not 3 8 ch 2CIF 704x288 704x240 CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Note When the main stream is D1 the extra stream can not 3 16 ch 2CIF 704x288 704x240 CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Note When the main stream is D1 the extra stream can not be 2CIF be 2CIF be 2CIF Support dual streams extra stream resolution QCIF 176x144 176x120 6 level image quality Adjustable Quality Privacy Support one privacy mask of user defined size in full screen mask Support max 4 zones IERIE Channel information time information and privacy mask zone Information TV Adjust Adjust TV output zone suitable to anamorphic video Channel Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding Lock normally Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized user seeing secret video Channel name recording status screen lock status video loss status and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of display screen Color Hue brightness contrast saturation and gain setup for each channel Configuratio n Audio Audio Input 4 ch 200 2000mv 10KQ RCA Audio 1 ch audio output 200 3000mv 5KO RCA Output Channel Information PECO Real time Mode PAL 1f s to 25f s per channel and NTSC 1f s to 30f s Speed per channel Partition Touring schedule auto control PAL NTSC Real time monitor D1 704x576 704x480 Playback Playback Playback 1
204. ideo loss type 173 DETECT Event Type Camera Maskil y Channel Enable a Period Set Alarm Out Latch 10 Show Message MM Alarm Upload MY Send Email Ml Record Channel BS PTZ Activation Select Delay Tour Snapshot Buzzer Default Copy Cancel Figure 4 33 4 7 Alarm Setup and Alarm Activation Before operation please make sure you have properly connected alarm devices such as buzzer 4 7 1 Goto alarm setup interface In the main menu from Setting to Alarm you can see alarm setup interface See Figure 4 34 4 7 2 Alarm setup Alarm interface is shown as below See Figure 4 34 Alarm in Here is for you to select channel number Event type There are two types One is local input and the other is network input Type normal open or normal close PTZ activation When an alarm occurred system can activate the PTZ operation The PTZ activation lasts an anti dither period lt gt Inthe Pan Tilt Zoom interface Main menu gt Setting gt Pan Tilt Zoom please set video channel speed dome protocol and etc lt gt Select the channel of current speed dome as current monitor video and the right click mouse to select Pan Tilt Zoom item Now you can set preset tour pattern lt gt In Figure 4 34 click select button you can see an interface is shown as in Figure 4 35 Here you can set the activation operation such as preset tour pattern and enable Period Click set button you can see an interface is show
205. idirectional talk output port 109 Audio output Alarm input Alarm output RS485 port The rear panel of the 16 channel series product is shown as in Figure 2 37 12 13 14 15 16 EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEELE fees ce eee me ae ARARAARAA SAA AMARAAMARARAl Figure 2 37 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information 6 Network pot S 8 RS232port 9 HDMI pot Audio input Bidirectional talk output port Audio output 17 Alarm input Alarm output RS485 port 2 2 19 960H 2U Series The rear panel is shown as in Figure 2 38 Please note the following figure is based on the 16 channel series product 1 2 4 6 5 11 12 13 14 20 16 17 18 Figure 2 38 15 110 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information 4 7 10 11 Bidirectional talk output port Alarm input Alarm output RS485 port 15 Video VGA output HDMI port RS 232 eSATA port USB port Network port 2 2 20 8HDD Full D1 2U Entry level The 16 channel series rear panel is shown as below See Figure 2 39 S VES Y AS A Gy GS O 31446 e lt AARARAARARAANARARAANARRA Figure 2 39 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information 6 Video output 8 Video output 9 Audiooutput _______ _ _ ______ 12 VideoVGA output ms homot 12 13 4 Alarm input alarm output 111 eSATA port 16 USB port 16 RS485 port When connect the Ethernet
206. ient end and web browser Upgrade via client or browser to realize remote maintenance Funcion video loss via client Network control Multiple devices share information via corresponding software such as professional surveillance software PSS Duplex transparent COM Network alarm input and output Bidirectional audio 19 Motion Zone setup support 396 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection zones Motion Detection Various sensitivity levels Detection and Alarm can activate record or external alarm or screen message prompt Alarm External N A Alarm Manual N A Control Output USB 2 USB 2 0 ports Interface Interface Network One RJ45 10M 100M 1000M self adaptable Ethernet port connection PTZ control port RS485 Support various PTZ control protocols RS232 System Hard Disk Display HDD current status Information Information Data Data stream statistics for each channel in wave mode Stream Statistics Log Backup to 1024 log files Statistics Support various search engines such as time and type Display version information channel amount alarm input and output amount system version and release date On line user Display current on line user User Multi lever user management various management modes Management User Integrated management for local user serial port user and network user Manageme Configurable user power nt Support user group and its corresponding rights modification No limit to the user o
207. ies Alarm setup is not correct e Alarm cable connection is not correct e Alarm input signal is not correct There are two loops connect to one alarm device 21 Record storage period is not enough There are following possibilities e Camera quality is too low Lens is dirty Camera is installed against the light Camera aperture setup is not correct e HDD capacity is not enough HDD is damaged 22 Can not playback the downloaded file There are following possibilities There is no media player No DXB8 1 or higher graphic acceleration software e There is no DivX503Bundle exe control when you play the file transformed to AVI via media player e No DivX503Bundle exe or ftdshow 2004 1012 exe in Windows XP OS 23 Forgot local menu operation password or network password Please contact your local service engineer or our sales person for help We can guide you to solve this problem 299 24 For the HD SDI 1080P 1 5U and 2U series product system loses frames when record local file or the playback is not smooth There are following possibilities e Close extra stream record function e Close snapshot function e Reduce monitor channel amount of the WEB e Close FTP upload function Daily Maintenance o Please use the brush to clean the board socket connector and the chassis regularly e The device shall be soundly earthed in case there is audio video disturbance Keep the device away from the static voltage or in
208. iew alarm information such as external alarm motion detection and video loss via client Support network PTZ lens control File download backup and playback Multiple devices share information via corresponding software such as professional surveillance software PSS Duplex transparent COM Network alarm input and output Bidirectional audio Motion Zone setup support 396 330 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection Detection zones Network Function Network control Motion Detection and Alarm Various sensitivity levels Alarm can activate record or external alarm or screen message prompt Alarm can activate external alarm or screen message prompt External Alarm Support record activation function or activate external alarm or screen message in specified period Alarm can activate external alarm or screen message prompt 78 Control Support analog alarm signal to specific alarm output channel 4 ch alarm input You 8 ch alarm input You 16 ch alarm input can set normal open can set normal open or You can set Alarm Input or normal close type to normal close type to normal open or select the alarm select the alarm type gt normal close type type to select the alarm type Alarm Relay USB Interface connection PTZ control port HELIS Support various PTZ control protocols RS232 Ordinary COM Debug keyboard connection and transparent serial port COM input and output via network Hard Disk In
209. igure 7 7 Click it again system restores previous record mode Figure 7 7 e Section 5 Local play button The Web can playback the saved Extension name is dav files in the PC end Click local play button system pops up the following interface for you to select local play file See Figure 7 8 Look in 2 Desktop 0 My Documents fe Morton Antivirus amp My Computer ES Thinkvantage Technologies G My Metwork Places lad Wireless Manager access IBM 2008 04 08 AOL Double Click to Start Cp al EarthLink Internet 30 Days Free P coFos042008_ 00000 l jili File name Files of type Record files Cancel Figure 7 8 e Section 6 From the left to the right you can see video quality fluency full screen 1 window 4 window 6 window 8 window 9 window 13 window 16 window 20 window 25 window 36 window You can set video fluency and real time feature priority e Section 7 PTZ operation panel Please refer to chapter 7 5 for detailed information e Section 8 Image setup and alarm setup Please refer to chapter 7 6 for detailed information g Je Bhp s0 10 4 122 El Edt Yew Favorites Tods keb MET dl E OC E e E E E 1 e E Ge Copmight 2012 All Rights Reserved Figure 7 9 241 7 4 Real time Monitor In section 2 left click the channel name you want to view you can see the corresponding video in current window On the top left corner you can view device IP channel number network monitor
210. in error 294 8 Professional Surveillance System Besides Web you can use our Professional Surveillance Software PSS to login the device For detailed information please refer to PSS user s manual 295 9 FAQ 1 DVR can not boot up properly There are following possibilities Input power is not correct Power connection is not correct Power switch button is damaged Program upgrade is wrong HDD malfunction or something wrong with HDD ribbon Seagate DB35 1 DB35 2 SV35 or Maxtor 17 g has compatibility problem Please upgrade to the latest version to solve this problem Front panel error Main board is damaged 2 DVR often automatically shuts down or stops running There are following possibilities Input voltage is not stable or it is too low HDD malfunction or something wrong wit the ribbon Button power is not enough Front video signal is not stable Working environment is too harsh too much dust Hardware malfunction 3 System can not detect hard disk There are following possibilities HDD is broken HDD ribbon is damaged HDD cable connection is loose Main board SATA port is broken 4 There is no video output whether it is one channel multiple channel or all channel output There are following possibilities Program is not compatible Please upgrade to the latest version Brightness is 0 Please restore factory default setup There is no video input signal or it is too weak
211. ing If the current HDD is full and then next HDD is not empty then system overwrites the previous files e Video standard There are two formats NTSC and PAL e Pack duration Here is for you to specify record duration The value ranges from 1 to 120 minutes Default value is 60 minutes o Real time playback It is to set playback time you can view in the preview interface chapter 4 2 Live Viewing The value ranges from 5 to 60 minutes e Device ID Please input a corresponding device name here e Holiday setup Click it you can see an interface shown as in Figure 5 7 Here you can set holiday date Please go to chapter 4 5 Schedule to view or set the holiday date record setup lt gt When you enable Holiday settings and schedule setup at the same time holiday setting has the priority If the selected day is a holiday then system records as you set in holiday setting If it is not a holiday system records as you set in Schedule interface Please note you need to go to chapter 4 5 Schedule to enable Holiday setup Otherwise you can not enable holiday record setup lt gt Please note there is no year setup on the holiday setup For example if you set 30th Oct 2012 as a holiday then the date of 30th Oct in each year will be set as a holiday So general speaking your holiday setup in other year may also affect the holiday setup in 2012 e Auto logout Here is for you to set auto logout interval once login user remains inactive for a speci
212. ing from 0 C to 55 C 6 Accessories Be sure to use all the accessories recommended by manufacturer Before installation please open the package and check all the components are included Contact your local retailer ASAP if something is broken in your package 7 Lithium battery Improper battery use may result in fire explosion or personal injury When replace the battery please make sure you are using the same model 1 FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS 1 1 Overview This series product is an excellent digital monitor product designed for security field It adopts embedded Linux OS to maintain reliable operation Popular H 264 compression algorithm and G 711 audio compression technology realize high quality low bit stream Unique frame by frame play function is suitable for detail analysis lt has various functions such as record playback monitor at the same time and can guarantee audio video synchronization This series product has advanced technology and strong network data transmission function This series device adopts embedded design to achieve high security and reliability It can work in the local end and at the same time when connecting it to the professional surveillance software PSS it can connect to security network to realize strong network and remote monitor function This series product can be widely used in various areas such as banking telecommunication electric power interrogation transportation intelligent resi
213. ing sheet for detailed information HDMI port USB port RS 485 port Power socket On off button GND port 2 2 3 1HDD Full D1 Smart 1U Series 1HDD 2CIF Smart 1U Series Here we take 1HDD Full D1 Smart 1U as an example See Figure 2 14 through Figure 2 16 Figure 2 14 97 15 Figure 2 Of MW Figure 2 16 je D Z z ep D E Z ep Video input Video output VGA output USB port Name E Oo rq Same O Qu E O 49 Lo pun O Qu pr E v O E Q O Y C O pun Y Same v 49 Ko A wa O O ER 2 2 4 Enhanced 1HDD Full D1 Smart 1U Series Enhanced 1HDD 2CIF Smart 1U Series Here we take enhanced 1HDD 2CIF Smart 1U as an example See Figure 2 17 through Figure 2 19 Sl i t i i 17 Figure 2 98 o gt m rel E 5 o 3 5 Ex Z O a SS 2 7 A y D pa 5 O a 2 no gt Jl Al A D A OQ _ S 3 e qu LL 5 aa 3 E zB MENE 1 E O O Lal 2 o E 9 OO GE 5 3 125 E A OO OO zlee la E 4 A OO MO ee 6l 3 HOO e E E NN i ZENIAN ES D a S 3 Ooo an 5 O Q A O e El D y mn A A 2 gt Oo 203 g 3 gt as 5 a So D Cc ben Cio Cc O c i L Z O 2 O a lel O 9 O Y ES N 2 e an N E 13 14 99 12 10 21 Fi
214. ion becomes activated in the specified periods There are six periods in one day Please draw a circle to enable corresponding period Select date If you do not select current setup applies to today only You can select all week column to apply to the whole week Click OK button system goes back to local alarm interface please click save button to exit Anti dither System only memorizes one event during the anti dither period The value ranges from 5s to 600s Sensor type There are two options NO NC Record channel System auto activates motion detection channel s to record once an alarm occurs Please note you need to set alarm record period and go to Storage gt Schedule to set current channel as schedule record Record Delay System can delay the record for specified time after alarm ended The value ranges from 10s to 300s Alarm out Enable alarm activation function You need to select alarm output port so that system can activate corresponding alarm device when an alarm occurs Latch System can delay the alarm output for specified time after an alarm ended The value ranges from 1s to 300s Show message System can pop up a message to alarm you in the local host screen if you enabled this function Buzzer Check the box here to enable this function The buzzer beeps when an alarm occurs Alarm upload System can upload the alarm signal to the centre Including alarm centre 267 Send Email If you enabled this function
215. ion information channel amount alarm input and output amount system version and release date On line user Display current on line user Version 72 User Multi lever user management various management modes Management Integrated management for local user serial port user and network User user Management Configurable user power No limit to the user or group amount Password Administrator can modify other user s password Five times login failure in thirty minutes may result in account lock Login Logout and Shutdown Logout shutdown restart people can turn off DVR AC90 264V 50 2 Hz Max 220W General Consumption 25W Exclude HDD Parameter Temperature Humidity 86kpa 106kpa 2U standard industrial case 440 W x460 D x89mm H Weight 6 5 7 5KG Exclude HDD Installation Desktop rack installation Mode 1 3 23 HD SDI 1080P 2U Series Upgrade Web browser client end and update tool Wile High performance industrial embedded micro controller System Processor Embedded LINUX System Multiplex operations Multiple channel record multiple channel playback Resources and network operation simultaneously User friendly graphical user interface Input Front panel USB mouse Devices Method optional Function USB mouse to switch screen Compression Video n Audio Compressio G 711A n om 4 CH HD SDI video 8 CH HD SDI video 16 CH HD SDI video Video Input input NTSC PAL input NTSC PAL inp
216. it For one device if there is a backup in process you can not start a new backup operation lt is to edit the file ePlease play the file you want to edit and then click this button when you want to E edit You can see the corresponding slide bars such as E or A in the time bar of the corresponding channel You can adjust the slide bar or input the accurate time to set the file end time After you set you can click Clip button again to edit the second period You Clip can see the slide bar restore its previous position e Click Backup button after clip you can save current contents in a new file Select the file s you want to backup from the file list You can check from the list Then click the backup button now you can see the backup menu System supports customized path setup After select or create new folder click the Start button to begin the backup operation The record file s will be saved in B the specified folder ackup e You can clip for one channel or multiple channel The multiple channel click operation is similar with the one channel operation Please note eo System max supports 1024 files backup at the same time e You can not operate clip operation if there is any file has been checked in the file list 3 lice In any play mode the time bar will change once you modify the search type Other Functions When system is playing you can select a zone in the window to begin smart search Click the motion
217. ix levels ranging from 1 to 6 The sixth level has the highest image quality Video audio You can enable or disable the video audio Overlay Click overlay button you can see an interface is shown in Figure 5 9 Cover area Privacy mask Here is for you to set privacy mask section You can drag you mouse to set proper section size In one channel video system max supports 4 zones in one channel Preview monitor privacy mask has two types Preview and Monitor Preview means the privacy mask zone can not be viewed by user when system is in preview status Monitor means the privacy mask zone can not be view by the user when system is in monitor status 189 lt gt Time display You can select system displays time or not when you playback Please click set button and then drag the title to the corresponding position in the screen lt gt Channel display You can select system displays channel number or not when you playback Please click set button and then drag the title to the corresponding position in the screen lt gt Copy After you complete the setup you can click Copy button to copy current setup to other channel s You can see an interface is shown as in Figure 5 10 You can see current channel number is grey Please check the number to select the channel or you can check the box ALL Please click the OK button in Figure 5 10 and Figure 5 8 respectively to complete the setup Please note once you check the All box you set same e
218. k video file remotely There are following possibilities Network fluency is not good Client end resources are limit There is multiple cast group setup in DVR This mode can result in mosaic Usually we do not recommend this mode There is privacy mask or channel protection setup Current user has no right to monitor DVR local video output quality is not good 15 Network connection is not stable There are following possibilities Network is not stable IP address conflict MAC address conflict PC or DVR network card is not good 16 Burn error USB back error There are following possibilities e Burner and DVR are in the same data cable 298 System uses too much CPU resources Please stop record first and then begin backup Data amount exceeds backup device capacity It may result in burner error Backup device is not compatible Backup device is damaged 17 Keyboard can not control DVR There are following possibilities DVR serial port setup is not correct e Address is not correct When there are several switchers power supply is not enough e Transmission distance is too far 18 Alarm signal can not been disarmed There are following possibilities Alarm setup is not correct e Alarm output has been open manually Input device error or connection is not correct e Some program versions may have this problem Please upgrade your system 19 Alarm function is null There are following possibilit
219. kport 9 RS 485 pot The 8 channel full D1 mini 1U series rear panel is shown as below See Figure 2 9 m F m HEN T 1 2 34 3 6 Of 8 38190 1 12 Figure 2 9 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information 6 HDMI pot 7 USB port 8 o 10 Network port RS 485 port 7 10 On off button GND port The 16 channel full D1 mini 1U series rear panel and 16 chanel 2CIF real time mini 1U series rear panel is shown as below See Figure 2 10 Figure 2 10 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Video input Video output 95 6 HDMipot 8 Network port 19 RS 485 port Power socket On off button GND port 2 2 2 Enhanced Mini 1U Series The 4 channel enhanced full D1 mini 1U series rear panel is shown as in Figure 2 11 Figure 2 11 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Video input Video output Video VGA output HDMI port Figure 2 12 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Video input 96 2 Audioinput S 5 Video VGA output o HDMI pot HDMI port 5 6 8 9 Oe A 10 11 12 On off button GND port The 16 channel enhanced full D1 mini 1U series rear panel and 16 channel 2CIF real time mini 1U series rearl panel is shown as in Figure 2 13 Mor 45678459104 1242 1044 16 4 07 AG ELLE LEE SiO 2 Figure 2 13 Please refer to the follow
220. l PAL NTSC Real time monitor D1 704x576 704x480 Resolution PAL NTSC Playback 1 16 ch D1 704x576 704x480 HD1 352x576 352x480 2CIF 704x288 704x240 CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Support dual streams extra stream resolution CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 6 level image quality Adjustable Quality Support one privacy mask of user defined size in full screen mask Support max 4 zones Image E ae Channel information time information and privacy mask zone Information p y TV Adjust Adjust TV output zone suitable to anamorphic video Channel Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding Lock normally Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized user seeing secret video Channel Channel name recording status screen lock status video loss status Information and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of display screen Color Hue brightness contrast saturation and gain setup for each channel Configuratio n Audio 4 ch 200 2000mv 8 ch 200 2000mv 4 ch 200 Audio Input a ed ENE TOKS 1 ch audio output 200 1 ch audio output 200 1 ch audio output Audio 3000mv 5KQ BNC 3000mv 5KQ BNC 200 3000mv Output 5KO RCA 1 ch audio talk output 1 ch audio talk output 1 ch audio talk 200 3000mv 5K Q BNC 200 3000mv 5KQ BNC output 200 3000mv 5KQ RCA Bidirectional Audio Hard Disk 2 built in SATA port Support 2 HDDs Hard Disk Audio
221. l Time title channel title Image enhance 7 8 5 3 2 TV Adjust There are four options 1280 X 1024 default 1280 xX 720 1024 x 768 800 x 600 Please note the system needs to reboot to activate current setup number on the monitor video Check the box you can optimize the margin of the preview video It is to set TV output region See Figure 7 74 WEB service e ET o Channel Network Event Storage System gt General gt Account gt Default gt Import amp Export gt Auto Maintain gt Upgrade gt RS232 gt PTZ Advanced Information 7 8 5 3 3 Tour Gul TV Adjust Video Matrix Top Margin Bottom Margin Right Margin Left Margin lt I feh gt Brightness Figure 7 74 281 The tour interface is shown as in Figure 7 75 Here you can set tour interval split mode motion detect tour and alarm tour mode WEB service ve Payoack aam sep f Logout Channel GUI Network C Enable Tour Event Storage 5 Second 5 120 Soli jew ma System Split view 1 v gt General 3 Channel Group gt Account gt Default gt Auto Maintain gt Upgrade gt RS232 ow 3 Dun 4 gt w A dd Y Y Y E Y y on DD Nm 4 WwW YD gt PTZ Advanced information Motion Tour Type view 1 Alarm Tour Type iew 1 v Figure 7 75 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Parameter Function Enable tour Check the box here to enable tou
222. l Support network PTZ lens control File download backup and playback Multiple devices share information via corresponding software such as professional surveillance software PSS Support network multiple window preview function Motion Zone setup support 396 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection zones Detection Various sensitivity levels Alarm can activate record or screen message prompt Video Loss Alarm can activate screen message prompt External N A Alarm Manual N A Alarm Control Output USB 2 USB 2 0 ports Interface 1 RJ45 10M 100M 1000M self adaptable Ethernet port connection RS485 N A RS232 N A System Hard Disk Display HDD current status Information Information Data Data stream statistics for each channel in wave mode Stream Statistics Log Backup to 1024 log files Statistics Support various search engines such as time and type amount system version and release date On line user User Multi lever user management various management modes Management User Integrated management for local user serial port user and network user Manageme Configurable user power nt Support user group and its corresponding rights modification No limit to the user or group amount ora Password modification o Administrator can modify other user s password Authenticati AA Account lock strategy a Five times login failure in thirty minutes may result in account lock Upgrade Web browser client
223. lance software PSS Duplex transparent COM Network alarm input and output Bidirectional audio Motion Zone setup support 396 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection zones Motion Detection Various sensitivity levels Detection and Alarm can activate record or external alarm or screen message prompt Alarm Video Loss Alarm can activate screen message prompt External N A Alarm Manual N A Alarm Control 16 Network Function Network control N A N A Alarm Input Alarm Output Alarm Relay Interface Interface Network connection RS485 RS232 System Information N A 2 USB 2 0 ports One RJ45 10M 100M 1000M self adaptable Ethernet port PTZ control port Support various PTZ control protocols N A Display HDD current status Hard Disk Information Data Data stream statistics for each channel in wave mode Stream Statistics Log Statistics E UY Backup to 1024 log files Support various search engines such as time and type Display version information channel amount alarm input and output amount system version and release date On line user Display current on line user User Multi lever user management various management modes Management User Integrated management for local user serial port user and network user Manageme Configurable user power nt Support user group and its corresponding rights modification No limit to the user or group amount Password mo
224. largemen to activate partial enlargement function t HDD backup Backup Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk and Mode etc Support network download and save View monitor channel remotely DVR configuration through client end and web browser NO Upgrade via client or browser to realize remote maintenance control View alarm information such as external alarm motion detection and video loss via client Support network PTZ lens control File download backup and playback Multiple devices share information via corresponding software such as professional surveillance software PSS Duplex transparent COM Network alarm input and output Bidirectional audio Motion Zone setup support 396 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection zones Motion Detection Various sensitivity levels Detection and Alarm can activate record or external alarm or screen message prompt Alarm Video Loss Alarm can activate screen message prompt External Support record activation function or activate external alarm or screen Alarm message in specified period Manual Enable or disable alarm input channel Alarm Support analog alarm signal to specific alarm output channel Control 16 ch alarm input You can set normal open or normal close type to Alarm Input select the alarm type Alarm 3 channel relay output Output Alarm Relay 30VDC 2A 125VAC 1A Activation output USB 2 USB 2 0 ports Interface Interface
225. lay screen Color Hue brightness contrast saturation and gain setup for each channel Configuratio n Audio AI IAS 4 ch 200 2000mv 4 ch 200 2000mv 4 ch 200 2000mv pe 10KQ BNC 10KQ BNC 10KQ BNC Audio 1 ch audio output 200 3000mv 5KO BNC Output Bidirectional 1 ch audio talk input 200 3000mv 10K 2 BNC Audio 1 ch audio talk output 200 3000mv 5K 2 BNC Hard Disk 4 built in SATA port Support 4 HDDs Hard Disk Audio PCM 28 8MByte h geval cles Occupation Video 56 900MByte h Manual recording motion detection recording schedule recording and alarm recording Recording Mode Priority Manual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection recording gt schedule recording Recording 1 to 120 minutes single record duration Default setup is 60 minutes Length Playback Repeat When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Way Record Various search engines such as time type and channel search Playback Various fast play slow play speeds manual frame by frame playback Mode and reverse play mode Record and playback Various File Switch Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto plays the next file in the current channel Multi There is 1 4 9 16 channel playback mode channel It may vary due to different series Playback Way
226. layback in full screen Please note for one channel system can not playback and download at the same time The record is automatically saved at the Download folder of the installation directory Or you can download it to your specified directory You can use the playback control bar to implement various operations such as play pause stop slow play fast play and etc You can view playback channel and device IP during the playback process Select the file s you want to download and then click download button system pops up a dialogue box shown as in Figure 7 91 then you can specify file name and path to download the file s to your local pc Save ir E Desktop qe 3 E Eg a My computer my Documents e My Network Places Save as type day Files dav Lancel Figure 7 91 Load more It is for you to search record or picture You can select record channel record type and record time to download See Figure 7 92 291 MEG ipa Download ER Dornlea 4 Search Channel Type All v a Record z Pegin Time 2012 6 16 15 30 52 End Time 2012 6 19 15 30 52 MandAStrean y Stream Type DORA Type Type File z DAY Y r Remote Backup Backup device 7 Backup type DAY Zz Remote backup In Figure 7 92 there is a remote back pane at the left bottom of the pane It allows you to backup the record or picture to your local USB storage media via the Web
227. layback mode you can switch between1 16 and 17 32 channels The time bar will change once you modify the playback mode or the channel The card number search interface is shown as below Here you can view card number field setup bar You cam imp Double click it you can view the picture record file list of current day The file list is to display the first channel of the record file eThe system can display max 128 files in one time Use the lt and or the mouse to view the file Select one item and then double click the mouse or click the ENTER button to playback eYou can input the period in the following interface to begin accurate search File type R regular record A external alarm record M Motion detect record Lock file Click the file you want to lock and click the button a to lock The file you locked will not be overwritten Search locked file Click the button to view the locked file Return Click button system goes back to the calendar and channel setup interface Please note System max locks 16 files The size of the locked file shall be less than the 1 4 of the HDD total space The first 16G of each partition can not be locked System can only lock one file at one time and can not lock the extra stream For the file that is writing or overwriting it can not be locked Click it to go to mark file list interface You can view all mark information of current channel by time Please refer to chapte
228. laybackChannel07 Add Group Figure 7 70 Real time MonitorChannel02 Real time MonitorChannelo7 PlaybackChannel03 PlaybackChannel08 Internet fa A 100 Real time MonitorChannel02 Real time MonitorChannel07 PlaybackChannel03 PlaybackChannel08 Add group It is to add group and set its corresponding rights See Figure 7 71 Please input the group name and then check the box to select the corresponding rights lt includes shutdown reboot device live view record control PTZ control and etc 279 Xplorer provided by Yahoo 10 10 4 122 yl 1 0 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help yy Favorites U CONFIG WEB service NINA ANTI ARTO ACT Channel Account Network User Event Storage user group System gt G i E Add Group Display Group Name Default Memo import amp Export Authority O Select All Auto Maintain Elcontro Panel Upgrade R PTZ Advanced Information A Done but with errors on page Modify group Authority Control Panel Real time MonitorChannel0 Real time MonitorChannel0 PlaybackChannel04 Add Group Oshutdown CReal time Monitor ClReal time MonitorChannel01 CiReal time MonitorChannel02 Figure 7 71 Real time MonitorChannel02 Real time MonitorChannel07 PlaybackChannel03 PlaybackChannel08 Internet Ca Click the modify group button you can see an interface is shown as in Figure 7 72 E 100 Here you can modify group information
229. le network cable or shutdown the device Important 284 Improper upgrade program may result in device malfunction Upgrade Channel Network Everi Select Firmware File Storage System gt General gt Account gt Display gt Default gt Import amp Export gt Auto Maintain gt RS232 gt PTZ Advanced Information Figure 7 80 7 8 5 8 RS232 The RS232 interface is shown as in Figure 7 81 WEB service Channel RS232 Network Function Console Event Baud Rate 115200 Storage System Data Bit 3 gt General Stop Bit 1 ie ie ie ie gt Account Parity None gt Default D wo os gt Import amp Export gt Auto Maintain gt Upgrade gt PTZ Advanced Information Figure 7 81 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information A AA Protocol Select the corresponding dome protocol Default setup is console Baud Rate Select the baud rate Default setup is 115200 Data Bit The value ranges from 5 to 8 Default setup is 8 Default setup is 1 Parity There are five options none odd even space mark Default setup is none 7 8 5 9 PTZ 285 The PTZ interface is shown as in Figure 7 82 Before setup please check the following connections are right e PTZ and decoder connection is right Decoder address setup is right e Decoder A B line connects with DVR A B line Click Save button after you complete setup you can go
230. lish the mapping relationship between the LAN and the public network Here you can also add modify or remove UPnP item See Figure 7 34 e Inthe Windows OS From Start gt Control Panel gt Add or remove programs Click the Add Remove Windows Components and then select the Network Services from the Windows Components Wizard e Click the Details button and then check the Internet Gateway Device Discovery and Control client and UPnP User Interface Please click OK to begin installation O Enable UPnP from the Web If your UPnP is enabled in the Windows OS the DVR can auto detect it via the My Network Places 259 WEB service Channel Network gt TCPAP Enable O Disable Status Searching now gt Connection gt WIFI LAN IP 0 gt 36 WAN IP 0 gt PPPoE Port Mapping List gt DDNS gt IP Filter TCP UDP RTSP RTSP SNMP gt Email gt SNMP E EE E EE gt Multicast gt Alarm Centre Event Storage System Advanced Information Figure 7 34 7 8 2 10 SNMP The SNMP interface is shown as in Figure 7 35 The SNMP allows the communication between the network management work station software and the proxy of the managed device WEB service gT ANISTON ARNO AECE ATT Channel SNMP Network gt TCPAP iv Enable gt Connection diga dc 161 gt WIFI Read Community public gt 3G Write Community private gt PPPoE Trap Address gt DDNS Trap Port 162 0 65535
231. lose type to or normal close type to open or normal close select the alarm select the alarm type to select the type type alarm type 6 channel relay output including one controllable DC 12V output port Output Alarm Relay 30VDC 2A 125VAC 1A activation alarm USB 4 USB 2 0 ports Interface Interface N Network RJ45 10M 100M 1000M self adaptable Ethernet port connection Two RS485 ports PTZ control port Support various PTZ control protocols RS232 Ordinary COM Debug keyboard connection and transparent serial port COM input and output via network System Hard Disk Display HDD current status Information Information Stream Statistics statistics Support various search engines such as time and type on Display version information channel amount alarm input and output amount system version and release date User Multi lever user management various management modes Management User Integrated management for local user serial port user and network user Manageme Configurable user power i No limit to the user or group amount Administrator can modify other user s password Authenticati a Account lock strategy Five times login failure in thirty minutes may result in account lock Upgrade Web browser client end and update tool Password login protection to guarantee safety User friendly interface when login Provide the following options Logout shutdown restart Right authenticatio
232. ludes the following items See Figure 5 8 Please note some series do not support extra stream Channel Select the channel you want Type Please select from the dropdown list There are three options regular motion detect alarm You can set the various encode parameters for different record types Compression System supports H 264 Resolution System supports various resolutions you can select from the dropdown list The main stream supports D1 HD1 2CIF CIF QCIF and the extra stream supports CIF QCIF Please note the option may vary due to different series Note a For HD SDI series the main code stream types are 1080P 720P D1 HD1 2CIF CIF QCIF Extra stream resolution supports D1 CIF QCIF b For 960H series the main code stream types are 960H D1 HD1 2CIF CIF QCIF Extra stream resolution supports 960H D1 HD1 2CIF CIF QCIF Frame rate lt ranges from 1f s to 25f s in NTSC mode and 1f s to 30f s in PAL mode Note For the 16 channel series product of the HD SDI 1080P 1 5U series product and the HD SDI 1080P 2U series product when the main stream resolution is 1080P the frame rate of the 1 5 9 13 channel max supports 25f s or 30f s and the frame rate of the rest channels support 12f s or 15f s The extras stream of the HD SDI 1080P 1 5U series product and the HD SDI 1080P 2U series product support D1 6fps or 7f s Bit rate tyoe System supports two types CBR and VBR In VBR mode you can set video quality Quality There are s
233. m occurs Such as go to preset tour amp pattern when there is an alarm Click select button you can see an interface is shown as in Figure 4 27 169 e Record Delay System can delay the record for specified time after alarm ended The value ranges from 10s to 300s Tour Here you can enable tour function when alarm occurs System one window tour Please go to chapter 5 3 9 Display for tour interval setup O Snapshot You can enable this function to snapshoot image when an motion detect alarm Occurs e Buzzer Highlight the icon to enable this function The buzzer beeps when alarm occurs O Test Click it to test current motion detect setup do not need to save Click Select button after Region you can set motion detect area The default setup is whole region The blue zones are the selected area Please set sensitivity and click Test button you can see system only display motion detect status of the blue area The red flashing area is current motion detect See Figure 4 31 Please highlight icon O to select the corresponding function After all the setups please click Save button system goes back to the previous menu Note In motion detection mode you can not use copy paste to set channel setup since the video in each channel may not be the same In Figure 4 26 you can left click mouse and then drag it to set a region for motion detection Click Fn to switch between arm withdraw motion detection After setting click ente
234. m tive ANETTE alarm f setur ANT Channel Encode gt Conditions Channel Main Stream gt Channel Name Code Stream Type Network Compression Event Resolution Storage Frame Rate FPS System Bit Rate Type Advanced z Bit Rate Information Reference Bit Rate O Audio Enable Audio Encode O Watermark Enable Snapshot Sub Stream Regular mi Video Enable H 264 sm Compression Resolution Frame Rate FPS 7 Bit Rate Type CBR Bit Rate 160 896 5120Kb S Reference Bit Rate 48 320Kb S LJ Audio Enable Audio Encode Watermark String Figure 7 19 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Parameter Channel Video enable Code stream type Please select a channel from the dropdown list Check the box here to enable extra stream video This item is enabled by default It includes main stream motion stream and alarm stream You can select different encode frame rates form different recorded events System supports active control frame function ACF It allows you to record in different frame rates For example you can use high frame rate to record important events record scheduled event in lower frame rate and it allows you to set different frame rates for motion detection record and alarm record 248 Compression The main bit stream supports H 264 The extra stream supports H 264 MJPG Resolution System supports various resolutions you can select from the drop
235. me playback Shift Fast play Slow play Play Pause Reverse Pause tc 4 E In normal playback or pause mode click this button to reverse o playback eo In reverse playback click this button to pause In playback mode playback the previous video e In playback mode playback the next video Activate current control modify setup and then move up and down Increase decrease numeral Play previous Play Next Up Down Left Right l B Assistant function such as PTZ menu Shift current activated control and then move left and right When playback click these buttons to control playback bar Go to previous menu or cancel current operation A W lt gt SC When playback click it to restore real time monitor mode Confirm current operation Go to default button Go to menu 86 Assistant One window monitor mode click this button to display assistant function PTZ control and image color Backspace function in numeral control or text control press it for 1 5 seconds to delete the previous character before the cursor In motion detection setup working with Fn and direction keys to realize setup In text mode click it to switch between numeral English character small capitalized and etc In HDD management interface you can click it to switch HDD record information and other information Menu prompt o Realize other special functions aa mee aio stop start recordin
236. ment adopts group user modes The user name and the group name shall be unique One user shall be included in only one group User name In this interface you can add remove user and modify user name See Figure 7 67 Channel Network Event Storage System gt General gt Display gt Default gt Import amp Export gt Auto Maintain gt Upgrade gt RS232 gt PTZ Advanced information 666666 user 666666 user s account admin admin admin s account default user Authority Control Panel Shutdown Real time MonitorChannel03 Real time MonitorChannel04 Real time MonitorChannel05 Real time MonitorChannel06 Real time MonitorChannel07 Real time MonitorChannel08 Playback PlaybackChannel04 PlaybackChannel05 default account Real time Monitor Realtime MonitorChannel01 Real time MonitorChanneld2 PlaybackChannel01 PlaybackChannel02 PlaybackChannel03 PlaybackChannel06 PlaybackChannel07 PlaybackChannel08 Figure 7 67 Add user lt is to add a name to group and set the user rights See Figure 7 68 211 There are four default users admin 888888 666666 and hidden user default Except user 6666 other users have administrator right The user 666666 can only have the monitor rights Hidden user default is for system interior use only and can not be deleted When there is no login user hidden user default automatically login You can set some rights such as monitor for this user so that you can
237. monitor 960H 960 x576 960x480 Playback channel 1 16 960 x576 960x480 Resolution 176x144 176x120 Support dual streams Extra stream resolution CIF 352 x 288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Image Quality 6 level image quality Adjustable Support max 4 zones Image Ch ae y Channel Lock Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized user seeing secret video Channel Channel name recording status screen lock status video loss status and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of display screen Color Hue brightness contrast saturation and gain setup for each channel Configuration Audio 4 ch 200 2000mv 4 ch 200 2000mv 4 ch 200 Audio Input 10KQO BNC 10KQ BNC 2000mv 10KQ BNC 64 1 ch audio output 200 3000mv 5KQ BNC Audio Output 1 ch audio talk input 200 3000mv 10KQ BNC Audio 1 ch audio talk output 200 3000mv 5K 2 BNC 4 built in SATA port Support 4 HDDs Hard Disk Audio PCM 28 8MByte h Manual recording motion detection recording schedule recording and alarm recording Recording Mode Priority Manual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection recording gt schedule recording playback 1 to 120 minutes single record duration Default setup is 60 minutes Length Playback Repeat Way When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Record Search Various search engines such as tim
238. mount is less than four you do not need to install the HDD bracket When there is a bracket please make sure the installation direction of HDDs is the same 135 3 4 Rack Installation Please note this installation mode is for 1 5U 2U series product Please follow the steps listed below Use twelve screws to fix the unit o Please make sure the indoor temperature is below 35 C 95f Please make sure there is 15cm 6 inches space around the device to guarantee sound ventilation Please install from the bottom to the top lf there are more accessories connected in the rack please take precaution measures in case the rack power is overload 3 5 Connecting Power Supply Please check input voltage and device power button match or not We recommend you use UPS to guarantee steady operation DVR life span and other peripheral equipments operation such as cameras 3 6 Connecting Video Input and Output Devices 3 6 1 Connecting Video Input The video input interface is BNC The input video format includes PAL NTSC BNC 1 0Vp p 750 For HD SDI series product BNC 0 8VP P 750 The video signal should comply with your national standards The input video signal shall have high SNR low distortion low interference natural color and suitable lightness Guarantee the stability and reliability of the camera signal The camera shall be installed in a cool dry place away from direct sunlight inflammable explosive substance
239. n All channel D1 704x576 704x480 HD1 352x576 352x480 2CIF 704x288 704x240 CIF 52x288 352x240 QCIF AS 176x144 176x120 Support dual streams Extra stream resolution CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Image Quality 6 level image quality Adjustable Privacy mask Support one privacy mask of user defined size in full screen Support max 4 zones Hele Channel information time information and privacy mask zone Information TV Adjust Adjust TV output zone suitable to anamorphic video 31 Channel and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of display screen Color Hue brightness contrast saturation and gain setup for each channel Configuration Audio Audio Input 4 ch 200 2000mv 10KQ RCA 1 ch audio output 200 3000mv 5KO RCA Audio Output Bidirectional 1 ch audio talk input 200 3000mv 10KQ RCA Audio Channel Lock Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized user seeing secret video Channel name recording status screen lock status video loss status Hard Disk 2 built in SATA port Support 2 HDDs Hard Disk Audio PCM 28 8MByte h mallee Occupation Video 56 900MByte h Recording Mode Manual recording motion detection recording schedule recording and alarm recording Priority Manual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection recording gt schedule recording paypas Storage Mode Suppo
240. n as in Figure 4 36 Here you can set for business day and non business day In Figure 4 36 click set button you can see an interface is shown as in Figure 4 37 Here you can set your own setup for business day and non business day Anti dither Here you can set anti dither time The value ranges from 5 to 600s The anti dither time refers to the alarm signal lasts time It can be seem as the alarm signal activation stays such as the buzzer tour PTZ activation snapshot channel record The stay time 174 here does not include the latch time During the alarm process the alarm signal can begin an anti dither time if system detects the local alarm again The screen prompt alarm upload email and etc will not be activated For example if you set the anti dither time as 10 second you can see the each activation may last 10s if the local alarm is activated During the process if system detects another local alarm signal at the fifth second the buzzer tour PTZ activation snapshot record channel will begin another 10s while the screen prompt alarm upload email will not be activated again After 10s if system detects another alarm signal it can generate an alarm since the anti dither time is out Show message System can pop up a message to alarm you in the local host screen if you enabled this function Alarm upload System can upload the alarm signal to the network including alarm centre if you enabled current function
241. n output NO2 C2 on off button NO3 C3 NO5 C5 NCS is a group of NO NC activation output on off button NO4 C4 NO5 C5 NC5 CTRL 12V Control power output The power output is off when the alarm is canceled It is rated power output 485 A B 485 communication port They are used to control devices such as PTZ Please parallel connect 120TQ between A B cables if there are too many PTZ decoders 3 8 1 13 HD SDI 1080P 2U Series HD SDI 1080P 2U series interface is shown as below See Figure 3 14 AAA de ee NCS e GRL oa de A B a 5 6 El 28 4 910 1112 13141516 T T R R Figure 3 14 You can refer to the following sheet for alarm input and output information 1s 24 3 4s 5 ALARM 1 to ALARM 16 The alarm becomes active in low voltage 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 NO1 C1 The first four are four groups of normal open activation output NO2 C2 on off button NO3 C3 NO5 C5 NC5 is a group of NO NC activation output on off button NO4 C4 NO5 C5 NC5 CTRL 12V Control power output The power output is off when the alarm is canceled 12V It is rated power output e Earth cable 485 A B 485 communication port They are used to control devices such as PTZ Please parallel connect 120TQ between A B cables if there are too many PTZ decoders T T R R 4 pin full duplex RS485 port T T are the output cable and R R are input cable 485 A B 485 communication port They are used to control device
242. n when shut down to make sure only those proper people can turn off DVR Power AC90 264V 50 2 Hz Max 220W Power Consumptio 50W Exclude HDD n Login Logout and Shutdown General Parameter Working OC 2755 0 Temperatur e Working 10 90 Humidity Air 86kpa 106kpa Pressure Dimension 2U standard industrial case 440 W x460 D x89mm H Weight 7 0 8 0KG Exclude HDD Installation Desktop rack installation Mode 1 3 24 960H 2U Series Main High performance industrial embedded micro controller System Processor Embedded LINUX System Multiplex operations Multiple channel record multiple channel Resources playback and network operation simultaneously 76 User friendly graphical user interface Input Devices Input Devices Front panel USB mouse Arabic number English character donation and extension Chinese Input Method optional Shortcut Copy paste operation USB mouse right key shortcut menu double Function click USB mouse to switch screen Compression Viele Standard Compression nee Audio 4 CH composite 8 CH composite video 16 CH composite Video Input video input input NTSC PAL video input NTSC PAL BNC BNC 1 0Vp p 750 NTSC PAL BNC 1 0Vp p 750 1 0Vp p 750 1 ch PAL NTSC BNC 1 0VP P 750 composite video signal output Video monitor 1 ch VGA output Video Output 1 ch HDMI output 1 ch matrix output Support TV VGA HDMI video output at the
243. nagement User Integrated management for local user serial port user and network user Manageme Configurable user power nt Support user group and its corresponding rights modification No limit to the user or group amount rd Password modification __ Administrator can modify other user s password Authenticati an Account lock strategy Ce Five times login failure in thirty minutes may result in account lock Upgrade Web browser client end and update tool Password login protection to guarantee safety User friendly interface when login Provide the following options Logout shutdown restart Right authentication when shut down to make sure only those proper people can turn off DVR DC 12V Power General Consumptio lt 25W With adapter exclude HDD Parameter n Working 000 559 0 Temperatur e Working 10 90 Humidity Air 86kpa 106kpa Pressure 1 5U standard industrial case 440 W x410 D x70mm H Version Login Logout and Shutdown 49 Weight 3 5 4 5KG Exclude HDD Installation Desktop rack installation Mode 1 3 16 4HDD full D1 1 5U Entry level Series Main High performance industrial embedded micro controller System p rocessor Embedded LINUX os Embedded INK system Multiplex operations Multiple channel record multiple channel playback Resources and network operation simultaneously User friendly graphical user interface Devices Method optional
244. ncode setup for all channels Audio video enable box overlay button and the copy button is shield See Figure 5 11 Please highlight icon O to select the corresponding function a ENCODE Channel 1 Type Regular Extra Stream1 Compression H 264 H 264 Resolution D1 CIF Frame Rate FPS 6 Bit Rate Type Bit Rate Kb S 2048 I 160 Reference Bit Rate 768 4096Kb S 40 256Kb S Audio Video E Audio Format G711a OVERLAY SNAPSHOT Default Copy Cancel Figure 5 8 Cancel Figure 5 9 190 Cancel Figure 5 10 a ENCODE Channel 1 Type Regular Extra Stream1 Compression H 264 H 264 Resolution D1 CIF 7 Frame Rate FPS 6 Bit Rate Type CBR E Bit Rate Kb S 2048 y 160 Reference Bit Rate 763 4096Kb S 40 256Kb S Audio Video a Audio Format G711a SNAPSHOT Default Cancel Figure 5 11 5 3 3 Schedule Please refer to chapter 4 5 schedule 5 3 4 RS232 RS232 interface is shown as below There are five items See Figure 5 12 e Function There are various devices for you to select Console is for you to use the COM or mini end software to upgrade or debug the program The control keyboard is for you to control the device via the special keyboard Transparent COM adapter is to connect to the PC to transfer data directly Protocol COM is for card overlay function Network keyboard is for you to use the special keyboard to control the device PTZ matrix is to connect to the periphe
245. nd double click mouse System seiting interface is shown as below See Figure 5 2 DK SETTING X P C R 2 5 GENERAL ENCODE SCHEDULE RS232 NETWORK SI amp ALARM DETECT PAN TILT ZOOM DISPLAY DEFAULT Figure 5 2 5 3 1 General General setting includes the following items See _ Figure 5 3 O System time Here is for you to set system time eo Date format There are three types YYYYY MM DD MM DD YYYYY or DD MM YYYY Date separator There are three denotations to separate date dot beeline and solidus e DST Here you can set DST time and date Please enable DST function and then click set button You can see an interface is shown as in Figure 5 4 Here you can set start time and end time by setting corresponding week setup In Figure 5 4 enable date button you can see an interface is shown as in Figure 5 5 Here you can set start time and end time by setting corresponding date setup e Time format There are two types 24 hour mode or 12 hour mode e Language System supports various languages Chinese simplified Chinese Traditional English Italian Japanese French Spanish All languages listed here are optional Slight difference maybe found in various series e HDD full Here is for you to select working mode when hard disk is full There are two options stop recording or rewrite If current working HDD is overwritten or the current HDD is full 186 while the next HDD is no empty then system stops record
246. nd then click right limit button to set a right limit 242 Parameter Function Preset e Select Preset from the dropdown list e Turn the camera to the corresponding position and Input the preset value Click Add button to add a preset Tour Select Tour from the dropdown list Input preset value in the column Click Add preset button you have added one preset in the tour Repeat the above procedures you can add more presets in one tour Or you can click delete preset button to remove one preset from the tour Pattern Select Pattern from the dropdown list You can input pattern value and then click Start button to begin PTZ movement such as zoom focus iris direction and etc Then you can click Add button to set one pattern eo Please input the corresponding aux value here e You can select one option and then click AUX on or AUX off button Light and You can turn on or turn off the light wiper wiper 3D Intelligent Positioning Speed 1 8 O 0 PTZ PTZ Menu You can click this icon to display or hide the PTZ Figure 7 12 7 6 Image Relay out Select one monitor channel video and then click Image button in section 8 the interface is shown as Figure 7 13 7 6 1 Image Here you can adjust its brightness contrast hue and saturation Current channel border becomes green Or you can click Reset button to restore system default setup 243 Image Relay out lt 4 O gt Fi
247. network operation simultaneously User friendly graphical user interface Devices Method Optional Function USB mouse to switch screen Compression Video Standard Compressio H 264 n Audio Compressio G 711A n 4 CH composite video 8 CH composite video 16 CH composite Video Input input NTSC PAL input NTSC PAL video input BNC 1 0Vp p 750 BNC 1 0Vp p 750 NTSC PAL BNC 1 0Vp p 750 1 ch PAL NTSC BNC 1 0VP P 750 composite video signal output Video monitor Video 1 ch VGA output Output 1 ch HDMI output 1 ch matrix output Support TV VGA HDMI video output at the same time Real time Mode PAL 1f s to 25f s per channel and NTSC 1f s to 30f s Record per channel Speed Partition Touring schedule auto control PAL NTSC Real time monitor Resolution D1 704x576 704x480 PAL NTSC Playback 1 16 ch D1 704x576 704x480 CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 40 Support dual streams extra stream resolution CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Quality mask Support max 4 zones Information TV Adjust Adjust TV output zone suitable to anamorphic video Channel Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding Lock normally Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized user seeing secret video Channel Channel name recording status screen lock status video loss status Information and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of disp
248. ng Mode Priority Manual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection recording gt schedule recording Storage Mode Support channel record quota setup Recording 1 to 120 minutes single record duration Default setup is 60 minutes Length Playback Repeat When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Way Various search engines such as time type and channel search Playback Various fast play slow play speeds manual frame by frame playback and Mode reverse play mode Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Record and playback Various File Switch Ways Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto plays the next file in the current channel Multi There is 1 4 9 16 channel playback mode Playback Zoom Partial When in one window full screen playback mode you can select any zone t Backup HDD backup function Backup Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk and Mode etc Support network download and save View monitor channel remotely DVR configuration through client end and web browser Upgrade via client or browser to realize remote maintenance View alarm information such as motion detection and video loss via client Support network PTZ lens control File download backup and playback Multiple devices share information via corresponding softwa
249. nges from 1 to 150 Default value is 50 Recommended value is frame rate 2 Watermark This function allows you to verify the video is tampered or not enable Here you can select watermark bit stream watermark mode and watermark character Default character is DigitalCCTV The max length is 85 digit The character can only include number character and underline 7 8 1 2 2 Snapshot The snapshot interface is shown as in Figure 7 20 249 WEB suc STS gare AUTO TTR ANT Camel Encode Snapshot gt Conditions Channel 1 Mode Timing gt Channel Name Image Size CIF 352 240 Network 9 CF 2522 Event Quality 4 Storage Snapshot Frequency 1SPL Advanced Information Figure 7 20 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Parameter There are two modes Timing schedule and Event activation e Timing snapshot is valid during the specified period you set eo Activation snapshot only is valid when motion detect alarm camera masking alarm or local activation alarm occurs Image size It is the same with the resolution of the main stream Quality It is to set the image quality There are six levels It is to set snapshot frequency The value ranges from 1s to 7s Copy Click it you can copy current channel setup to other channel s 7 8 1 2 3 Video Overlay The video overlay interface is shown as in Figure 7 21 Snapshot type WEB sevice MIN ANITA ATINA ANT AVR Chann
250. nization playback and non synchronous playback The synchronization playback supports all channels and non synchronous playback only Supports accurately playback of current select channel 05 00 00 1 2 StartTime Type 02 38 27 R 04 00 00 R 05 00 00 R 87 00 00 R 03 00 00 R 09 00 00 R 10 00 00 R 11 00 00 R 12 00 00 R 13 00 00 R 14 00 00 R 15 00 00 R 16 00 00 R 17 00 00 R 18 00 00 R 19 00 00 R 20 00 00 R 21 00 00 R 21 54 14 R 22 00 40 R 23 00 00 R Stan Time 13 01 04 06 00 00 End Time 13 01 04 07 00 00 Size KB 25473 Y All Record Y Normal Alarm Y4 Motion Figure 4 14 4 4 3 Mark Playback Please make sure your purchased device support this function You can use this function only if you can see the mark playback icon on the Search interface Figure 4 12 When you are playback record you can mark the record when there is important information After playback you can use time or the mark key words to search corresponding record and then play lt is very easy for you to get the important video information e Add Mark When system is playback click Mark button you can go to the following interface See Figure 4 15 Add Mark Mark Time 2013 01 15 00 00 12 Mark Name Figure 4 15 eo Playback Mark During 1 window playback mode click mark file list button s in Figure 4 12 you can go to mark file list interface Double click one mark file you can begin playback from the mark time Pl
251. normal playback 93 Record Play previous aa In playback mode playback the previous video In normal playback or pause mode click this button to reverse Reverse Pause playback In reverse playback click this button to pause playback In playback mode playback the next video de NEK In menu setup go to down ward of the dropdown list In normal playback click this button to pause playback Pay AUSE In pause mode click this button to resume playback Window switch Click it to switch one window multiple window Up down direction key Playback mode turn the inner dial to realized frame by frame playback Only applies to some special versions USB port To connect USB storage device USB mouse Remote control indication light Jog inner dial Shuttle outer In real time monitor mode it works as left right direction key ring Playback mode counter clockwise to forward and clock wise to J backward Remote control indication light Status indication light Status The light is on if device operates properly Power indication PWR light Record light 1 32 It becomes on when system is recording 2 2 Rear Panel 2 2 1 General Mini 1U Series The 4 channel full D1 mini 1U series rear panel is shown as below See Figure 2 8 11 Power indication light 1 23 4 5 6 Figure 2 8 94 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information 6 HDMipot 8 Networ
252. o Loss Channel Enable Mi Period Alarm Out Latch Me Show Message Alarm Upload E e Email Record Channel GB PTZ Activation Select Delay WTour E Snapshot Buzzer Default Copy Figure 4 32 4 6 4 Camera Masking When someone viciously masks the lens or the output video is in one color due to the environments light change the system can alert you to guarantee video continuity Camera masking interface is shown as in Figure 4 33 You can enable Alarm output or Show message function when camera masking alarm occurs Sensitivity The value ranges from 1 to 6 lt mainly concerns the brightness The level 6 has the higher sensitivity than level 1 The default setup is 3 Tips You can enable preset tour pattern activation operation when video loss occurs Please refer to chapter 4 6 2 motion detection for detailed information Note In Detect interface copy paste function is only valid for the same type which means you can not copy a channel setup in video loss mode to camera masking mode e About Default function Since detection channel and detection type may not be the same system can only restore default setup of current detect type For example if you click Default button at the camera masking interface you can only restore default camera masking setup It is null for other detect types e System only enables camera masking function during the period you set here It is null for motion detect or v
253. o Output Input Output Input Output Power Button RS232 Port Atatritritatitatatatitata AB ov ERR eee ee Power Socket GND Port RS435 Bidirectional 3 PTZ Control Video SPOT Talk Input VGA _ Output Output HDMI Output 2 Network Switch Network User Network User Network User Network Keyboard Figure 2 47 2 3 9 2HDD CIF 1 5U Series The following figure is based on the 32 channel series product See Figure 2 48 119 l ob Alarm Alarm m Y eo Video Input Audio p Video Output Output Input Output Power Button GND Port 5 A Video SPOT VGA Input Output i TA Network Switch Network User Network User Network User Network Keyboard Figure 2 48 2 3 10 960H 4HDD 1 5U Series Please refer to Figure 2 49 for connection sample The following figure is based on the 16 channel series product 120 j Video Input i Bidirectional Alarm Output Alarm Input Video Output Talk Input i E 7y TE ol w RS485 PTZ Control Power On Off a o a H w Go E a py USB Port eSATA Port Bidirectional Power Input Power gt gt n Talk Input RS232 Port Port 9 H ej D Y Video Spot Output Audio Audio 3 c input Output SE ld VGA Output HDMI Output Network Switch twork User Network User Network User Ne Figure 2 49 2 3 11 960H 2HDD 1 5U Series Pleas
254. od 6 00 lat E Detar Cancel Figure 4 18 4 2012 06 18 gt 14 21 28 Cancel Figure 4 19 4 5 1 1 Quick Setup Copy function allows you to copy one channel setup to another After setting in channel 1 click Copy button you can go to interface Figure 4 20 You can see current channel name is grey such as channel 1 Now you can select the channel you wan to paste such as channel 5 6 7 If you wan to save current setup of channel 1 to all channels you can click the first box ALL Click 164 the OK button to save current copy setup Click the OK button in the Record interface the copy function succeeded Please note if you select ALL in Figure 4 20 the record setup of all channels are the same and the Copy button becomes hidden Cancel Figure 4 20 4 5 1 2 Redundancy Redundancy function allows you to memorize record file in several disks When there is file damage occurred in one disk there is a spare one in the other disk You can use this function to maintain data reliability and safety In the main menu from Setting to Schedule you can highlight redundancy button to enable this function See Figure 4 18 In the main menu from Advanced to HDD management you can set one or more disk s as redundant You can select from the dropdown list See Figure 4 21 System auto overwrites old files once hard disk is full Please note only read write disk or read only disk can backup
255. ode Priority Manual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection Record and recording gt schedule recording l UE eee Support channel record quota setup 1 to 120 minutes single record duration Default setup is 60 minutes Length Playback Repeat When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Way Record Various search engines such as time type and channel search Playback Various fast play slow play speeds manual frame by frame playback and Mode reverse play mode Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Various File Switch Ways Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto plays the next file in the current channel Playback Support mark playback Multi There is 1 4 9 16 channel playback mode channel It may vary due to different series Playback Switch between self adaptive screen full screen when playback Zoom Partial When in one window full screen playback mode you can select any zone Enlargemen to activate partial enlargement function t Backup HDD backup function Backup Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk and Mode etc Support network download and save View alarm information such as external alarm motion detection and Network video loss via client control Support network PTZ lens control File downlo
256. of IPv4 or domain Please follow the steps listed below to use this function Please set proxy server address port and sub device name at the device end Please enable the auto register function the device can auto register to the proxy server 1 The setup interface is shown as in Figure 5 38 Important Do not input network default port such as TCP port number REGISTER Beret No 1 Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 8000 0 Default Cancel Figure 5 38 2 The proxy server software developed from the SDK Please open the software and input the global setup Please make sure the auto connection port here is the same as the port you set in the previous step 3 Now you can add device Please do not input default port number such as the TCP port in the mapping port number The device ID here shall be the same with the ID you input in Figure 5 38 Click Add button to complete the setup 209 4 Now you can boot up the proxy server When you see the network status is Y it means your registration is OK You can view the proxy server when the device is online Important The server IP address can also be domain But you need to register a domain name before you run proxy device server 5 3 6 Alarm Please refer to chapter 4 7 Alarm Setup and Activation 5 3 Detect Please refer to chapter 4 6 Detect 5 3 8 Pan Tilt Zoom The pan tilt zoom setup includes the following items Please select channel first See Figure 5 39 Protocol
257. omes valid after you set time sync PC You can click this button to save the system time as your PC current time DST Here you can set day night save time begin time and end time You can set according to the date format or according to the week format NTP You can check the box to enable NTP function NTP server You can set the time server address Port It is to set the time server port Interval It is to set the sync periods between the device and the time server 7 8 5 1 3 Holiday Setup Holiday setup interface is shown as in Figure 7 66 276 Here you can check the box here to enable this function and then set 7 8 5 2 Account Channel Network Event Storage gt Account gt Display gt Default gt Import amp Export gt Auto Maintain gt Upgrade gt RS232 gt PTZ Advanced Information Note 7 8 5 2 1 General Date amp Time Holiday Enable Holiday Setup Figure 7 66 For the character in the following user name or the user group name system max supports 6 digits The space in the front or at the end of the string is null The valid string includes character number and underline The user amount is 20 and the group amount is 8 when the device is shipped out of the factory The factory default setup includes two levels user and admin You can set the corresponding group and then set the rights for the respective user in the specified groups User manage
258. on Desktop rack installation Mode 1 3 20 960H 4HDD 1 5U Series ii rr ee Main High performance industrial embedded micro controller System Processor OS Embedded LINUX System Multiplex operations Multiple channel record multiple channel Resources playback and network operation simultaneously User friendly graphical user interface 63 Input Devices Front panel USB mouse remote control Arabic number English character donation and extension Chinese Input Method optional Shortcut Copy paste operation USB mouse right key shortcut menu double Function click USB mouse to switch screen Compression y Standard dco H 264 Compression G711A G711U PON Compression 4 CH composite 8 CH composite video 16 CH composite Video Input video input input NTSC PAL video input NTSC PAL BNC BNC 1 0Vp p 750 NTSC PAL BNC 1 0Vp p 750 1 0Vp p 750 1 ch PAL NTSC BNC 1 0VP P 750 composite video signal output Video monitor 1 ch VGA output Video Output 1 ch HDMI output 1 ch matrix output Support TV VGA HDMI video output at the same time Video Support PAL NTSC Real time Mode PAL 1f s to 25f s per channel and NTSC 1f s to 30f s Record Speed per channel E e 1 4 1 4 8 9 windows 1 4 8 9 16 windows Video Partition windows Optional Monitor Support monitor tour functions such as alarm motion detection and Touring schedule auto control PAL 700TVL 50f s NTSC 700TVL 60f s Real time
259. onnection status and IP address if there is a connection 201 NETWORK SETTING Y IP FILTER Y NTP v MULTICAST PPPOE v DDNS v UPNP 3G SETTING Z EMAILA FTP ALARM SERVER SNMP REGISTER Default Trusted Sites 0 time windows com 60 239 255 42 42 Private DDNS Port Forwarding MailServer 25 Record FTP 0 0 0 0 Private 10 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 8000 Cancel Figure 5 25 The WIFI interface is shown as below See Figure 5 26 Auto connect WIFI Check the box here system automatically connects to the previous WIFI hotspot Refresh You can click it to search the hotspot list again It can automatically add the information such as the password if you have set it before Disconnect Here you can click it to turn off the connection Connect Here you can click it to connect to the hotspot System needs to turn off current connection and then connect to a new hotspot if there is connection of you selected one Auto Connect WIFI MN i O J Wh gt TP LINK_52019C 10539 xingjiaibn TP LINK_076ACA 14029 10388 ERE Refresh Connection a D WIFI SETTING ignal Intensity Current Hotspot No connection IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway DisConnect Cancel Apply Figure 5 26 202 WIFI Connection Connection Status Verification Type Encrypt Type kqy No connection WEP AUTO Connection Password lese 0091 IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway
260. ork View alarm information such as external alarm motion detection and control video loss via client Support network PTZ lens control File download backup and playback Multiple devices share information via corresponding software such as professional surveillance software PSS Duplex transparent COM Network alarm input and output Support network multiple window preview function Bidirectional audio Motion Zone setup support 396 330 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection Motion Detection zones Detection and Alarm Various sensitivity levels Alarm can activate record or external alarm or screen message prompt Video Loss message in specified period Control Support analog alarm signal to specific alarm output channel 4 ch alarm input You 8 ch alarm input You 16 ch alarm input can set normal open can set normal open or You can set or normal close type to normal close type to normal open or select the alarm select the alarm type gt normal close type type to select the alarm type Alarm Output Alarm Relay 30V DC 2A 125VAC 1A activation alarm USB Interface 4 USB 2 0 ports Interface Network 1 RJ45 10M 100M 1000M self adaptable Ethernet port connection PTZ control port as Support various PTZ control protocols RS232 Ordinary COM Debug keyboard connection and transparent serial port COM input and output via network Hard Disk Display HDD current status Information Data Stream Da
261. ous File Switch Ways Record and Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto plays the next file in the current channel Multi channel There is 1 4 9 16 channel playback mode Playback It may vary due to different series Switch between self adaptive screen full screen when playback Partial When in one window full screen playback mode you can select any Enlargement zone to activate partial enlargement function Backup HDD backup function Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk Backup Mode USB burner and etc Support peripheral eSATA backup device Support network download and save View monitor channel remotely DVR configuration through client end and web browser Upgrade via client or browser to realize remote maintenance View alarm information such as external alarm motion detection and video loss via client Support network PTZ lens control Network File download backup and playback control Multiple devices share information via corresponding software such as professional surveillance software PSS Duplex transparent COM Network alarm input and output Bidirectional audio Support dual network cards mode such as multiple address mode fault tolerance and load balance Network Function 68 Motion
262. owing possibilities e Setup is not correct e Battery contact is not correct or voltage is too low e Crystal is broken 11 DVR can not control PTZ There are following possibilities e Front panel PTZ error PTZ decoder setup connection or installation is not correct e Cable connection is not correct PTZ setup is not correct PTZ decoder and DVR protocol is not compatible 297 PTZ decoder and DVR address is not compatible When there are several decoders please add 120 Ohm between the PTZ decoder A B cables furthest end to delete the reverberation or impedance matching Otherwise the PTZ control is not stable The distance is too far 12 Motion detection function does not work There are following possibilities Period setup is not correct Motion detection zone setup is not correct Sensitivity is too low For some versions there is hardware limit 13 Can not log in client end or web There are following possibilities For Windows 98 or Windows ME user please update your system to Windows 2000 sp4 Or you can install client end software of lower version Please note right now our DVR is not compatible with Windows VISTA control ActiveX control has been disabled No dx8 1 or higher Please upgrade display card driver Network connection error Network setup error Password or user name is invalid Client end is not compatible with DVR program 14 There is only mosaic no video when preview or playbac
263. path Click Start button the snapshot picture can be saved to the specified path Mark button Please note this function is for some series product only Please make sure there is a mark button in the playback control pane You can refer to chapter 4 4 3 for detailed information Olt is to display the record type and its period in current search criteria ein 4 window playback mode there are corresponding four time bars In other playback mode there is only one time bar Use the mouse to click one point of the color zone in the time bar system begins playback The time bar is beginning with O o clock when you are setting the configuration The time bar zooms in the period of the current playback time when you are playing the file The green color stands for the regular record file The red color stands for the external alarm record file The yellow stands for the motion detect record file e he option includes 24H 12H 1H and 30M The smaller the unit the larger the Time bar 220M rate You can accurately set the time in the time bar to playback the record unit Time bar OThe time bar is beginning with O o clock when you are setting the configuration The time bar zooms in the period of the current playback time when you are playing the file 158 Check the file again you can cancel current selection System max supports to display 32 files from one channel After you clip on record file click Backup button you can save
264. port please use crossover cable to connect the PC and use the straight cable to connect to the switcher or router 2 3 Connection Sample 2 3 1 Smart 1U Mini 1U Series Please refer to Figure 2 40 for connection sample The following figure is based on the 16 channel 1HDD Full D1 Smart 1U series product Video Input Video Output VGA Output USB Port Power Input Port Network Switch a Network User Network User Network User Network Keyboard Figure 2 40 2 3 2 General 1U Series Please refer to Figure 2 41 for connection sample The following figure is based on the 8 channel series product 112 Y A eS Gr 3 4 nanmi rey wo Alarm Input mn 9 RS485 Video Input Audio Input Alarm Output PTZ Control Video Output Audio Output Power Switch USB Port Tank VIDEO IN AUDIO IN 2 Power Input LN Video Spot S Output Bidirectional Talk Input HDMI Output VGA Output Network Switch Online User Online User Online User Network Keyboard Online User Figure 2 41 2 3 3 960H 1U Series Please refer to Figure 2 42 for connection sample The following figure is based on the 8 channel series product 113 PE e r gt 1 eA Audio Input Audio Output Alarm Output Video Input Video Output Alarm Input P RS232 Port E A rT vVuvuvuYVde O lat Paw ws L Ajo GREE O oa oc am ur i rr
265. pport dual network cards mode such as multiple address mode fault tolerance and load balance Motion Zone setup support 396 330 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection Detection Zones Motion Detection and Alarm Various sensitivity levels Alarm can activate record or external alarm or screen message prompt Video Loss Alarm can activate external alarm or screen message prompt External Alarm Support record activation function or activate external alarm or screen message in specified period Control Support analog alarm signal to specific alarm output channel 4 ch alarm input You 8 ch alarm input You 16 ch alarm input can set normal open can set normal open or You can set Alarm Input or normal close type to normal close type to normal open or select the alarm select the alarm type gt normal close type type to select the alarm type Alarm Relay USB Interface connection PTZ control port HELIS Support various PTZ control protocols RS232 Ordinary COM Debug keyboard connection and transparent serial port COM input and output via network Hard Disk Information Data Stream Data stream statistics for each channel in wave mode Statistics System Information Display HDD current status Backup to 1024 log files Support various search engines such as time and type Display version information channel amount alarm input and output amount system version and release date Display current on line u
266. put System Information Loa statistics Backup to 1024 log files Support various search engines such as time and type Display version information channel amount alarm input and output Version amount system version and release date On line user Display current on line user Multi lever user management various management modes Integrated management for local user serial port user and network User Management User Management user Configurable user power No limit to the user or group amount Password Administrator can modify other user s password Five times login failure in thirty minutes may result in account lock Upgrade Web browser client end and update tool Password login protection to guarantee safety User friendly interface when login Provide the following options Login Logout and Shutdown Logout shutdown restart Right authentication when shut down to make sure only those proper people can turn off DVR Power DC 12V Power General Consumption lt 25W With adapter exclude HDD Parameter 39 VC 39956 Temperature Humidity 1U standard industrial case 375 W x280 D x50mm H Weight 1 5 2 5KG Exclude HDD Installation Desktop installation Mode 1 3 13 Full D1 1 5U Series Main High performance industrial embedded micro controller System Processor Embedded LINUX System Multiplex operations Multiple channel record multiple channel playback Resources and
267. put yP yP p select the alarm type select the alarm type normal close type to select the alarm type Alarm 3 channel relay output Output Alarm Relay 30V DC 2A 125V AC 1A activation alarm gt 2 USB 2 0 ports Interface Interface Network 1 RJ45 10M 100M 1000M self adaptable Ethernet port connection PTZ control port ERES Support various PTZ control protocols RS232 Ordinary COM Debug keyboard connection and transparent serial port COM input and output via network Hard Disk Display HDD current status Information Data Data stream statistics for each channel in wave mode Stream Statistics System Information UY Log Backup to 1024 log files statistics Support various search engines such as time and type Display version information channel amount alarm input and output Version amount system version and release date Display current on line user Multi lever user management various management modes User Integrated management for local user serial port user and network user Manageme Configurable user power nt Support user group and its corresponding rights modification No limit to the user or group amount Password Password modification Authenticati Administrator can modify other user s password User Management on Account lock strategy Five times login failure in thirty minutes may result in account lock Upgrade Web browser client end and update tool Password login pro
268. r 4 4 3 for detailed information Please note only the product of this icon supports mark function 157 Play Pause There are three ways for you to begin playback e The play button Double click the valid period of the time bar e Double click the item in the file list In slow play mode click it to switch between play pause Backward play In normal play mode left click the button the file begins backward play Click it again to pause current play In backward play mode click Ii to restore normal play In playback mode click it to play the next or the previous section You can click continuously when you are watching the files from the same channel In normal play mode when you pause current play you can click and gt to begin frame by frame playback In frame by frame playback mode click IIl to restore normal playback Slow play In playback mode click it to realize various slow play modes such as slow play 1 slow play 2 and etc Playback Fast forward control In playback mode click to realize various fast play modes such as fast play 1 fast play 2 and etc Note The actual play speed has relationship with the software version The volume of the playback Click the snapshot button in the full screen mode the system can snapshot 1 picture System supports custom snap picture saved path Please connect the peripheral device first click snap button on the full screen mode you can select or create
269. r button to exit Do al DETECT Event Type Motion Detect 7 Channel Enable Mm Region Select Sensitivity Period Set Anti dither Alarm Out Latch RAE A Send Email W Record Channel Be PTZ Activation Select Delay Mi Tour Snapshot Buzzer Default Cancel Figure 4 25 Figure 4 26 170 PTZ Activation CAM 2 CAM 4 CAM 6 CAM 8 CAM 10 CAM 12 CAM 14 CAM 16 CAM 11 CAM 13 CAM 15 Oo 19 19 a ao oOo oOo O S Oo Oo S O 19 9 O Cancel Figure 4 27 Setup Default Cancel Figure 4 28 Setup Work Day Z Setup Y 00 00 24 00 00 00 24 00 00 00 24 00 Copy DEN Cancel Figure 4 29 171 Figure 4 30 III III Figure 4 31 4 6 3 Video Loss In Figure 4 25 select video loss from the type list You can see the interface is shown as in Figure 4 32 This function allows you to be informed when video loss phenomenon occurred You can enable alarm output channel and then enable show message function Tips e You can enable preset tour pattern activation operation when video loss occurs o Please refer to chapter 4 7 for local alarm setup information except there is no device type anti dither video matrix function e System only enables video loss function during the period you set here It is null for motion detect or camera masking type 172 DETECT Event Type Vide
270. r function Interval Here is for you to adjust transparency The value ranges from 5 to 120s The default setup is 5s Split Here you can set window mode and channel group System can support 1 4 8 9 16 25 36 window according to device channel amount Motion Here you can set motion detect tour alarm tour window mode tour Alarm System supports 1 8 window now tour 7 8 5 3 4 Video Matrix The video matrix interface is shown as in Figure 7 76 Here you can set video matrix output channel and interval It supports 1 4 9 16 spot tour Note e HD SDI series product does not support this function e 960H series only supports single window spot tour 282 WEB service Channel GUI Video Matrix Network P Event ivi Enable Tour Interval 5 Second 5 120 Storage System Split View 1 kd gt General 8 Channel combine gt Account 2 3 3 N gt Default p p dE E El E El El el gt Import amp Export gt Auto Maintain gt Upgrade co ao on gt RS232 gt PTZ Advanced Information Default Figure 7 76 7 8 5 4 Default The default setup interface is shown as in Figure 7 77 Here you can select Channel Network Event Storage System Or you can check the All box to select all items Channel Default Network All Channel Network Event Storage System Event Storage System gt General gt Account gt Display gt Import amp Export gt Auto Maintain gt
271. r group amount Password modification y Administrator can modify other user s password Authenticati on Account lock strategy o Five times login failure in thirty minutes may result in account lock Upgrade Web browser client end and update tool Password login protection to guarantee safety Version Password User friendly interface when login Provide the following options Logout Login Logout and Shutdown shutdown restart Right authentication when shut down to make sure only those proper people can turn off DVR DC 12V Power Consumptio n Working 0 C 4755 C Temperatur e Working 10 90 Humidity Air 86kpa 106kpa Pressure Dimension 325 W x242 D x55mm H General Parameter lt 15W With adapter exclude HDD 20 Weight 1 25KG Exclude HDD Installation Desktop installation Mode 1 3 7 Enhanced 2CIF Real time Mini 1U Series Main High performance industrial embedded micro controller System p rocessor Embedded LINUX System Multiplex operations Multiple channel record multiple channel playback Resources and network operation simultaneously User friendly graphical user interface Front panel USB mouse remote control Devices Input Arabic number English character donation and extension Chinese Method optional Function USB mouse to switch screen Compression Video Standard Compressio H 264 n Audio n Video Input 16 CH composite video inp
272. ral matrix control Baud rate You can select proper baud rate Data bit You can select proper data bit The value ranges from 5 to 8 Stop bit There are three values 1 1 5 2 Parity there are five choices none odd even space mark System default setup is e Function Console e Baud rate 115200 e Data bit 8 191 Stop bit 1 Parity None After completing all the setups please click save button system goes back to the previous menu Function Console Baudrate 115200 Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Default Cancel Figure 5 12 5 3 5 Network Here is for you to input network information The single network adapter interface is shown as in Figure 5 13 and the dual network adapters interface for some series product only is shown as in Figure 5 14 IP Version There are two options IPv4 and IPv6 Right now system supports these two IP address format and you can access via them MAC address The host in the LAN can get a unique MAC address It is for you to access in the LAN It is read only IP address Here you can use up down button A W or input the corresponding number to input IP address Then you can set the corresponding subnet mask the default gateway Subnet prefix The input value ranges from 0 to 128 It is to mark a specified network MAC address Usually it includes an organization of multiple level Default gateway Here you can input the default gateway Please note system needs to check the validity of
273. ration Default setup is 60 minutes Length Playback Repeat Way When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Record Search Various search engines such as time type and channel Playback Various fast play slow play speeds manual frame by frame playback Mode and reverse play mode Various File Switch Ways Record and Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto plays the next file in the current channel Multi channel There is 1 4 9 16 channel playback mode Playback It may vary due to different series Switch between self adaptive screen full screen when playback Partial When in one window full screen playback mode you can select any Enlargement zone to activate partial enlargement function Backup HDD backup function Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk ee USB burner and etc Support network download and save View monitor channel remotely DVR configuration through client end and web browser Upgrade via client or browser to realize remote maintenance reer View alarm information such as external alarm motion detection and 5 video loss via client Support network PTZ lens control Network File download backup and playback control Multiple devices share information via corresponding software such
274. re such as professional surveillance software PSS Support network multiple window preview function Motion Zone setup support 396 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection zones Motion Detection Various sensitivity levels Detection and Alarm can activate record or screen message prompt Alarm Video Loss Alarm can activate screen message prompt External N A Alarm Manual N A Control Alarm N A Output Alarm Relay Network Function Network control 10 RS485 N A RS232 N A System Hard Disk Display HDD current status Information Information Data Data stream statistics for each channel in wave mode Stream Statistics statistics Support various search engines such as time and type E ersion i amount system version and release date User Multi lever user management various management modes Management User Integrated management for local user serial port user and network user Manageme Configurable user power nt Support user group and its corresponding rights modification No limit to the user or group amount SS Word Password modification Administrator can modify other user s password Authenticati An Account lock strategy Five times login failure in thirty minutes may result in account lock Upgrade Web browser client end and update tool Password login protection to guarantee safety User friendly interface when login Provide the following options Logout shutdown restar
275. recording gt schedule recording paypa Storage Mode Support channel record quota setup 1 to 120 minutes single record duration Default setup is 60 minutes Length Playback Repeat Way When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Record Search Various search engines such as time type and channel Playback Various fast play slow play speeds manual frame by frame playback Mode and reverse play mode Various File Switch Ways Record and Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto plays the next file in the current channel Playback Way Support mark playback Multi channel There is 1 4 9 16 channel playback mode Playback It may vary due to different series Switch between self adaptive screen full screen when playback Partial When in one window full screen playback mode you can select any Enlargement zone to activate partial enlargement function Backup HDD backup function Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk Backup Mode USB burner and etc Support peripheral eSATA Does not support disk array enclosure Support network download and save View monitor channel remotely DVR configuration through client end and web browser Upgrade via client or browser to realize remote maintenance ld Netw
276. reen playback mode you can select any zone Enlargemen to activate partial enlargement function t Backup HDD backup function Backu Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk USB Mode p burner and etc Support peripheral eSATA backup device Support network download and save View monitor channel remotely DVR configuration through client end and web browser Upgrade via client or browser to realize remote maintenance View alarm information such as external alarm motion detection and video loss via client Support network PTZ lens control File download backup and playback Multiple devices share information via corresponding software such as professional surveillance software PSS Duplex transparent COM Network alarm input and output Bidirectional audio Network Function Network control Motion Motion Detection Detection and Alarm Zone setup support 396 330 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection zones Various sensitivity levels Alarm can activate record or external alarm or screen message prompt Video Loss Alarm can activate external alarm or screen message prompt Alarm can activate external alarm or screen message prompt Alarm message in specified period Manual Enable or disable alarm input channel Control 4 ch alarm input You 8 ch alarm input You 16 ch alarm input can set normal open can set normal open You can set normal Alarm Input or normal c
277. remotely Click the search wD 03004 wN 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 15 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 15 2012 06 18 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 00 00 42 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Mi 4 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 18 2012 06 16 2012 06 18 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 2012 06 19 16 16 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 Zee 25 23 00 00 0i O1 02 02 02 03 03 04 1 23 00 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 700 00 00 00 00 03 00 00 00 00 o simedm _ Begin Tine ______ Bnd Tine __ File type omnia See Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S Common Main S
278. rface working with the direction buttons to select the record channel Click this button for at least 1 5 seconds system can go to the Manual Record interface 11 Direction keys Switch current activated control go to left or right In playback mode click up down button to switch playback channel In 1 window playback mode click left right button to control playback speed Aux function such as switch the PTZ menu enable disable reuse button go to the menu and one window Auxiliary key In 1 ch monitor mode pop up assistant function PTZ control and Video color PTZ control interface In motion detection interface working with direction keys to complete setup character switch channel input method 2 5 Mouse Control Left click System pops up password input dialogue box if you have not logged in mouse In real time monitor mode you can go to the main menu When you have selected one menu item left click mouse to view menu content Implement the control operation Modify checkbox or motion detection status Click combo box to pop up drop down list 129 In input box you can select input methods Left click the corresponding button on the panel you can input numeral English character small capitalized Here stands for backspace button __ stands for space button In English input mode _ stands for input a backspace icon and lt stands for deleting the previous character In numeral inpu
279. ring scheduled video recording In the formula c means total number of channels in one DVR Step 4 According to Formula 4 to calculate total capacity accumulation q that is needed for all channels in DVR during alarm video recording including motion detection qr Dm xa 4 i In the formula a means alarm occurrence rate 301 Appendix B Compatible Backup Device List Compatible USB drive list NOTE Please upgrade the DVR firmware to latest version to ensure the accuracy of the table below If you use the USB drive please confirm the format FAT or FAT32 Manufacturer Model _ _ _ ______ Capacity _ Cruzer Micro SanDisk cruzer mirco 2G SanDisk cruzer mirco 8G SanDisk Ti Cool 2G SanDisk Hongjiao 4G 30 NO Compatible SD Card List Please refer to the following sheet for compatible SD card brand SDHC2 Compatible Portable HDD List Please refer to the following sheet for compatible portable HDD brand Brand Model Capacity YDStar YDstar HDD box lomega RPHD CG Compatible USB DVD Burner List NOTE Please upgrade the DVR firmware to latest version to ensure the accuracy of the table below And you can use the USB cable with the model recommended to set USB burner Manufacturer Moe _ S DRX S70U TW200D Compatible SATA DVD Burner List NOTE Please upgrade the DVR firmware to latest version to ensure the accuracy of the table below Pioneer DVR 215CHG Panasonic SW 9588 C
280. ror net disconnection IP conflict and MAC conflict See Figure 7 49 through Figure 7 54 WEB service Channel No Disk Network Enable Alarm Out Event gt Video Detect gt Alarm Latch Show Message Storage System Advanced Information WEB service Channel No Disk Network Enable Event Alarm Out gt Video Detect gt Alarm se Show Message Storage System Advanced Information WEB service Channel No Disk Network Enable Alarm Out Event gt Video Detect gt Alarm EN Storage System Advanced Information WERB service Channel No Disk Network Enable Event O Alarm Out gt Video Detect gt Namn Latch CI show Message Storage O Record Channel System Delay Advanced Information MAA ee Disk Error Disk No Space Net Disconnection IP Conflict MAC Conflict E nAg 10 Second 1 300 C Send Email Alarm Upload Buzzer LJ Message Figure 7 49 Disk Error Disk No Space Net Disconnection IP Conflict MAC Conflict Second 1 300 C Send Email Alarm Upload Buzzer LJ Message Figure 7 50 Disk Error Disk No Space Net Disconnection IP Conflict MAC Conflict Less Than 20 Second 1 300 LJ Send Email Alarm Upload LJ Buzzer LJ message Figure 7 51 IP Conflict MAC Conflict TAi 10 Second 1 300 Cl Send Email O Buzzer CI Message alla lle ls l o J z Ls 10 Second 10 300 Figure 7 52 269 WEB service e Piaypack tia s
281. rt channel record quota setup 1 to 120 minutes single record duration Default setup is 60 minutes Length Playback Repeat Way When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Record Search Various search engines such as time type and channel Playback Various fast play slow play speeds manual frame by frame playback Mode and reverse play mode Various File Switch Ways Record and Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto plays the next file in the current channel Playback Way Support mark playback Multi channel There is 1 4 9 16 channel playback mode Playback It may vary due to different series Switch between self adaptive screen full screen when playback Partial When in one window full screen playback mode you can select any Enlargement zone to activate partial enlargement function Backup HDD backup function Backup Mode Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk USB burner and etc Support network download and save View monitor channel remotely DVR configuration through client end and web browser Upgrade via client or browser to realize remote maintenance View alarm information such as external alarm motion detection and video loss via client Support network PTZ lens control File downloa
282. ry level Series Main High performance industrial embedded micro controller System Processor Embedded LINUX System Multiplex operations Multiple channel record multiple channel playback Resources and network operation simultaneously User friendly graphical user interface Input Front panel USB mouse Devices Input Arabic number English character donation and extension Chinese Method optional Shortcut Copy paste operation USB mouse right key shortcut menu double click Function USB mouse to switch screen 46 Compression Standard Video Compressio H 264 n Audio Compressio G711A G711U PCM n 4 CH composite video 8 CH composite video 16 CH composite input NTSC PAL input NTSC PAL video input BNC 1 0Vp p 750 BNC 1 0Vp p 750 NTSC PAL BNC 1 0Vp p 750 Video Input 1 ch PAL NTSC BNC 1 0VP P 750 composite video signal output 1 ch VGA output 1 ch HDMI output 1 ch matrix output Support multiple window output mode Support TV VGA HDMI video output at the same time Video Standard Support PAL NTSC Real time Mode PAL 1f s to 25f s per channel and NTSC 1f s to 30f s Record per channel Speed Partition Touring schedule auto control PAL NTSC Real time monitor D1 704x576 704x480 Video monitor Video Output Resolution PALINTSC ayback All channel D1 704x576 704x480 HD1 352x576 352x480 2CIF 704x288 704x240 CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x1
283. s Window Switch between self adaptive screen full screen when playback Zoom Partial When in one window full screen playback mode you can select any zone Enlargemen to activate partial enlargement function t Backup function HDD backup Backup Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk USB Mode burner and etc Support peripheral eSATA backup device 41 Tt Support network download and save View monitor channel remotely DVR configuration through client end and web browser Upgrade via client or browser to realize remote maintenance aS eee View alarm information such as external alarm motion detection and j video loss via client Network Support network PTZ lens control control File download backup and playback Multiple devices share information via corresponding software such as professional surveillance software PSS Duplex transparent COM Network alarm input and output Bidirectional audio Motion Zone setup support 396 330 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection Detection Zones Various sensitivity levels Alarm can activate record or external alarm or screen message prompt Video Loss Alarm can activate external alarm or screen message prompt External Support record activation function or activate external alarm or screen Alarm message in specified period Motion Detection and Alarm Manual Enable or disable alarm input channel Alarm Support analog alarm signal
284. s 37778 You can input the actual port number if necessary HTTP port The default value is 80 You can input the actual port number if necessary RTSP port The default value is 554 7 8 2 3 WIFI Please note this function is for the device of WIFI module The WIFI interface is shown as in Figure 7 26 253 WEB service Channel WIFI Search SSID etworl Y WIFI Auto Connect gt TCPAP SSID List gt Connection gt 3G gt PPPoE gt DDNS gt IP Filter gt Email gt UPnP gt SNMP gt Multicast WIFI Working Info Current Hotspot IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway gt Alarm Centre Event Storage System Advanced information Figure 7 26 Please check the box to enable WIFI function and then click the Search SSID button Now you can view all the wireless network information in the following list Double click a name to connect to it Click Refresh button you can view latest connection status 7 8 2 4 3G 7 8 2 4 1 CDMA GPRS The CDMA GPRS interface is shown as in Figure 7 27 WEB service AAN ETT MT CDMA GPRS Setup Mobile Setup Channel APIO Th sig WLAN Type I Enable gt TCPAP gt Connection gt WIFI gt PPPoE gt DDNS gt IP Filter gt Email gt UPnP gt SNMP APN AUTH Dial No User Name Password Pulse Interval WLAN Status IP Address T Dial SMS Activate Second gt Multicast gt Alarm Centre Event Storage Wirele
285. s OK or not Usually the return TTL value should be less than 255 e Open the IE and then input DVR IP address e System can automatically download latest web control and the new version can overwrite the previous one e f you want to un install the web control please run uninstall webrec3 0 bat Or you can go to C Program Files webrec to remove single folder Please note before you un install please close all web pages otherwise the un installation might result in error e Current series product supports various browsers such as Safari firebox browser Google browser Device only support 1 channel monitor on the Apple PC 7 2 Login Open IE and input DVR address in the address column For example if your DVR IP is 10 10 3 16 then please input http 10 10 3 16 in IE address column See Figure 7 1 Blank Page Windows Internet Explorer SIZ A about blank is s Input your IP we a Blank Page a E mh b Page v Tools y wi address here Internet EL 100 7 Figure 7 1 System pops up warning information to ask you whether install webrec cab control or not Please click yes button If you can t download the ActiveX file please modify your settings as follows See Figure 7 2 238 Internet Options kata General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a zone to view or change security settings Internet Local intranet Internet Sites ws
286. s and etc The camera and the DVR should have the same grounding to ensure the normal operation of the camera Guarantee stability and reliability of the transmission line Please use high quality sound shielded BNC Please select suitable BNC model according to the transmission distance If the distance is too long you should use twisted pair cable and you can add video compensation devices or use optical fiber to ensure video quality You should keep the video signal away from the strong electromagnetic interference especially the high tension current Keep connection lugs in well contact The signal line and shielded wire should be fixed firmly and in well connection Avoid dry joint lap welding and oxidation 3 6 2 Connecting Video Output Video output includes a BNC PAL NTSC1 0Vp p 750 output a VGA output and HDMI output System supports BNC VGA and HDMI output at the same time 136 When you are using pc type monitor to replace the monitor please pay attention to the following points To defer aging do not allow the pc monitor to run for a long time e Regular demagnetization will keep device maintain proper status eo Keep it away from strong electromagnetic interference devices Using TV as video output device is not a reliable substitution method You also need to reduce the working hour and control the interference from power supply and other devices The low quality TV may result in device damage 3 Connec
287. s may result in account lock Upgrade Web browser client end and update tool Password login protection to guarantee safety Version Password User friendly interface when login Provide the following options Logout Login Logout and Shutdown shutdown restart Right authentication when shut down to make sure only those proper people can turn off DVR DC 12V Power General Consumptio lt 25W With adapter exclude HDD Parameter n Working OC 4755 Temperatur e Working 10 90 Humidity Air 86kpa 106kpa Pressure 1 5U standard industrial case 440 W x410 D x70mm H Weight 3 5 4 5KG Exclude HDD Installation Desktop rack installation Mode WN 1 3 18 2HDD CIF 1 5U Series Main High performance industrial embedded micro controller System p rocessor Resources and network operation simultaneously Devices Method optional Function USB mouse to switch screen Compression Video Standard Compressio H 264 n Audio Compressio G711A G711U PCM n 24 CH composite video input 32 CH composite video input NTSC PAL BNC 1 0Vp p 750 NTSC PAL BNC 1 0Vp p 750 1 ch PAL NTSC BNC 1 0VP P 75Q composite video signal output Video 1 ch VGA output Output 1 ch HDMI output Video monitor 1 ch matrix output Support multiple window display mode Support TV VGA HDMI video output at the same time dara Support PAL NTSC Ed Real time Mode PAL 1f s to 2
288. s such as MS PTZ Please parallel connect 120TQ between A B cables if there are too many PTZ decoders 3 8 1 14 960H 2U Series 145 960H 2U series product interface is shown as in Figure 3 15 AAA AA 1 2 3 4 5 7 g 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 NOT C1 NO2 C2 NO3 C3 NO4 C4 NOS C5 NCS ay Hi FFFIN T T Re R A B d Figure 3 15 You can refer to the following sheet for alarm input and output information 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ALARM 1 to ALARM 16 The alarm becomes active in low voltage 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 NO1 C1 The first four are four groups of normal open activation output NO2 C2 on off button NO3 C3 NOE C5 NC5 is a group of NO NC activation output on off button NO4 C4 NO5 C5 NC5 CTRL 12V Control power output The power output is off when the alarm is canceled It is rated power output Earth cable Tr T R R 4 pin full duplex RS485 port T T are the output cable and R R are input cable 485 A B 485 communication port They are used to control devices such as PTZ Please parallel connect 120TQ between A B cables if there are too many PTZ decoders 3 8 1 15 8HDD Full D1 2U Entry level Series The 8HDD full D1 2U entry level series product interface is shown as in Figure 3 16 ARAAAARARARA AAAARARARARA Figure 3 16 You can refer to the following sheet for detailed information 1 2 3 4 5 ALARM 1 to ALARM 16 The alarm becomes active in low voltage 6 7 8 9 10 11
289. sage Video Loss Camera Masking v n Setup 10 Secondi 10 300 Secondi 1 300 Clsendemai MlAlarm Upload CBuze O Message mero 265 Figure 7 43 7 8 3 2 Alarm Before operation please make sure you have properly connected alarm devices such as buzzer The input mode includes local alarm and network alarm 7 8 3 2 1 Local Alarm The local alarm interface is shown as in Figure 7 44 WEB service MONET ANT ANTI ACT ATT anal Local Alarm Net Alarm Network Enable Event gt Video Detect i Period Anti dither z Second 5 500 Type Normal Open gt Abnormality gt Storage gt g Record Channel 12 114115116117 1 8 System a Delay Second 10 300 Advanced Ol Alarm Out information Latch Second 1 300 C PTZ Activation O Tour O Snapshot O Video Matrix O Show Message Send Email Alarm Upload CI Buzzer O Message Figure 7 44 Setup ES 00 00 124 00 L 00 00 1124 00 O 00 00 124 00 1 00 00 24 00 C1 00 00 24 00 O 00 00 17 24 00 Save Cancel Figure 7 45 266 PTZ Activation Channel 1 None Channel 2 None Channel 3 Mone Channel 4 None Channel 5 None Channel 6 Mone Channel 7 None D Sjajan a a Channel 8 None Save Cancel Figure 7 46 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Enable You need to check the box to enable this function Please select a channel from the dropdown list Period This funct
290. se input your email SMTP server IP here Port Please input corresponding port value here User name Please input the user name to login the sender email box Password Please input the corresponding password here Sender Please input sender email box here Title Please input email subject here System support English character and Arabic number Max 32 digit eo Receiver Please input receiver email address here System max supports 3 email boxes System automatically filters same addresses if you input one receiver repeatedly e SSL enable System supports SSL encryption box e Interval The send interval ranges from 0 to 3600 seconds 0 means there is no interval o Health email enable Please check the box here to enable this function This function allows the system to send out the test email to check the connection is OK or not Interval Please check the above box to enable this function and then set the corresponding interval System can send out the email regularly as you set here Click the Test button you can see the corresponding dialogue box to see the email connection is OK or not See Figure 5 31 Please note system will not send out the email immediately when the alarm occurs When the alarm motion detection or the abnormity event activates the email system sends out the email according to the interval you specified here This function is very useful when there are too many emails activated by the abnormity events whi
291. ser Multi lever user management various management modes Integrated management for local user serial port user and network Log statistics Version On line user User Management user Configurable user power Support user group and its corresponding rights modification No limit to the user or group amount Password modification Administrator can modify other user s password Account lock strategy Five times login failure in thirty minutes may result in account lock Upgrade Web browser client end and update tool Password login protection to guarantee safety User friendly interface when login Provide the following options Logout shutdown restart Right authentication when shut down to make sure only those proper people can turn off DVR AC90 264V 50 2 Hz Max 220W User Management Password Authentication Login Logout and Shutdown Power Power General Consumption 25W Exclude HDD Parameter Working OG ao 6 Temperature Working 10 90 Humidity Air Pressure Dimension Weight Installation Mode 1 3 21 960H 2HDD 1 5U Series 86kpa 106kpa 1 5U standard industrial case 440 W x410 D x70mm H 4 5 5 5KG Exclude HDD Desktop rack installation System Compression Standard 4 CH composite 8 CH composite video 16 CH composite video input input NTSC PAL video input NTSC PAL BNC BNC 1 0Vp p 750 NTSC PAL BNC 1 0Vp p 750 1 0Vp p 750 1 ch PAL
292. set one master card Usually there is only one running card master card System can enable alternate card when the master card is malfunction The system is shown as offline once these two cards are both offline Please note these two cards shall be in the same LAN lt gt Load balance In this mode device uses bond0 to communicate with the external device The eth0 and eth1 are both working now and bearing the network load Their network load are general the same The system is shown as offline once these two cards are both offline Please note these two cards shall be in the same LAN Important For the IP address of IPv6 version default gateway preferred DNS and alternate DNS the input value shall be 128 digit It shall not be left in blank After completing all the setups please click save button system goes back to the previous menu 193 as NETWORK IP Version IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway TCP Port UDP Port 37777 37773 Max Connection 20 Preferred DNS 8 g 8 Alternate DNS g g 4 LAN Download NETWORK SETTING _ Default Net Mode Network Device Name IP Address Ethernet y IE ES HTTP Pon 8 RTSP Port 2 MTU o 4 Multi address Default Ethernet Port Etherneti IP Version IPv4 _ DHCP NETWORK IP Version IPv6 E MACAddress IP Address Gateway TCP Pon UDP Pont 40003 37778 Max Connection 20 Preferred DNS Alternate DNS f 8
293. shown as below See Figure 3 1 AB cable connection Figure 3 1 Please refer to the following sheet and Figure 3 1 for detailed information In the second line ALARM 1 to ALARM 8 The alarm becomes active in low voltage from the left to the right 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 In the first line from There are three groups of normal open activation output on off the left to the right button 1 NO C 2 NO C 3 NO C Earth cable 485 A B 485 communication port They are used to control devices such as PTZ Please parallel connect 120TQ between A B cables if there are too many PTZ decoders The 16 channel interface is shown as in Figure 3 2 138 TUTE J AB cable connection Sau 6 NANA OUN Figure 3 2 Please refer to the following sheet and Figure 3 2 for detailed information In the second line ALARM 1 to ALARM 16 The alarm becomes active in low voltage from the left to the right 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 and the first line from the left to the right 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 In the first line from There are three groups of normal open activation output on off the left to the right button 3 NO C and the second line from the left to the right 1 NOC 2 NO C Earth cable
294. sion Here is for you to view hardware features software version built date release SN information and etc You can also update system here See Figure 5 71 o Start Please insert the USB device that have the update file to the device and then click the Start button to begin the update Important Please make sure the upgrade file name shall be update bin Channels 16 Alarm In 16 Alarm Out 6 System Version 2 616 0000 0 Build Date 2013 01 05 Web 3 0 0 1 Serial No YPA1DQ2400115 UPGRADE lf you need to upgrade system now please insert USB upgrade disk then press the start button to start upgrade Don t shut down the power during upgrade Figure 5 71 5 6 5 Online Users Here is for you manage online users See Figure 5 72 You can disconnect one user or block one user if you have proper system right Max disconnection setup is 65535 seconds 229 System refreshes current interface every five seconds to detect there is any newly added or deleted user AS ONLINE USERS User Name IP admin 10 10 6 5 admin 10 10 6 5 Disconnect Block for 60 Figure 5 72 5 6 6 Network Information In this interface you can see network test and network load information 5 6 6 1 Network Test Network test interface is shown as in Figure 5 73 Destination IP Please input valid IPV4 address and domain name e Test Click it to test the connection with the destination IP address The test results can display average delay and p
295. splay Encode Schedule Record Control NetWork k Startup Next Step Cancel Figure 4 1 The system login interface is shown as in Figure 4 2 System consists of four accounts Username admin Password admin administrator local and network e Username 888888 Password 888888 administrator local only o Username 666666 Password 666666 Lower authority user who can only monitor playback backup and etc e Username default Password default hidden user You can use USB mouse front panel or keyboard to input About input method Click 123 to switch between numeral English character small capitalized and denotation Note For security reason please modify password after you first login Continuous three times login failure will result in system alarm and five times login failure will result in account lock 150 Figure 4 2 4 1 2 Main Menu After you logged in the system main menu is shown as below See Figure 4 3 There are total six icons search information setting backup advanced and shutdown You can move the cursor to highlight the icon and then double click mouse to enter the sub menu MAIN MENU Y A SETTING 4 e gt f gt m A i E E f qp i gt ADVANCED BACKUP SHUTDOWN Figure 4 3 4 1 3 Logout There are two ways for you to log out One is from menu option In the main menu click shutdown button you can see an interface is shown as below See Figure 4 4
296. ss The video loss interface is shown as in Figure 7 42 After analysis video system can generate a video loss alarm when the detected moving signal reached the sensitivity you set here Please note video loss does not support anti dither sensitivity region setup For rest setups please refer to chapter 7 8 3 1 1 motion detect for detailed information WEB suc TS TITO AUTO ANECA ANT Channel Motion Detect Network Enable Event gt Alarm gt Abnormality Storage System Advanced Information Period Record Channel Delay Alarm Out Latch PTZ Activation Tour Snapshot ivi Show Message 7 8 3 1 3 Camera Masking Video Loss Camera Masking 1 v allas lla sJloJz JLo 10 Second 10 300 AE 10 a 2 34 5 67 Ls ll 2 ila Jl4 5 Lo J z JLo LI Send Email Y Alarm Upload O Buzzer CI message Copy Saye Refresh Second 1 300 Figure 7 42 The camera masking interface is shown as in Figure 7 43 After analysis video system can generate a camera masking alarm when the detected moving signal reached the sensitivity you set here For detailed setups please refer to chapter 7 8 3 1 1 motion detect for detailed information WEB service i Channel Network Event gt Alarm gt Abnormality Storage System Advanced Information Motion Detect Enable Period Sensitivity C Record Channel Delay O Alarm Out Latch O PTZ Activation CI Tour O snapshot O show Mes
297. ss Signal System Advanced Information Figure 7 27 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Here you can select 3G network type to distinguish the 3G Parameter WLAN type module from different ISP The types include WCDMA CDMA1x and etc Here is the important parameter of PPP APN Dial No 254 Authorization It includes PAP CHAP NO_ AUTH Pulse interval It is to set time to end 3G connection after you close extra stream monitor For example if you input 60 here system ends 3G connection after you close extra stream monitor 60 seconds Important e Ifthe pulse interval is 0 then system does not end 3G connection after you close the extra stream monitor Pulse interval here is for extra stream only This item is null if you are using main stream to monitor Channel CDMA GPRS Setup Mobile Setup Network gt TCPAP O Send sms O sms Activate DO Tel Activate S x Receiver Sender Caller gt Connection gt WIFI gt PPPoE gt DDNS gt IP Filter gt Email gt UPnP gt SNMP Title DVR Message gt Multicast gt Alarm Centre Event gt Storage System Advanced Information Figure 7 28 7 8 2 4 2 Mobile The mobile setup interface is shown as in Figure 7 29 Here you can activate or turn off the 3G connected phone or mobile phone or the phone you set to get alarm message WEB sevice tT TTT ATT ACTI Channel CDMA GPRS Setup Mobile Setup Network
298. statistics for each channel in wave mode Stream Statistics Log statistics Display HDD current status Backup to 1024 log files Support various search engines such as time and type Display version information channel amount alarm input and output amount system version and release date On line user Display current on line user User Multi lever user management various management modes Management User Integrated management for local user serial port user and network user Manageme Configurable user power nt Support user group and its corresponding rights modification No limit to the user or group amount Password modification o Administrator can modify other user s password Authenticati on Account lock strategy o Five times login failure in thirty minutes may result in account lock Upgrade Web browser client end and update tool Password login protection to guarantee safety Version Password User friendly interface when login Provide the following options Logout Login Logout and Shutdown shutdown restart Right authentication when shut down to make sure only those proper people can turn off DVR DC 12V Power General Consumptio lt 25w With adapter exclude HDD Parameter n Working OC 4 55 0 Temperatur e Working 10 90 Humidity Pressure 1U standard industrial case 375 W x280 D x50mm H Weight 1 5 2 5KG Exclude HDD Installation Desktop rack installation
299. t Right authentication when shut down to make sure only those proper people can turn off DVR DC 12V Power General Consumptio Parameter Interface Interface 1 RJ45 10M 100M 1000M self adaptable Ethernet port connection Login Logout and Shutdown lt 25W With adapter exclude HDD n Working OC 99 Temperatur e Working 10 90 Humidity Pressure SMART 1U case 205 W x205 D x41mm H SMART 1U case Dimension 270 W x205 D x41mm H Weight 1 0 1 5KG Exclude HDD Installation Desktop installation Mode 1 3 4 Enhanced 1HDD 2CIF Smart 1U Series Main High performance industrial embedded micro controller System p rocessor Embedded LINUX 11 System Multiplex operations Multiple channel record multiple channel playback Resources and network operation simultaneously User friendly graphical user interface Devices Method optional Function USB mouse to switch screen Video Compressio H 264 n Audio Compressio G711A G711U PCM n Video Input 16 CH composite video input NTSC PAL BNC 1 0Vp p 75Q 1 ch PAL NTSC BNC 1 0VP P 75Q composite video signal output Video 1 ch VGA output Output 1 ch HDMI output Support TV VGA HDMI video output at the same time Video monitor Video Real time Mode PAL 1f s to 25f s per channel and NTSC 1f s to 30f s per Record channel Speed Video 1 4 8 9 16 windows Partition Monitor Support monitor tour functions su
300. t If they are not identical please go to General Chapter 5 3 1 to adjust system time or go to HDD Management Chapter 5 5 1 to format HDD and then reboot the DVR z HDD INFO SATA 1 O TS IR pe paa Space Free Space Status Bad block 465 74 GB 455 89 GB Read Write 465 74 GB 455 89 GB Normal Normal 4 Page Up Page Down F View recording times Figure 5 67 Tips Please click Fn button or left click mouse to view HDD record time and HDD type and time Double click one HDD information you can see the HDD SMART information 5 6 2 BPS Here is for you to view current video data stream KB s and occupied hard disk storage MB h See Figure 5 68 16202 16192 16192 16192 16192 16192 16192 16192 16192 16192 16192 16192 16192 16192 16192 16192 Figure 5 68 5 6 3 Log Here is for you to view system log file System lists the following information See Figure 5 69 221 Log types include system operation system configuration data management alarm event record operation log clear file operation and etc Start time end time Pleased select start time and end time then click search button You can view the log files in a list System max displays 100 logs in one page It can max save 1024 log files Please use page up down button on the interface or the front panel to view more Backup Please select a folder you want to save you can click the backup button to save the log files Aft
301. t for local user serial port user and network User Management User Management user Configurable user power No limit to the user or group amount Password Administrator can modify other user s password Five times login failure in thirty minutes may result in account lock Upgrade Web browser client end and update too Password login protection to guarantee safety User friendly interface when login Provide the following options Login Logout and Shutdown Logout shutdown restart Right authentication when shut down to make sure only those proper people can turn off DVR DC 12V Power Parameter Temperature Humidity 86kpa 106kpa 1U standard industrial case 375 W x280 D x50mm H Weight 1 5 2 5KG Exclude HDD Installation Desktop installation Mode 1 3 11 HD SDI 1080P 1U Series 33 Main High performance industrial embedded micro controller System Processor Embedded LINUX System Multiplex operations Multiple channel record multiple channel playback Resources and network operation simultaneously Interface User friendly graphical user interface Input Front panel USB mouse Devices Method optional Function USB mouse to switch screen Video Compressio H 264 Compression Standard n PAL 50f s NTSC 60f s Audio Compressio G711A G711U PCM Real time 1080P 1920 1080 Video Input 4 CH HD SDI video input NTSC PAL BNC 0 8VP P 75Q 1 ch PAL NTSC BNC 1 0VP
302. t in SATA ports Support 4 HDDs Hard Disk Audio PCM 28 8MByte h Occupation Video 56 3600MByte h Record and playback Manual recording motion detection recording schedule recording and alarm recording Recording Mode Priority Manual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection recording gt schedule recording 1 to 120 minutes single record duration Default setup is 60 minutes Length Playback Repeat When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Way Record Various search engines such as time type and channel search Playback Various fast play slow play speeds manual frame by frame playback Mode and reverse play mode Various File Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Switch Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Ways Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto plays the next file in the current channel Multi There is 1 4 channel There is 1 4 channel There is 1 4 channel Playback Zoom Partial When in one window full screen playback mode you can select any zone Enlargemen to activate partial enlargement function t Backup HDD backup function Backu Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk USB Mode p burner and etc Support peripheral eSATA backup device Support network download and save View monitor channel remotely DVR configuration through client
303. t mode _ stands for clear and lt stands for deleting the previous numeral When input special sign you can click corresponding numeral in the front panel to input For example click numeral 1 you can input or you can click the numeral in the on screen keyboard directly 112 8 475 6 _ 7 3 9 O amp py Double left Implement special control operation such as double click one item in the file click mouse list to playback the video In multiple window mode double left click one channel to view in full window Double left click current video again to go back to previous multiple window mode In real time monitor mode pops up shortcut menu one window four window nine window and sixteen window Pan Tilt Zoom color setting search record alarm input alarm output main menu Among which Pan Tilt Zoom and color setting applies for current selected channel If you are in multiple window mode system automatically switches to the corresponding channel Right click mouse View 1 View 4 View 9 View 16 Pan TiltiZoom Color Setting Search Record Alarm Output Alarm Input Main Menu Exit current menu without saving the modification In numeral input box Increase or decrease numeral value Switch the items in the check box Page up or page down Move Select current control or move control mouse Drag mouse Select motion detection zone Select privacy mask zone 130 2 6 Virtual Keyboard
304. ta stream statistics for each channel in wave mode Statistics Alarm Input System Information Loa statistics Backup to 1024 log files Support various search engines such as time and type Display version information channel amount alarm input and output Version amount system version and release date On line user Display current on line user Multi lever user management various management modes Integrated management for local user serial port user and network User Management User Management user Configurable user power No limit to the user or group amount Password Administrator can modify other user s password Five times login failure in thirty minutes may result in account lock Upgrade Web browser client end and update tool Password login protection to guarantee safety User friendly interface when login Provide the following options people can turn off DVR Power AC90 264V 50 2 Hz Max 150W 25W Exclude HDD 0 0 3990 10 90 86kpa 106kpa 2U standard industrial case 440 W x460 D x89mm H 6 5 7 5KG Exclude HDD Desktop rack installation 83 2 Overview and Controls This section provides information about front panel and rear panel When you install this series DVR for the first time please refer to this part first 2 1 Front Panel 2 1 1 1HDD Full D1 Smart 1U 1HDD 2CIF Smart 1U Series Enhanced 1HDD Full D1 Smart 1U Enhanced 1HDD 2CIF Smart 1U Series Th
305. te video signal output Video monitor Video 1 ch VGA output Output 1 ch HDMI output Support TV VGA HDMI video output at the same time Video Sa Support PAL 625 TVL 50fps NTSC 525 TVL 60fps Real time Mode PAL 1f s to 25f s per channel and NTSC 1f s to 30f s Record per channel Speed Partition Touring schedule auto control PAL NTSC Real time monitor D1 704x576 704x480 Resolution PAL NTSC Playback All ch D1 704x576 704x480 HD1 352x576 352x480 2CIF 704x288 704x240 CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Quality mask Support max 4 zones Im E oe aI Channel information time information and privacy mask zone Information TV Adjust Adjust TV output zone suitable to anamorphic video Channel Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding Lock normally Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized user seeing secret video 18 Channel Channel name recording status screen lock status video loss status and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of display screen Color Hue brightness contrast saturation and gain setup for each channel Configuratio n Audio Audio Input 4 ch 200 2000mv 10KQ RCA Audio 1 ch audio output 200 3000mv 5KO RCA Output Bidirectional Reuse the first audio input channel Audio Reuse audio output channel Hard Disk 1 built in SATA port Support 1 HDD Hard Disk Audio PCM 28 8MByte h nag ls
306. tection to guarantee safety User friendly interface when login Provide the following options Logout Login Logout and Shutdown shutdown restart Right authentication when shut down to make sure only those proper people can turn off DVR AC90 264V 50 2 Hz Max 75W Power General Consumptio lt 25W Exclude HDD Parameter n Working 002990 Temperatur e Working 10 90 Humidity Air 86kpa 106kpa Pressure 1 5U standard industrial case 440 W x410 D x70mm H Weight 4 5 5 5KG Exclude HDD Installation Desktop rack installation Mode 1 3 17 2HDD 2CIF 1 5U Series High performance industrial embedded micro controller Main System Processor Embedded LINUX Resources and network operation simultaneously Devices Method optional Function USB mouse to switch screen Compression Video Standard Compressio H 264 n Audio Compressio G711A G711U PCM n 4 CH composite video 8 CH composite video 16 CH composite Video Input input NTSC PAL input NTSC PAL video input BNC 1 0Vp p 750 BNC 1 0Vp p 750 NTSC PAL BNC 1 0Vp p 750 1 ch PAL NTSC BNC 1 0VP P 750 composite video signal output Video monitor Video 1 ch VGA output 1 ch HDMI output 1 ch matrix output Support multiple window display mode Support TV VGA HDMI video output at the same time Video Support PAL NTSC 53 Output 3 4 ch 2CIF 704x288 704x240 CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Note W
307. tee safety Version Password User friendly interface when login Provide the following options Logout Login Logout and Shutdown shutdown restart Right authentication when shut down to make sure only those proper people can turn off DVR DC 12V Power General Consumptio Parameter lt 25W With adapter exclude HDD n Working O C 4755 C Temperatur e Working 10 90 Humidity Pressure SMART 1U case 270 W x205 D x41mm H Weight 1 0 1 5KG Exclude HDD Installation Desktop installation Mode 1 3 5 General 2CIF Real time Mini 1U Series Main High performance industrial embedded micro controller System p rocessor Embedded LINUX 14 Resources and network operation simultaneously Devices Method optional Function USB mouse to switch screen Video n Audio Compressio G711A G711U PCM n Video Input 16 CH composite video input NTSC PAL BNC 1 0Vp p 75Q 1 ch PAL NTSC BNC 1 0VP P 75Q composite video signal output Video 1 ch VGA output Output 1 ch HDMI output Support TV VGA HDMI video output at the same time Video monitor Video Support PAL 625 TVL 50fps NTSC 525 TVL 60fps Real time Mode PAL 1f s to 25f s per channel and NTSC 1f s to 30f s Record per channel Speed Partition Touring schedule auto control PAL NTSC Real time monitor D1 704x5 6 704x480 Compression Standard Resolution PAL NTSC Playback All channel 2
308. tem Advanced Figure 7 60 7 8 4 2 3 HDD Channel The HDD channel interface is shown as in Figure 7 61 Here you can set channel group 273 WEB sevice ON Qa a TT a Channel Network Event Storage gt Schedule gt Record System Advanced information 7 8 4 2 4 FIP Figure 7 61 The FTP interface is shown as in Figure 7 62 The FTP function is on if you check the Enable box here When network is offline or malfunction system can save record or picture to HDD WEB service ST ANTEC ANTI ANC ATT Channel Network Event Storage gt Schedule gt Record System Advanced Information Local Storage HDD Setting Yi Enable Server IP Port User Name Password Remote Directory File Length 0 Image Upload Interval 2 Channel 1 Weekday Sunday Time Period 1 00 00 24 Time Period 2 00 00 24 HDD Channel O Anonymous M Second ly 00 O dam Om O Regular 00 O Aam O mo O Regular 7 8 4 3 Record control The record control interface is shown as in Figure 7 63 WEB suc S T ATT T ANT Channel Network Event Storage gt Schedule gt Storage System Advanced Information Record Figure 7 62 Record Mode MER Zoe AD GOT B Schedule 000000000 Manual OOOOODOOO Stop 000000000 Extra Stream Schedule 000000000 Manual 20000000 a Stop 000000000 Figure 7 63 274 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Parameter Function S
309. ter you set See Figure 7 18 246 WEB service Conditions Channel Channel 1 gt Video amp Audio gt Channel Name Period Y 00 00 24 00 Ol 00 00 24 00 Network eae Event Hue gt 50 50 Storage Brightness 32 L 50 50 System Contrast D o 50 Advanced Saturation 50 o Inf ati m ijinen Gain O 50 O y 5 White Level Y Low Iv Low Color Mode Customized1 Customized 1 Figure 7 18 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Porametr Function Please select a channel from the dropdown list Brightness It divides one day 24 hours to two periods You can set different hue brightness and contrast for different periods It is to adjust monitor video brightness and darkness level The default value is 50 The bigger the value is the large the contrast between the bright and dark section is and vice versa It is to adjust monitor window brightness The default value is 50 The larger the number is the bright the video is When you input the value here the bright section and the dark section of the video will be adjusted accordingly You can use this function when the whole video is too dark or too bright Please note the video may become hazy if the value is too high The value ranges from 0 to 100 The recommended value ranges from 40 to 60 It is to adjust monitor window contrast The value ranges from 0 to 100 The default value is 50
310. text mode input number 0 In normal playback or pause mode click this button to reverse playback In reverse playback click this button to pause playback In text mode input number 6 English character M N O In playback mode playback the next video Reverse Pau se 6 Play Next 9 Play Pause 5 USB port In menu setup go to down ward of the dropdown list In text mode input number 9 English character W X Y Z In normal playback click this button to pause playback In pause mode click this button to resume playback In text mode input number 5 English character J K L To connect USB storage device USB mouse AAA Network abnormal Network error occurs or there is no network connection the a ane Net l indication light becomes red to alert you light HDD abnormal HDD HDD error occurs or HDD capacity is below specified indication light i System is recording or not It becomes on when system is 2 1 7 General 2U Series 8HDD Full D1 2U Entry level Series The Front panel is shown as follows See Figure 2 7 threshold value the light becomes red to alert you Figure 2 7 Please refer to the following sheet for front panel button information 92 Icon Function Power button press this button for three seconds to boot up or Power button shut down OVA Input Arabic number Number button Switch channel Input number J If you want to input a number more than 10 please click this more t
311. th POS system the DVR can communicate through RS232 and network For the POS system the DVR can integrate the text content and even search the record through the info 147 The series DVR also support NKB operation You can operate the DVR from the keyboard controls instead of using the control pad on the front panel of the unit To connect a NKB keyboard to the DVR 1 Assemble the KBD keyboard according to the instructions in its accompanying installation manual 2 Connect the KBD keyboard into one of the RS232 ports on the DVR or through network 3 10 RS485 When the DVR receives a camera control command it transmits that command up the coaxial cable to the PTZ device RS485 is a single direction protocol the PTZ device can t return any data to the unit To enable the operation connect the PTZ device to the RS485 A B input on the DVR See Figure 3 8 Since RS485 is disabled by default for each camera you must enable the PTZ settings first This series DVRs support multiple protocols such as Pelco D Pelco P To connect PTZ devices to the DVR 1 Connect RS485 A B on the DVR rear panel 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the proper pins in the connector on the camera 3 Please follow the instructions to configure a camera to enable each PTZ device on the DVR 3 11 Other Interfaces There are still other interfaces on the DVR such as USB ports You can refer to the Figure 3 18 for more information USB Port RS232 RS
312. the above mentioned two MIB file via the software MIB Builder Run MG SOFT MIB Browser to load the file from the previous step to the software e Input the device IP you want to manage in the MG SOFT MIB Browser Please set the corresponding version for your future reference e Open the tree list on the MG SOFT MIB Browser you can get the device configuration Here you can see the device has how many video channels audio channels application version and etc Note Port conflict occurs when SNMP port and Trap port are the same 5 3 5 13 Network Priority This interface is for you to set network priority The default setup is PPPoE gt WIFI gt 3G gt LAN See Figure 5 37 You can change if necessary Default gateway It is to display current default gateway It is to display PPPoE if PPPoE dial succeeded Priority The value ranges from 0 to 3 0 has the highest priority Name It is to display network name Use AE to move current item up down Note PPPoE always has the highest priority You can change the priority of the rest three items 208 39 NETWORK PRIORITY Default Gateway LAN k Priority Name 0 PPPoE 1 WIFI v 2 3G 3 LAN Figure 5 37 5 3 5 14 Auto register This function allows the device to auto register to the proxy you specified In this way you can use the client end to access the DVR and etc via the proxy Here the proxy has a switch function In the network service device supports the server address
313. ting Audio Input amp Output Bidirectional Audio 3 1 Audio Input These series products audio input port adopt BNC port Due to high impedance of audio input please use active sound pick up Audio transmission is similar to video transmission Try to avoid interference dry joint loose contact and it shall be away from high tension current 3 7 2 Audio Output The audio output signal parameter is usually over 200mv 1KQ BNC It can directly connect to low impedance earphone active sound box or amplifier drive audio output device lf the sound box and the pick up cannot be separated spatially it is easy to arouse squeaking In this case you can adopt the following measures Use better sound pick up with better directing property e Reduce the volume of the sound box Using more sound absorbing materials in decoration can reduce voice echo and improve acoustics environment e Adjust the layout to reduce happening of the squeaking 3 8 Alarm Input and Output Connection Please refer to the following sheet for alarm input and output connection There are two alarm input types for you to select normal open NO and normal close NC 1 Alarm input a Please make sure alarm input mode is grounding alarm input b Grounding signal is needed for alarm input c Alarm input needs the low level voltage signal d Alarm input mode can be either NC normal Open or NO Normal Close e When you are connecting two DVRs or you ar
314. to Saturday from the dropdown list You can see there are six periods for you to set Please note you need to check the box before the period to enable the period setup valid In Figure 4 28 select work day or non work day from the drop down list and then click the Set button you can set your own business day and non business day setup See Figure 4 29 You can set Monday to Friday as the working day and Saturday and Sunday as non business day Click Save button to go back to previous interface Anti dither System only memorizes one event during the anti dither period The value ranges from 5s to 600s Alarm output when an alarm occurs system enables peripheral alarm devices Latch when motion detection complete system auto delays detecting for a specified time The value ranges from 1 300 Unit second Show message System can pop up a message to alarm you in the local host screen if you enabled this function Alarm upload System can upload the alarm signal to the network including alarm centre if you enabled current function Send email System can send out email to alert you when alarm occurs Record channel System auto activates motion detection channel s to record once an alarm occurs Please make sure you have set MD record in Schedule interface Main Menu gt Setting gt Schedule and schedule record in manual record interface Main Menu gt Advanced gt Manual Record PTZ activation Here you can set PTZ movement when an alar
315. to set motion detect region without Fn button Please click OK button to save current region setup Right click mouse to exit current interface 4 6 2 Motion Detect Detection menu is shown as below See Figure 4 25 Event type From the dropdown list you can select motion detection type Channel Select a channel from the dropdown list to set motion detect function Enable Check the box here to enable motion detect function Region Click select button the interface is shown as in Figure 4 26 Here you can set motion detection zone There are 396 PAL 330 NTSC small zones Blue zone is the motion detection zone White zone is the disarmed zone System can only detect motion detect signal from the arm region You can click Fn button to switch between the arm mode and disarm mode In arm mode you can click the direction buttons to move the green rectangle to set the motion detection zone After you completed the setup please click ENTER button to exit current setup Do remember click save button to save current setup If you click ESC button to exit the region setup interface system will not save your zone setup Sensitivity System supports 6 levels The sixth level has the highest sensitivity Period Click set button you can see an interface is shown as in Figure 4 28 Here you can set motion detect period System only enables motion detect operation in the specified periods It is not for video loss or the camera masking Please select Sunday
316. to specific alarm output channel Control 4 ch alarm input You 8 ch alarm input You 16 ch alarm input can set normal open or can set normal open or You can set normal close type to normal close type to normal open or Alarm Input yP yP p select the alarm type select the alarm type normal close type to select the alarm type Alarm 6 channel relay output including one controllable DC 12V output port Output Alarm Relay 30V DC 2A 125V AC 1A activation alarm gt 2 USB 2 0 ports Interface Interface Network RJ45 10M 100M 1000M self adaptable Ethernet port connection PTZ control port PES Support various PTZ control protocols RS232 Ordinary COM Debug keyboard connection and transparent serial port COM input and output via network Hard Disk Display HDD current status Information Data Data stream statistics for each channel in wave mode Stream Statistics System Information E UY Log Backup to 1024 log files statistics Support various search engines such as time and type ES Display version information channel amount alarm input and output ersion amount system version and release date Display current on line user Multi lever user management various management modes User Integrated management for local user serial port user and network user Manageme Configurable user power nt Support user group and its corresponding rights modification No limit to the user or group amount Pass
317. ttern Function In Figure 6 6 input mode value in the No blank and click pattern button 6 2 7 Border Setup In _ Figure 6 5 click border button The interface is shown as in Figure 6 10 Please go to _ Figure 6 2 use direction arrows to select camera left limit and then please go to _ Figure 6 10 and click left limit button Repeat the above procedures to set right limit Function Pattern 1 Preset Patrol Pattern Left Border Right Patrol No 10 Figure 6 10 6 2 8 Activate Border Function In Figure 6 6 click auto scan button the system begins auto scan Correspondingly the auto scan button changes to stop button Click stop button to terminate scan operation 1 1 1 Flip In Figure 6 6 click page switch button you can see an interface is shown as below See _ Figure 6 11 Here you can set auxiliary function Click page switch button again system goes back to Figure 6 2 236 M PANTILT ZOOM x Direct Aux Oper Light Aux Num Oper 1 Page Switch Figure 6 11 237 7 WEB OPERATION There might be slightly difference in the interface due to different series The following interface is on our 8 channel series product 7 1 Network Connection Before web operation please check the following items e Network connection is right e DVR and PC network setup is right Please refer to network setup Setup gt Network e Use order ping DVR IP address to check connection i
318. u can set normal or normal close type to open or normal close select the alarm type to select the 4 ch alarm input You can set normal open Alarm Input or normal close type to select the alarm type alarm type Alarm 1 channel relay 3 channel relay output Output output Alarm Relay 30VDC 2A 125VAC 1A Activation output USB 2 USB 2 0 ports Interface Interface Network One RJ45 10M 100M 1000M self adaptable Ethernet port type connection PTZ control port R485 Support various PTZ control protocols RS232 N A System Hard Disk Display HDD current status Information Information Data Data stream statistics for each channel in wave mode Stream Statistics Log Backup to 1024 log files statistics Support various search engines such as time and type V Display version information channel amount alarm input and output ersion i amount system version and release date Display current on line user User Multi lever user management various management modes Management User Integrated management for local user serial port user and network user Manageme Configurable user power nt Support user group and its corresponding rights modification No limit to the user or group amount Password modification Administrator can modify other user s password Account lock strategy Five times login failure in thirty minutes may result in account lock Password Authenticati on 26 Upgrad
319. u go to the configuration backup interface first and then insert the peripheral device please click Refresh button to see the newly added device 22 PS CONFIG BACKUP Device Name sda1 USB DISK Refresh Total Space 3 08 GB Free Space 2 48 GB Address May Name Size Type New Folder Format IMPORT EXPORT Figure 5 65 5 6 Information Here is for you to view system information There are total six items HDD hard disk information BPS data stream statistics log version online user and network information See Figure 5 66 E INFO R Th e ele HDD INFO L Ss amp VERSION ONLINE USERS NETWORK INFO Figure 5 66 5 6 1 HDD Information Here is to list hard disk type total space free space video start time and status See See Figure 5 67 0 means current HDD is normal X means there is error means there is no HDD lf disk is damaged system shows as Please remove the broken hard disk before you add a new one Once there is a hard disk confliction please check hard disk time and system time is the same or not Please go to setting then general to modify system time At last reboot the system to solve this problem 226 After system booted up if there is any confliction system goes to HDD information interface directly Please note system does not ask you to deal with it forcedly When HDD coniliction occurs you can check system time and HDD time are identical or no
320. ual recording gt alarm recording gt motion detection recording gt schedule recording Storage Support channel record quota setup Record and playback Backup function Network Function Motion Detection and Alarm Interface 1 to 120 minutes single record duration Default setup is 60 minutes Length Playback Repeat When hard disk is full system can overwrite previous video file Way Record Various search engines such as time type and channel search Playback Various fast play slow play speeds manual frame by frame playback and Mode reverse play mode Can switch to previous or next file or any file in current play list Can switch to file on other channel of the same time If there is a file Various File Switch Ways Support file continuous play when a file is end system auto plays the next file in the current channel Playback Support mark playback Multi There is 1 4 9 16 channel playback mode channel It may vary due to different series Playback Switch between self adaptive screen full screen when playback Zoom Partial When in one window full screen playback mode you can select any zone Enlargemen to activate partial enlargement function t HDD backup Backup Support peripheral USB backup device Flash disk portable disk and Mode etc Support network download and save View alarm information such as motion detection and video loss via Network client contro
321. uccessfully experience from our past work One point ground In the following figure you can see there is a one point ground This connection provides common port to allow signal to be transmitted in many circuits If there is no common port the error signal transmission occurred In the one point ground mode each circuit is just grounded only and they are connected at the same port Since there is only one common port there is no circuit and so there is no interference Sub system Sub system Sub system Or device 1 Or device E2 Or device lie s G System or sub system gt earthing point Sub system Or device EN Multiple point ground In the following figure you can see the internal circuit uses the chassis as the common point While at the same time all devices chassis use the earthing as the common port In this connection the ground structure can provide the lower ground resistance because when there are multiple point grounds each ground cable is as short as possible And the parallel cable connection can reduce the total conductance of the ground conductor In the high frequency circuit you need to use the multiple point ground mode and each cable needs to connect to the ground The length shall be less than the 1 20 of the signal wavelength 313 Device Safety Earthing A a a a ta et ae a A A ae leet tea E E A Meet IE Device Earthing Mixed ground The mix ground consists of the feature of the on
322. ultiple channel playback mode double click one channel and then click the R button system begins smart search System supports 396 22 18 PAL and 330 22 15 NTSC zones Please left click mouse to select smart search zones See Figure 4 13 From ReadWrite Hdd 7 REC ORIG lt Han v 2013 gt Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Dae 5 6 7 L3 L9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Pp CAN All Record Y Normal v Alarm Figure 4 13 Click thea you can go to the smart search playback Click it again system stops smart search playback Important e System does not support motion detect zone setup during the full screen mode e During the multiple channel playback system stops playback of rest channels if you implement one channel smart search 4 4 2 Accurate playback by time select records from one day click the list you can go to the file list interface You can input time at the top right corner to search records by time For example click time 06 00 00 and then click Search button you can view all the record files after 06 00 00 The records includes current time Click Play button you can see system begins play from 06 00 00 See Figure 4 14 Note eo After you searched files system implement accurate playback once you click Play for the first time e System does not support accurate playback for picture 160 e System supports synchro
323. und Path Figure 7 94 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information Please make sure current device can upload the alarm Alarm Video loss System alarms when video loss occurs Type Motion detection System alarms when motion detection alarm occurs Camera System alarms when camera is viciously masking masking Disk full System alarms when disk is full System alarms when disk error occurs External alarm Alarm input device sends out alarm Operation Prompt Check the box here system can automatically pops up an alarm icon on the Alarm button in the main interface when there is an alarm Alarm Play alarm System sends out alarm sound when an alarm Sound sound occurs You can specify as you wish Here you can specify alarm sound file 7 11 Log out Click log out button system goes back to log in interface See Figure 7 95 You need to input user name and password to login again 293 7 WEB SERVICE Windows Internet Explorer provided by Yahoo er JF E beto 10 10 4 122 xlix le Plz File Edit view Favorites Tools Help y Favorites W WEB SERVICE WEB SERVICE Username admin Password OLAN OWAN Internet far 100 Figure 7 95 7 12 Un install Web Control You can use web un install tool uninstall web bat to un install web control Please note before you un installation please close all web pages otherwise the un installation might result
324. upload alarm signal to the alarm centre when local alarm occurs Before you use alarm centre please set server IP port and etc When an alarm occurs system can send out data as the protocol defined so the client end can get the data Channel Network gt TCPAP Protocol Type Privat gt Connection de dfn 1 1 gt WIFI Server IP 0 0 gt 3G Port 1 gt PPPoE Selfreport Time Everyday me 08 00 y gt DDNS gt Email gt UPNP gt SNMP gt Multicast Event Storage System Advanced Information Figure 7 37 7 8 3 Event 7 8 3 1 Video detect 7 8 3 1 1 Motion Detect The motion detect interface is shown as in Figure 7 38 WEB service ive riaybace stam ANETO ET Channel Motion Detect Video Loss Camera Masking Network Enable v Event Period gt Alarm Anti dither 5 6 Sensitivity gt Abnormality Second 5 600 y l E l Storage Regular System Y Record Channel 2 113 114 115 116 117 1 84 Advanced o Delay Second 10 300 Information gt N io O Alarm Out Latch sui o Second 1 300 CI PTZ Activation 0O Tour 15 mm y 112 a Qu ul Snapshot EEEN MN N Les O video Matrix O Send Email Y Alarm Upload O Buzzer DO Message O Show Message Figure 7 38 262 od oo Fk uw N 2 Figure 7 41 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information 263 Parameter Enable
325. ure 4 17 Here you can enable and set multiple channel preview so that you can view several video at one channel e Enable Check the box here to enable this function e Storage This function is null right now o Frame rate PAL 1 25fps NTSC 30fps eo Bit stream value Default setup is 1024Kb S BD Multi Preview Enable a Storage Compression H 264 Resolution CIF Frame Rate FPS 25 Bit Rate Kb S 1024 Default oneal Figure 4 17 4 5 Schedule After system booted up it is in default 24 hour regular mode You can set record type and time in schedule interface 4 5 1 Schedule Menu In the main menu from setting to schedule you can go to schedule menu See Figure 4 18 Channel Please select the channel number first You can select all if you want to set for the whole channels Week day There are eight options ranges from Saturday to Sunday and all Pre record System can pre record the video before the event occurs into the file The value ranges from 1 to 30 seconds depending on the bit stream Redundancy System supports redundancy backup function It allows you backup recorded file in two disks You can highlight Redundancy button to activate this function Please note before enable this function please set at least one HDD as redundant Main menu gt Advanced gt HDD Management Please refer to chapter 4 5 1 2 for detailed information Please note this function is null if there is only one HDD The 4 8 channel HD SDI
326. urrent PC 7 8 7 3 Online User The online user interface is shown as in Figure 7 88 Online User Channel Network Group Name User Login Time Event admin 10 10 6 5 2013 01 06 02 54 53 gt Storag System Advanced Information gt Version gt Log gt 289 Figure 7 88 7 9 Search Click search button you can see an interface is shown as in Figure 7 89 Please set record type record date window display mode and channel name You can click the date on the right pane to select the date The green highlighted date is system current date and the blue highlighted date means it has record files PLAYBACK Windows Internet Explorer provided by Yahoo GO gt 0104122 Leal 4 gt lt oot yahoo File Edit View Favorites Tools Help p Favorites PLAYBACK WEB service tive Playback alarm setup togout A 2013Teer iMonth A H BH h Ee js E MN 16 26 18 lt 16 26 18 gt 23 24 Type y All Normal E Alarn J Motion Internet Sar 100 Figure 7 89 Then please click search button you can see the corresponding files in the list See Figure 7 90 290 PLAYBACK Windows Internet Explorer provided by Yahoo Go HM peo 10 10 4 122 y 5 x yahoo File Edit View Favorites Tools Help iz Favorites p PLAYBACK Figure 7 90 Select a file you want to play and then click Play button system can begin playback You can select to p
327. ut video input video input video input NTSC PAL NTSC PAL NTSC PAL NTSC PAL NTSC PAL BNC BNC BNC BNC BNC 1 0Vp_p 1 0Vp_p 1 0Vp_p 1 0Vp_p 1 0Vp_p Video Input Video monitor 750 750 750 750 750 1 ch PAL NTSC BNC 1 0VP P 750 composite video signal output 1 ch VGA output 1 ch HDMI output 1 ch matrix output Support TV VGA HDMI video output at the same time Video Support PAL NTSC Real time Mode PAL 1f s to 25f s per channel and NTSC 1f s to 30f s Record Speed per channel 1 4 1 4 8 9 1 4 8 9 16 1 4 8 9 1 4 8 9 optional windows windows Touring schedule auto control PAL NTSC Real time monitor D1 704x576 704x480 Video Output Resolution PALINTSC Playback channel 1 16 D1 704X576 704Xx 480 CIF 352X 288 352 x 240 QCIF 176X 144 176 x 120 70 Support dual streams Extra stream resolution CIF 352 X 288 352 X 240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Image Quality 6 level image quality Adjustable Privacy mask Support one privacy mask of user defined size in full screen Support max 4 zones Image ae ce o Channel information time information and privacy mask zone TV Adjust Adjust TV output zone suitable to anamorphic video Channel Lock Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding normally Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized user seeing secret video Channel Channel name recording status screen lock status
328. ut NTSC PAL BNC 0 8VP P 750 BNC 0 8VP P 750 BNC 0 8VP P 750 73 1 ch PAL NTSC BNC 1 0VP P 75Q composite video signal output Video 1 ch VGA output Video monitor Output 1 ch HDMI output Support TV VGA HDMI video output at the same time Video 720P 25 720P 30 720P 50 720P 60 1080P 25 1080P 30 1080i 50 Standard 1080i 60 Real time Mode PAL Real time Mode PAL In non real time mode 1f s to 25f s per 1f s to 25f s per when the resolution of channel and NTSC channel and NTSC the main stream Is 1f s to 30f s per 1f s to 30f s per 1080P the 1 5 9 1 3 Record h h h Speed channe channe channel max supports 25f s or 30f s and the resolution of the rest channels support 12f s or 15f s Partition Touring schedule auto control Real time 1080P 1920 1080 Recording playback channel1 4 1080P 1920 1080 720P 1280 720 Resolution D1 704x576 704x480 CIF 352x288 352x240 PAL NTSC QCIF 176x144 176x120 Dual stream supported Extra stream resolution D1 704x576 704x480 CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Quality mask Support max 4 zones Image Channel information time information and privacy mask zone Information TV Adjust Adjust TV output zone suitable to anamorphic video Channel Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding normally Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized user seeing secret video Channel Channel name recording status s
329. ut NTSC PAL BNC 1 0Vp p 75Q 1 ch PAL NTSC BNC 1 0VP P 75Q composite video signal output Video 1 ch VGA output Output 1 ch HDMI output Support TV VGA HDMI video output at the same time Video monitor Video Support PAL 625 TVL 50fps NTSC 525 TVL 60fps Real time Mode PAL 1f s to 25f s per channel and NTSC 1f s to 30f s Record per channel Speed Partition Touring schedule auto control PAL NTSC Real time monitor D1 704x5 6 04x480 Resolution PAL NTSC Playback All channel 2CIF 704x288 704x240 CIF 352x288 352x240 QCIF 176x144 176x120 Support dual streams extra stream resolution QCIF 176x144 176x120 6 level image quality Adjustable Quality Privacy Support one privacy mask of user defined size in full screen mask Support max 4 zones ELG Channel information time information and privacy mask zone Information TV Adjust Adjust TV output zone suitable to anamorphic video 21 Hard disk Record and playback Backup function Network Function Channel Cover secret channel with black screen though system is encoding Lock normally Screen lock function to prevent unauthorized user seeing secret video Channel Channel name recording status screen lock status video loss status Information and motion detection status are shown on the bottom left of display screen Color Hue brightness contrast saturation and gain setup for each channel Configuratio n
330. utput via network System Display HDD current status Information Information Data Data stream statistics for each channel in wave mode Stream Statistics Statistics Support various search engines such as time and type E ersion amount system version and release date User Multi lever user management various management modes Management User Integrated management for local user serial port user and network user Manageme Configurable user power nt Support user group and its corresponding rights modification No limit to the user or group amount SO Password modification Administrator can modify other user s password Authenticati ae Account lock strategy Five times login failure in thirty minutes may result in account lock Upgrade Web browser client end and update tool Password login protection to guarantee safety User friendly interface when login Provide the following options Logout shutdown restart Right authentication when shut down to make sure only those proper people can turn off DVR DC 12V Power General Consumptio Parameter Login Logout and Shutdown lt 25W With adapter exclude HDD n Working OC gt 55C Temperatur e Working 10 90 Humidity Air 86kpa 106kpa Pressure 1U standard industrial case 375 W x280 D x50mm H Weight 1 5 2 5KG Exclude HDD Installation Desktop installation Mode 1 3 10 960H 1U Series Main High performance industrial emb
331. val minimum value is 1 Max value is 65535 Unit minute Time zone select your corresponding time zone here Manual update It allows you to synchronize the time with the server manually Here is a sheet for your time zone setup A NTP Server IP Port 123 Time Zone GMT 08 00 Update Period 60 Default Cancel Manual Update Figure 5 19 5 3 5 4 Multiple Cast Setup Multiple cast setup interface is shown as in Figure 5 20 197 a MULTICAST IP Address 239 255 42 Port 36666 Default Cancel Figure 5 20 Here you can set a multiple cast group Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information e IP multiple cast group address 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 D address space e The higher four bit of the first byte 1110 e Reserved local multiple cast group address 224 0 0 0 224 0 0 255 I TL 1 When sending out telegraph For example 224 0 0 1 All systems in the sub net 224 0 0 2 All routers in the sub net 224 0 0 4 DVMRP router 224 0 0 5 OSPF router 224 0 0 13 PIMv2 router e Administrative scoped addressees 239 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 Private address space Like the single broadcast address of RFC1918 e Can not be used in Internet transmission Used for multiple cast broadcast in limited space Except the above mentioned addresses of special meaning you can use other addresses For example Multiple cast IP 235 8 8 36 Multiple cast PORT 3666 After you logged in the W
332. value is 25 You can modify it if necessary 258 Anonymity For the server supports the anonymity function You can auto login anonymously You do not need to input the user name password and the sender information The user name of the sender email account The password of sender email account Sender email address Authentication You can select SSL or none Encryption mode you check the box here It supports SSL TLS email box Interval The send interval ranges from 0 to 3600 seconds 0 means there is no interval Please note system will not send out the email immediately when the alarm occurs When the alarm motion detection or the abnormity event activates the email system sends out the email according to the interval you specified here This function is very useful when there are too many emails activated by the abnormity events which may result in heavy load for the email server Health mail Please check the box here to enable this function enable Update period This function allows the system to send out the test email to interval check the connection is OK or not Please check the box to enable this function and then set the corresponding interval System can send out the email regularly as you set here Email test The system will automatically sent out a email once to test the connection is OK or not Before the email test please save the email setup information 7 8 2 9 UPnP It allows you to estab
333. wo modes main stream and extra stream There are three statuses schedule manual stop Please highlight icon O to select corresponding channel e Manual The highest priority After manual setup all selected channels will begin ordinary recording e Schedule Channel records as you have set in recording setup Main Menu gt Setting gt Schedule e Stop All channels stop recording a RECORD Record Mode Al t2 345 7 8 910111 13141576 Schedule Manual Stop Schedule Manual stop Figure 4 7 4 3 3 Enable disable record Please check current channel status o means it is not in recording status e means it is in recording status You can use mouse or direction key to highlight channel number See Figure 4 8 Record Mode AIl 1235 4 5 6 7 8 910111 13141576 Schedule Manual Stop Schedule Manual Stop Figure 4 8 154 4 3 4 Enable all channel recording Highlight o below All you can enable all channel recording All channel schedule record Please highlight ALL after Schedule See Figure 4 9 When system is in schedule recording all channels will record as you have previously set Main menu gt Setting gt Schedule The corresponding indication light in front panel will turn on e l RECORD Record Mode AIl t23 4 5 6 amp 32 10 11 12131441516 Schedule BeRRERRRRRER RRS SS Manual Stop Schedule Manual Stop DS064L LI O LLO OACAOOS LA q X E
334. word Password modification Authenticati Administrator can modify other user s password User Management on Account lock strategy SII ics login furs in tiny minutes may resit in account lock Upgrade User friendly interface when login Provide the following options Logout Login Logout and Shutdown shutdown restart Right authentication when shut down to make sure only those proper people can turn off DVR AC90 264V 50 2 Hz Max 75W Power General Consumptio 25W Exclude HDD Parameter n Working 0C 4755 C Temperatur e Working 10 90 Humidity Air 86kpa 106kpa Pressure 1 5U standard industrial case 440 W x410 D x70mm H Weight 4 5 5 5KG Exclude HDD Installation Desktop rack installation Mode 1 3 14 HD SDI 1080P 1 5U Series Main High performance industrial embedded micro controller System Processor Resources and network operation simultaneously Devices Method Optional Function USB mouse to switch screen Compression Video Standard Compressio H 264 n Audio Compressio G 711A n 4 CH HD SDI video 8 CH HD SDI video 16 CH HD SDI video Video Input input NTSC PAL input NTSC PAL input NTSC PAL BNC 0 8VP P 750 BNC 0 8VP P 750 BNC 0 8VP P 750 1 ch PAL NTSC BNC 1 0VP P 75Q composite video signal output Video 1 ch VGA output Video monitor Output 1 ch HDMI output Support TV VGA HDMI video output at the same time Video 720P 25
335. y user Add group Modify group Modify password For account management please note e For the user account name and the user group the string max length is 6 byte The backspace in front of or at the back of the string is invalid There can be backspace in the middle The string includes the valid character letter number underline subtraction sign and dot e System account adopts two level management group and user System max supports 20 user groups and 64 users For group or user management there are two levels admin and user One user should belong to one group User right can not exceed group right About reusable function this function allows multiple users use the same account to login About user account and MAC When you add a new user you can input the MAC address of current user Only the user of the same MAC address can access the device remotely MAC address is for the device of the same LAN If you leave MAC address item in blank when you add a new user the user of any MAC address can access the device remotely You can set or change MAC address when you add or modify a user The MAC address function is also valid for PSS login Please note current function does not support IPV6 After all the setups please click save button system goes back to the previous menu 219 ACCOUNT 888888 Login Local 666666 Normal admin Normal default Default User Add User Modify User Add Group Modify Group Mo
336. y way for you to test whether the records from the corresponding channel is saved in the specified HDD You can remove the HDD and then check the channel can record or not You can see the channel does not record and you can not search the previous record now g gt HDD Channel channel HDD Group channel HDD Group 2 2 L L L L L L L L L 1 1 L L L Cancel Figure 5 48 Channel Quota Please note only the product of the quota setup icon supports this function Here you can set channel storage capacity See Figure 5 49 216 HDD No Read Write Normal 931 40 GB Type Status Capacity Record Time 13 01 14 15 40 13 13 01 14 15 49 43 13 01 14 15 49 43 13 01 15 13 55 04 13 01 14 15 49 43 HDD MANAGE Alarm Set Alarm Release Setto Read Write 13 01 15 17 24 54 13 01 15 02 00 03 13 01 15 14 02 30 13 01 15 15 48 27 13 01 15 02 00 04 Figure 5 49 Click Quota Setup button you can go to Figure 5 50 Here you can set the each channel storage capacity in each HDD Quota Setup Channel 1 v HDD No SATA1 Quota 0 gt HDD No SATA1 Free Space 100 Quota 25 7 Free Space 50 Quota Statistics Figure 5 50 Click Quota Statistics you can go to the following interface You can view HDD capacity you set for each channel See Figure 5 51 217 Quota Statistics 232 86 GB 232 83 GB 232 84 GB Other Channels 232 84 GB Figure 5 51
337. ze remote maintenance View alarm information such as external alarm motion detection and video loss via client Support network PTZ lens control File download backup and playback Multiple devices share information via corresponding software such as professional surveillance software PSS Duplex transparent COM Network alarm input and output Bidirectional audio Motion Zone setup support 396 PAL 22x18 NTSC 22x15 detection zones Motion Detection Various sensitivity levels Detection and Alarm can activate record or external alarm or screen message prompt Alarm Video Loss Alarm can activate external alarm or screen message prompt Alarm message in specified period Manual Enable or disable alarm input channel Control 4 ch alarm input You 8 ch alarm input You 16 ch alarm input can set normal open or can set normal open or You can set Alarm Input normal close type to normal close type to normal open or select the alarm type select the alarm type normal close Alarm 3 channel relay output Output Alarm Relay 30V DC 2A 125VAC 1A activation alarm USB 2 USB 2 0 ports Interface Interface Network RJ45 10M 100M 1000M self adaptable Ethernet port connection PTZ control port AS485 Support various PTZ control protocols Network Function Network control type to select the alarm type RS232 Ordinary COM Debug keyboard connection and transparent serial port COM input and o

N6 Series Standalone DVR User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents